PROJECT MANUAL TABLE OF CONTENTS … County Courthouse ... DOCUMENT 00 00 10 - PROJECT MANUAL TABLE OF CONTENTS VOLUME I ... UUU Date Date Form 7 Owner

Broward County Courthouse

October 21, 2011 Table of Contents

Addendum #6 00 00 10 - 1

DOCUMENT 00 00 10 - PROJECT MANUAL TABLE OF CONTENTS

VOLUME I

Number Title Original Issue Current Issue

UUU Date Date

INTRODUCTORY INFORMATION

00 00 10 Project Manual Table of Contents 08/15/11 10/21/11

BIDDING REQUIREMENTS

00 11 00 Notice for Bids 08/15/11

00 21 00 General Instructions to Bidders 08/15/11

00 21 13 Instructions to Bidders 08/15/11

00 31 00 Available Project Information 08/15/11

00 31 21 Survey Information 08/15/11

00 31 24.13 Geotechnical Report and Soil Borings 08/15/11

00 31 26.23 Special Notices: Asbestos Containing Materials

In County Buildings 08/15/11

00 43 13 Bid/Tender Form 08/15/11

00 43 23 Schedule of Prices Bid 08/15/11 10/12/11

00 43 24 County Licenses, Permits and Fees 08/15/11 09/13/11

00 43 37 County Business Enterprise Notice (CBE) 08/15/11

00 43 38 Requirements for Contracts with CBE Goals 08/15/11

00 43 39 CBE Letter of Intent 08/15/11

00 43 40 Schedule of CBE Participation 08/15/11

00 43 41 Schedule of CBE Unavailability 08/15/11

00 43 42 Bidder CBE Response Sheet 08/15/11

00 43 53 Statement of Compliance (Davis Bacon Act) 08/15/11 09/13/11

00 45 07 Bid Guaranty Form Unconditional Letter of Credit 08/15/11

00 45 13 Supplement to Bid/Tender Form Certification 08/15/11

00 45 19 Supplement to Bid/Tender Form Non-Collusion Cert 08/15/11

Form 1 Local Vendor Certification (Tiebreaker Criteria) 08/15/11

Form 2 Domestic Partner Benefit Certification

(Tiebreaker Criteria) 08/15/11

Form 3 Broward County Awarded Projects (Tiebreaker

Criteria) 08/15/11 09/13/11

00 45 37 Supplement to Bid/Tender Form

Drug Free Workplace Certification 08/15/11

00 45 38 Supplement to Bid/Tender Form Trench Safety Act 08/15/11

Form 4 Vendors List (Non-certified Subcontractors

And Suppliers Information) 08/15/11

Form 5 Scrutinized Companies List Certification 08/15/11

Form 6 Lobbying Registration Certification 09/13/11



Addendum #6 00 00 10 - 2


UUU Date Date

Form 7 Owner Controlled Insurance Program Certification 09/13/11

00 50 00 CAF 170 Contract 08/15/11 10/05/11

00 59 00 Contract Supplement 08/15/11 09/13/11

00 61 13.13 Form of Performance Bond 08/15/11

00 61 13.16 Form of Payment Bond 08/15/11

00 61 27 Performance and Payment Guaranty Form

Unconditional Letter of Credit 08/15/11

00 61 30 Certificate as to Corporate Principal 08/15/11

00 65 16 Certificate of Substantial Completion 08/15/11 09/13/11

00 65 19 Final Certificate of Payment 08/15/11

00 65 19.13 Certification of Payment to Subcontractors 08/15/11

00 65 19.26 Form of Final Receipt 08/15/11 09/13/11

00 65 21 Final List of Subcontractors and Suppliers 08/15/11

00 72 00 General Conditions 08/15/11 10/21/11

Exhibit A Owner Controlled Insurance Program (OCIP) 11/16/10

Exhibit B OCIP Safety and Loss Prevention Manual 10/13/10

Exhibit C Certificate of Insurance Requirements 08/15/11

Exhibit D Monthly CBE Utilization Report 08/15/11

Exhibit E Final CBE Utilization Report 08/15/11

00 73 00 Supplementary Conditions 08/15/11

00 80 00 Drawings Index 08/15/11

00 91 13 Addenda and Modifications 08/15/11

00 92 00 Additional Articles 09/13/11

CONSTRUCTION PRODUCTS AND ACTIVITIES

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

01 10 00 Summary of Work 08/15/11

01 21 00 Allowances 08/15/11

01 22 00 Unit Prices 08/15/11

01 23 00 Alternates 08/15/11

01 26 00 Contract Modification Procedures 08/15/11

01 26 00A Proposal Request 08/15/11

01 26 00B Change Order Request (Proposal) 08/15/11

01 26 00C Proposal Worksheet Detail 08/15/11

01 26 00D Proposal Worksheet Summary 08/15/11

01 26 00E Construction Change Directive 08/15/11

01 26 00F Consultant’s Supplemental Instructions 08/15/11

01 26 50 CPEAM Procedures 08/15/11

01 29 00 Payment Procedures 08/15/11

01 29 00A Application for Payment 08/15/11

01 30 00 Direct Owner Purchases 08/15/11 09/13/11



Addendum #6 00 00 10 - 3


UUU Date Date

01 31 00 Project Management & Coordination 08/15/11 09/13/11

01 31 00A Contractor’s Request for Interpretation 08/15/11

01 32 00 Construction Progress Documentation 08/15/11 09/13/11

01 32 00A Weekly Progress Report 08/15/11

01 32 00B Periodic Observation Report 08/15/11

01 32 00C Non-Conforming Work Notice 08/15/11

01 33 00 Submittal Procedures 08/15/11

01 33 00A Transmittal Form 08/15/11

01 35 00 Special Procedures 08/15/11

01 41 00 Regulatory Requirements 08/15/11

01 42 00 References 08/15/11

01 43 00 Quality Assurance 08/15/11

01 45 00 Quality Control 08/15/11

01 51 00 Temporary Utilities 08/15/11

01 52 00 Construction Facilities 08/15/11 09/22/11

01 54 00 Construction Aids 08/15/11

01 55 00 Vehicular Access and Parking 08/15/11

01 56 00 Temporary Barriers and Enclosures 08/15/11

01 56 38 Tree Relocation 08/15/11

01 56 39 Tree and Plant Protection 08/15/11

01 57 00 Temporary Controls 08/15/11 10/12/11

01 58 00 Project Identification 08/15/11

05 58 13 Temporary Project Signage 08/15/11

01 61 00 Basic Product Requirements 08/15/11

01 62 00 Product Options 08/15/11

01 63 00 Product Substitution Procedures 08/15/11 09/22/11

01 63 00A Contractor’s Substitution Request 08/15/11

01 63 00B Contractors Bidding Substitution Request 09/22/11

01 66 30 Product Delivery, Storage and

Handling Requirements 08/15/11

01 71 00 Examination 08/15/11

01 72 00 Preparation 08/15/11

01 73 00 Execution 08/15/11

01 74 00 Cleaning 08/15/11

01 74 19 Construction Waste Management and Disposal 08/15/11

01 75 00 Starting and Adjusting 08/15/11

01 76 00 Protection of Installed Construction 08/15/11

01 77 00 Closeout Procedures 08/15/11

01 77 00A Contractor's Request for Substantial

Completion Inspection 08/15/11

01 77 00B Consultant's Notification of Readiness

for Substantial Completion Inspection 08/15/11

01 77 00C Substantial Completion Inspection 08/15/11

01 77 00D Substantial Completion Punch List 08/15/11



Addendum #6 00 00 10 - 4


UUU Date Date

01 77 00E Consultant's Letter Establishing Substantial

Completion Date 08/15/11

01 77 00F Contractor's Request for Final Completion

Inspection 08/15/11

01 77 00G Consultant's Notification of Readiness for

Final Completion Inspection 08/15/11

01 77 00H Consultant's Letter Establishing Final

Completion Date 08/15/11

01 78 00 Closeout Submittals 08/15/11

01 79 00 Demonstration and Training 08/15/11

01 81 13.13 Sustainable Design Requirements – LEED for

New Construction and Major Renovations 08/15/11 10/05/11

01 81 13.14 General Commissioning Requirements 08/15/11

DIVISION 2 – SITE CONSTRUCTION

02 41 16 Structure Demolition 08/15/11

02 41 18 Structure Demolition-West and

Central Courthouse and Energy Center 10/05/11

02 41 19 Selective Structure Demolition 08/15/11

02 41 21 Selective Structure Demolition-West and

Central Courthouse and Energy Center 10/05/11

DIVISION 3 – CONCRETE

03 30 00 Cast-in-Place Concrete 08/15/11

03 38 00 Post-Tensioned Prestressed Concrete 08/15/11

03 41 00 Plant-Precast Structural Concrete 08/15/11

03 45 13 Precast Architectural Concrete Panels 08/15/11

03 95 00 Concrete Sealer 08/15/11

DIVISION 4 – MASONRY

04 20 00 Unit Masonry 08/15/11 10/21/11

DIVISION 5 – METALS

05 12 00 Structural Steel 08/15/11

05 40 00 Cold Formed Metal Framing 08/15/11

05 50 00 Metal Fabrications 08/15/11

05 51 00 Metal Stairs 08/15/11

05 52 13 Pipe and Tube Railings 08/15/11

05 53 05 Metal Gratings 08/15/11

05 72 10 Glass Railing System 08/15/11

05 73 20 Aluminum Railings 08/15/11 09/22/11



Addendum #6 00 00 10 - 5


UUU Date Date

05 75 00 Decorative Formed Metal 08/15/11 10/05/11

05 75 13 Formed Metal Column Covers 08/15/11 10/05/11

05 75 50 Ornamental Metal 08/15/11

DIVISION 6 – WOOD AND PLASTICS

06 10 00 Rough Carpentry 08/15/11 10/21/11

06 16 00 Sheathing 08/15/11

06 20 00 Interior Finish Carpentry 08/15/11

06 41 00 Architectural Wood Casework 08/15/11 10/21/11

06 42 16 Wood-Veneer Paneling 08/15/11

06 64 13 Architectural Wall Panels 08/15/11

DIVISION 7 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

07 11 13 Bituminous Dampproofing 08/15/11

07 13 26 Self-Adhered Sheet Waterproofing 08/15/11

07 14 00 Fluid-Applied Waterproofing 08/15/11

07 18 00 Traffic Coatings 08/15/11

07 19 00 Water Repellents 08/15/11

07 21 00 Thermal Insulation 08/15/11

07 21 29 Sprayed Insulation 10/21/11

07 27 26 Fluid-Applied Membrane Air Barriers 08/15/11

07 42 13 Metal Soffit Panels 08/15/11

07 42 14 Insulated Metal Wall Panels 08/15/11

07 42 64 Formed Metal Panel System 08/15/11 10/05/11

07 54 10 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Roofing 08/15/11 10/05/11

07 54 16 Ethylene Interpolymer (KEE) Roofing 08/15/11 10/05/11

07 62 00 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 08/15/11

07 71 00 Roof Specialties 08/15/11

07 72 00 Roof Accessories 08/15/11

07 82 05 Board and Blanket Fireproofing 08/15/11

07 84 00 Firestopping 08/15/11

07 90 05 Joint Sealers 08/15/11 10/21/11

DIVISION 8 – DOORS AND WINDOWS

08 11 13 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 08/15/11

08 14 16 Flush Wood Doors 08/15/11 09/22/11

08 14 33 Stile-and-Rail Wood Doors 08/15/11

08 31 00 Access Doors and Frames 08/15/11

08 33 23 Overhead Coiling Doors 08/15/11 09/22/11

08 34 83 Elevator Door Smoke Containment System 08/15/11

08 41 26 All Glass Entrances and Storefronts 08/15/11 10/12/11



Addendum #6 00 00 10 - 6


UUU Date Date

08 43 13 Aluminum-Framed Storefronts 08/15/11 09/22/11

08 43 14 Interior Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts 08/15/11

08 44 16 Glazed Aluminum Curtain Wall 08/15/11 09/22/11

08 44 18 Glazed Aluminum Curtain Wall (East Building) 10/05/11

08 44 33 Glass Entrance Canopy 08/15/11 09/22/11

08 51 13 Aluminum Windows 08/15/11 09/22/11

08 56 53 Transaction Security Windows 08/15/11

08 56 54 Detention Windows 08/15/11

08 56 55 Transaction Windows 08/15/11 09/22/11

08 71 00 Door Hardware (Parking Garage) 08/15/11

08 71 11 Door Hardware (Main Bldg.) 08/15/11 10/12/11

08 80 00 Glazing 08/15/11 10/12/11

08 81 00 Glazing (East Building) 10/05/11

08 91 00 Louvers 08/15/11 10/12/11

08 92 00 Wall Louvers – East Building 10/12/11

DIVISION 9 – FINISHES

09 21 16 Gypsum Board Assemblies 08/15/11

09 24 01 Portland Cement Plastering 08/15/11

09 26 13 Interior Acoustical Plastering 08/15/11

09 30 00 Tiling 08/15/11 10/21/11

09 51 00 Acoustical Ceilings 08/15/11

09 51 33 Acoustical Metal Pan Ceilings 08/15/11 10/05/11

09 65 00 Resilient Flooring 08/15/11 10/21/11

09 66 23 Resinous Matrix Terrazzo Flooring 08/15/11 10/21/11

09 67 00 Fluid-Applied Flooring 08/15/11

09 68 13 Tile Carpeting 08/15/11 09/22/11

09 72 00 Wall Coverings 08/15/11 10/21/11

09 75 13 Stone Paneling 10/21/11

09 77 00 Special Wall Surfaces 08/15/11

09 77 13 Aluminum Wall Cladding System 08/15/11

09 83 11 Acoustical Wall Systems 08/15/11

09 90 00 Painting and Coating 08/15/11

09 96 00 High Performance Coatings 08/15/11



Addendum #6 00 00 10 - 7


UUU Date Date

DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES

10 11 01 Visual Display Boards 08/15/11 10/21/11

10 13 00 Directories 08/15/11

10 14 16 Plaques 08/15/11

10 14 19 Dimensional Letter Signage 08/15/11

10 14 23 Panel Signage 08/15/11

10 21 13.19 Plastic Toilet Compartments 08/15/11

10 22 13 Wire Mesh Partitions 10/12/11

10 22 26.13 Accordian Folding Partitions 10/21/11

10 22 26.33 Folding Panel Partitions 08/15/11

10 26 00 Wall Protection 08/15/11

10 28 01 Toilet Accessories 08/15/11 10/05/11

10 28 13.63 Detention Toilet Accessories 08/15/11

10 42 00 Emergency Aid Specialties 08/15/11

10 44 00 Fire Protection Specialties 08/15/11

10 51 00 Lockers 08/15/11

10 51 10 Custom Wood Lockers 08/15/11

10 71 13.43 Exterior Sun Shade Devices 08/15/11

10 82 13 Airfoil Bladed Equipment Screens 08/15/11 10/12/11

10 99 10 Wall Clock 10/05/11

DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT

11 01 40 Window Maintenance Equipment 08/15/11 10/05/11

11 12 00 Parking Control Equipment 10/21/11

11 13 13 Loading Dock Bumpers 08/15/11

11 13 16 Loading Dock Seals and Shelters 08/15/11

11 14 13.13 Pedestrian Control Devices 08/15/11 10/12/11

11 19 00 Detention Equipment General Requirements 08/15/11

11 19 10 Detention Doors and Frames 08/15/11

11 19 20 Detention Door Hardware 08/15/11

11 19 50 Detention Access Panels 08/15/11

11 19 60 Security Fasteners 08/15/11

11 19 70 Security Glazing 08/15/11 10/12/11

11 19 80 Security Screens 08/15/11

11 19 95 Detention Metal Ceilings 08/15/11

11 82 27 Waste Compactors 08/15/11

DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS

12 21 15 Manual Roller Shades 08/15/11

12 36 00 Countertops 08/15/11 10/21/11

12 48 13 Entrance Floor Mats and Frames 08/15/11 10/12/11



Addendum #6 00 00 10 - 8


UUU Date Date

12 51 00 Office Furniture 08/15/11 10/12/11

12 52 00 Seating 08/15/11 09/13/11

12 55 00 Detention Furniture 08/15/11

12 59 00 Workstation Furniture 08/15/11

12 61 17 Jury Seating 08/15/11

12 62 00 Wood Pews 08/15/11 09/22/11

DIVISION 13 – SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION

13 46 00 Bullet Resistant Protection 08/15/11 10/12/11

DIVISION 14 – CONVEYING SYSTEMS

14 21 00 Electric Traction Elevators 08/15/11

14 21 50 Machine-Room-Less Traction Elevators 08/15/11

14 21 55 Machine-Room Less Traction Elevator

(Pedestrian Bridge and East Building) 10/12/11

14 21 56 Machine-Room Less Traction Elevator

(Parking Garage and East Building) 10/21/11

14 24 00 Hydraulic Elevators (Bridge) 10/21/11

14 31 00 Escalators 08/15/11



Addendum #6 00 00 10 - 9


UUU Date Date

VOLUME II

DIVISION 21 – FIRE SUPPRESSION

20 01 40 Fire Protection System Maintenance and Prevention

of Microbiologically Influenced Corrosion 08/15/11

21 12 23 Fire Protection System, Piping, Fittings and Valves 08/15/11

21 13 13 Wet-Pipe Fire Sprinkler System 08/15/11

21 22 00 Sapphire Clean-Agent Fire Suppression System 08/15/11

21 30 10 Fire Pump and Controls 08/15/11

DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING

22 01 08 Basic Piping Materials and Methods 08/15/11

22 01 09 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods 08/15/11

22 05 00 Plumbing Piping 08/15/11

22 05 10 Plumbing Specialties 08/15/11

22 05 15 Plumbing Demolition - West and Central

Courthouse and Energy Center 10/05/11

22 05 16 Expansion Fittings & Loops for Plumbing Piping 08/15/11

22 05 29 Supports and Anchors 08/15/11

22 05 53 Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment 08/15/11

22 06 40 Plumbing Fixtures 08/15/11

22 07 00 Plumbing Insulation 08/15/11

22 08 00 Commissioning of Plumbing 08/15/11

22 11 13 Facility Water Distribution Piping 08/15/11

22 11 15 Facility Fuel-Oil Piping 08/15/11

22 11 16 Domestic Water Piping 08/15/11

22 11 20 Valves 08/15/11

22 11 23 Domestic Water Pumps 08/15/11

22 13 13 Facility Sanitary Sewer 08/15/11

22 13 16 Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping 08/15/11

22 13 29 Sanitary Sewage Pumps 08/15/11

22 14 00 Drainage Systems 08/15/11

22 14 13 Facility Storm Drainage Piping 08/15/11

22 14 23 Storm Drainage Piping Specialties 08/15/11

DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING

23 00 00 Mechanical General Provisions 08/15/11

23 05 00 Common Work Results for HVAC 08/15/11 09/22/11



Addendum #6 00 00 10 - 10


UUU Date Date

23 05 13 Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment 08/15/11

23 05 14 Wiring, Motors and Starters 08/15/11

23 05 16W Expansion Fittings and Loops for HVAC Piping 08/15/11

23 05 17W Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC Piping 08/15/11 09/22/11

23 05 18W Escutcheons for HVAC Piping 08/15/11

23 05 19W Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping 08/15/11

23 05 23W General-Duty Valves for HVAC Piping 08/15/11 09/22/11

23 05 29W Hangers and Supports for HVAC

Piping & Equipment 08/15/11 09/22/11

23 05 48W Vibration & Seismic Controls for HVAC 08/15/11

Piping & Equipment 08/15/11

23 05 53 Identification for HVAC Piping & Equipment 08/15/11

23 05 93 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC 08/15/11

23 07 00 HVAC Duct Insulation 08/15/11

23 07 16W HVAC Equipment Insulation 08/15/11 10/05/11

23 07 19W HVAC Piping Insulation 08/15/11

23 08 00 Commissioning of HVAC 08/15/11

23 21 13W Hydronic Piping 08/15/11 09/22/11

23 21 23W Hydronic Pumps 08/15/11

23 25 00W HVAC Water Treatment 08/15/11

23 31 13 Metal Ducts 08/15/11

23 31 19 HVAC Casing 08/15/11

23 33 00 Air Duct Accessories 08/15/11

23 34 13 Axial HVAC Fans 08/15/11

23 34 16 Centrifugal HVAC Fans 08/15/11

23 34 23 HVAC Power Ventilators 08/15/11

23 36 00 Air Terminal Units 08/15/11

23 37 13 Diffusers, Registers and Grilles 08/15/11

23 37 23 HVAC Gravity Ventilators 08/15/11

23 41 00 Particulate Air Filtration08/15/11

23 64 16W Centrifugal Water Chillers 08/15/11 09/22/11

23 65 00W Cooling Towers 08/15/11

23 73 13 Modular Indoor Central Station Air

Handling Units 08/15/11

23 81 23 Computer-Room Air-Conditioners 08/15/11

23 82 16 Air Coils 08/15/11

23 82 19 Fan Coil Units 08/15/11

DIVISION 25 – INTEGRATED AUTOMATION

25 00 50 Common Work Results for Building Automation

And Control System 08/15/11 10/21/11

25 02 00 Broward County Facilities Maintenance Division

Energy and Building Automation 08/15/11 10/12/11

25 35 00 Refrigerant Detection and Alarm 08/15/11



Addendum #6 00 00 10 - 11


UUU Date Date

DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL

26 01 00 Basic Electrical Requirements 08/15/11 10/05/11

26 05 00 Common Work Results for Electrical 08/15/11

26 05 19 Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors

and Cables 08/15/11

26 05 23 Control-Voltage Electrical Power Cables 08/15/11

26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 08/15/11

26 05 29 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 08/15/11

26 05 33 Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems 08/15/11

26 05 43 Underground Ducts and Raceways

for Electrical Systems 08/15/11 09/22/11

26 05 44 Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical

Raceways and Cabling 08/15/11

26 05 53 Identification for Electrical Systems 08/15/11

26 05 73 Power System Study and Submittal 08/15/11

26 09 13 Electrical Power Monitoring and Control 08/15/11

26 09 23 Lighting Control Devices 08/15/11

26 09 43 Lighting Control System 08/15/11

26 22 00 Low-Voltage Transformers 08/15/11

26 23 00 Low-Voltage Switchgear 08/15/11

26 23 13 Paralleling Low-Voltage Switchgear 08/15/11 10/05/11

26 24 13 Switchboards 08/15/11

26 24 16 Panelboards 08/15/11

26 25 00 Enclosed Bus Assemblies 08/15/11

26 27 26 Wiring Devices 08/15/11

26 28 16 Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers 08/15/11

26 32 13 Engine Generators 08/15/11 10/05/11

26 36 00 Transfer Switches 08/15/11

26 41 13 Lightning Protection for Structures 08/15/11

26 43 13 Transient-Voltage Suppression for Low-Voltage 08/15/11

Electrical Power Circuit 08/15/11

26 51 00 Lighting 08/15/11

26 56 00 Exterior Lighting 08/15/11

DIVISION 27 – COMMUNICATIONS

27 01 00 Basic Communication Requirements 08/15/11

27 01 01 Communications, Fire Alarm & DAS Demolition

West and Central Courthouse and Energy Center 10/05/11

27 05 36 Communications Systems Cable Trays 08/15/11

27 11 00 Communications Equipment Room Fittings 08/15/11 10/05/11

27 13 00 Communications Backbone Cabling 08/15/11



Addendum #6 00 00 10 - 12


UUU Date Date

27 14 00 Communications Outside Plant Cabling 08/15/11

27 15 00 Communications Horizontal Cabling 08/15/11

27 17 00 Communications Distributed Antenna System 08/15/11

27 41 00 Audio-Video Systems 08/15/11

DIVISION 28 – ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

28 31 11 Addressable Fire-Alarm

Mass-Notification System 08/15/11 10/21/11

28 31 12 Addressable Fire-Alarm Mass-Notification

System – East Wing & North Tower 10/05/11 10/21/11

28 70 00 Electronic Security System General Requirements 08/15/11

28 70 10 Electronic Security Systems Wiring Requirements 08/15/11

28 70 15 Electronic Security Systems Grounding

and Surge Protection 08/15/11

28 70 20 Electronic Security Systems Uninterruptable

Power Supplies 08/15/11

28 70 25 Electronic Security Systems Consoles, Cabinets

and Enclosures 08/15/11

28 70 30 Electronic Security Systems Door Control System

(Detention Area) 08/15/11

28 70 35 Electronic Security Systems Intercom

and Paging Systems 08/15/11

28 70 40 Electronic Security Systems Closed Circuit

Television System 08/15/11

28 70 50 Electronic Security Systems Card Access System 08/15/11

DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK

31 10 00 Site Clearing 08/15/11

31 20 00 Earth Moving 08/15/11

31 23 19 Dewatering 08/15/11 10/05/11

31 62 13 Intrusion Mortar Cast-in-Place Piling1B1B1B1B 08/15/11

1BDIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS

32 12 16 Asphalt Paving 08/15/11

32 13 13 Concrete Paving 08/15/11

32 13 73 Concrete Paving Joint Sealants 08/15/11

32 14 13 Precast Concrete Unit Paving 08/15/11

32 14 40 Stone Paving 08/15/11

32 18 26 Synthetic Grass Surfacing 10/21/11

32 31 13 Chain Link Fences and Gates 08/15/11

32 40 00 Site Furnishings 08/15/11



Addendum #6 00 00 10 - 13


UUU Date Date

32 84 00 Irrigation System 08/15/11

32 92 00 Sodding 08/15/11

32 93 00 Trees, Plants and Groundcovers 08/15/11

32 94 50 Silva Cells 08/15/11

DIVISION 33 – UTILITIES

33 05 00 Common Work Results for Utilities 08/15/11

APPENDIXES

Owner’s Project Requirements; 06-22-2010 08/15/11

Revised Geotechnical Report; 11-11-2010 08/15/11

Acoustical Report; 08-16-2010 08/15/11

FM Global Letter of 29 June 2011 08/15/11

FM Global Property Loss Prevention Data Sheet 2-1, May 2001 08/15/11

Office Furniture – Tables 1 of 2; Appendix A 08/15/11 10/12/11

Office Furniture – Tables 2 of 2; Appendix A 08/15/11 10/12/11

Office Furniture (Private Offices) 1 of 2; Appendix B 08/15/11

Office Furniture (Private Offices) 2 of 2; Appendix B 08/15/11

Office Furniture – Appendix C 10/21/11

Office Furniture – Appendix D 08/15/11

Office Furniture Appendix F 08/15/11 10/12/11

Office Furniture Appendix G 10/12/11

Office Furniture Appendix H 10/12/11

Office Furniture – Appendix I 10/21/11

Seating – Appendix A.1 08/15/11 10/12/11

Workstation Furniture – Appendix A 08/15/11

Workstation Furniture – Appendix B 08/15/11 10/12/11

Workstation Furniture – Appendix C 08/15/11

Smoke Control System Engineering Analysis 09/22/11

OCIP manual revised (09/23/11) 10/05/11

Dewatering Plan 10/05/11

END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS

Broward County Courthouse CAF#170 –GENERAL CONDITIONS

August 15, 2011 October 21, 2011 00 72 00 - 1 BID SET Addendum #6

00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS 1. Contract Documents:

1.1. The Contract Documents are defined in Document 00 50 00, Contract.

1.2. The Contract Documents shall be followed in strict accordance as to work, performance, material, and dimensions except when written authorization as further described below provides an exception.

1.3. Dimensions given in figures are to hold preference over scaled

measurements from the drawings; however, all discrepancies shall be resolved by CONSULTANT. CONTRACTOR shall not proceed when in doubt as to any dimension or measurement, but shall seek clarification from CONSULTANT.

1.4. CONTRACTOR shall be furnished two (2) digital copies, free of charge, of

the Contract Documents on a CD, DVD or other alternative media. CONTRACTOR shall print two (2) hard copies of the Contract Documents and maintain and preserve those copies and keep them always accessible to the Contract Administrator and authorized representatives, OCPM, CONSULTANT and CONSULTANT's authorized representatives. Additional copies of the Contract Documents in digital format may be obtained from COUNTY at the cost of reproduction.

1.5. CONTRACTOR shall be furnished signed and sealed prints as may be

required by authorities having jurisdiction over the project. 2. Intention of COUNTY:

It is the intent of COUNTY to describe in the Contract Documents a functionally complete Project to be constructed in accordance with the Contract Documents and in accordance with all codes and regulations governing construction of the Project. Any work, materials or equipment that may reasonably be inferred from the Contract Documents as being required to produce the intended result shall be supplied by CONTRACTOR whether or not specifically called for. When words which have a well-known technical or trade meaning are used to describe work, materials or equipment, such words shall be interpreted in accordance with that meaning. Reference to standard specifications, manuals, or codes of any technical society, organization or association, or to the laws or regulations of any governmental authority, whether such reference be specific or by implication, shall mean the latest standard specification, manual, code or laws or regulations in effect at the time of opening of bids and CONTRACTOR shall comply



therewith. COUNTY shall have no duties other than those duties and obligations expressly set forth within the Contract Documents.

3. Preliminary Matters:

3.1. Within twenty one (21) calendar days after the first Notice to Proceed, the CONTRACTOR shall submit to OCPM for the Contract Administrator’s, OCPM’s, and CONSULTANT’s review and acceptance the following:

3.1.1. A preliminary construction progress schedule in Primavera P6 in

adequate detail for review by the OCPM which will indicate how CONTRACTOR proposes to achieve the required substantial and final completion dates as specified in the Contract, Section 3.4. This schedule shall be as described in Division 1, Section 01 32 00.

3.1.2. A preliminary schedule of Shop Drawing submissions as specified

in Division 1, Section 01 33 00. 3.1.3. A preliminary schedule of values for all of the Work which will

include quantities and prices of items aggregating the Contract Price and which subdivides the Work into component parts in sufficient detail to serve as the basis for progress payments during construction. The Schedule of Values shall be in accordance with the requirements of Division 1, Section 01 29 00 Part 1.03.

3.1.4. A listing of materials which CONTRACTOR proposes to be

purchased under the Direct Owner Purchase Program. This program is specified in Section 01 30 00.

3.2. At a time specified by OCPM but before CONTRACTOR starts the work at

the Project site, a Pre-Construction Conference attended by CONTRACTOR, CONSULTANT, OCPM and others as deemed appropriate by the Contract Administrator, will be held. The purpose of this meeting will be to discuss the schedules referred to in Section 3.1 above, the procedures for handling Shop Drawings and other submittals, preparation and processing of Applications for Payment, relations with the occupants of the existing Courthouse and Jail, and to establish an understanding among the parties as to the Work.

3.3. CONTRACTOR shall incorporate the Contract Administrator’s, OCPM’s,

and CONSULTANT’s comments and requirements into the documents and schedules in the form and content specified in Division 1 of the Technical Specifications.



4. Performance Bond and Payment Bond: Within fifteen (15) calendar days of being notified of the award, CONTRACTOR

shall furnish a Performance Bond and a Payment Bond in the form set forth in Sections 00 61 13.13 (Performance Bond) and 00 61 13.16 (payment Bond), respectively.

4.1. Each Bond shall be in the amount of one hundred percent (100%) of the

Contract Price guaranteeing to COUNTY the completion and performance of the Work covered in such Contract as well as full payment of all suppliers, laborers, or subcontractors employed pursuant to this Project. Each Bond shall be with a surety company which is qualified pursuant to Article 5.

4.2. Each Bond shall continue in effect for one (1) year after Final Completion

and acceptance of the Work with liability equal to one hundred percent (100%) of the Contract sum, or an additional bond shall be conditioned that CONTRACTOR will, upon notification by COUNTY, correct any defective or faulty work or materials which appear within one (1) year after Final Completion of the Contract.

4.3. Pursuant to the requirements of Section 255.05(1)(a), Florida Statutes, as

may be amended from time to time, CONTRACTOR shall ensure that the bond(s) referenced above shall be recorded in the public records of Broward County and provide COUNTY with evidence of such recording.

4.4. Alternate Form of Security:

In lieu of a Performance Bond and a Payment Bond, CONTRACTOR may furnish alternate forms of security which may be in the form of cash, money order, certified check, cashier's check or unconditional letter of credit (00 45 07). Such alternate forms of security shall be subject to the approval of COUNTY and for same purpose and shall be subject to the same conditions as those applicable above and shall be held by COUNTY for one (1) year after completion and acceptance of the Work.

5. Qualification of Surety:

5.1. Bid Bonds, Performance Bonds and Payment Bonds over Five Hundred Thousand Dollars ($500,000.00):

5.1.1. Each bond must be executed by a surety company of recognized

standing, authorized to do business in the State of Florida as surety, having a resident agent in the State of Florida and having



been in business with a record of successful continuous operation for at least five (5) years.

5.1.2. The surety company shall hold a current certificate of authority as

acceptable surety on federal bonds in accordance with United States Department of Treasury Circular 570, Current Revisions. If the amount of the Bond exceeds the underwriting limitation set forth in the circular, in order to qualify, the net retention of the surety company shall not exceed the underwriting limitation in the circular, and the excess risks must be protected by coinsurance, reinsurance, or other methods in accordance with Treasury Circular 297, revised September 1, 1978 (31 CFR Section 223.10, Section 223.111). Further, the surety company shall provide COUNTY with evidence satisfactory to COUNTY, that such excess risk has been protected in an acceptable manner.

5.1.3. The COUNTY will accept a surety bond from a company in

accordance with the requirements set forth below, provided, however, that if any surety company appears on the watch list that is published quarterly by Intercom of the Office of the Florida Insurance Commissioner, the COUNTY shall review and either accept or reject the surety company based on the financial information available to the COUNTY. A surety company that is rejected by the COUNTY may be substituted by the CONTRACTOR, with prior written authorization of the Contract Administrator, with a surety company acceptable to the COUNTY, only if the contract price does not increase. The following sets forth, in general, the acceptable parameters for bonds:

Amount of Bond

Policy Holder’s Ratings

Financial Size

Category

500,001 to 1,000,000 A- Class I

1,000,001 to 2,000,000 A- Class II

2,000,001 to 5,000,000 A Class III

5,000,001 to 10,000,000 A Class IV

10,000,001 to 25,000,000 A Class V

25,000,001 to 50,000,000 A Class VI

50,000,001 or more A Class VII

5.2. Intentionally deleted



5.3. More stringent requirements of any grantor agency are set forth within the Supplemental Conditions. If there are no more stringent requirements, the provisions of this section shall apply.

6. Indemnification:

CONTRACTOR shall indemnify and hold harmless COUNTY, its officers and employees, from liabilities, damages, losses, and costs, including, but not limited to reasonable attorney’s fees, to the extent caused by the negligence, recklessness or intentionally wrongful conduct of CONTRACTOR and persons employed or utilized by CONTRACTOR in the performance of this Contract. These indemnifications shall survive the term of this Contract. To the extent considered necessary by Contract Administrator and County Attorney, any sums due CONTRACTOR under this Contract may be retained by COUNTY until all of COUNTY’s claims for indemnification pursuant to this Agreement have been settled or otherwise resolved, and any amount withheld shall not be subject to payment of interest by COUNTY. Mutual Waiver of Consequential Damages: CONTRACTOR and COUNTY expressly waive claims against each other for consequential damages arising out of or relating to this CONTRACT. Provided, however, nothing in this Agreement shall be deemed to preclude the application of liquidated damages, and extended when applicable, in accordance with the provisions of this CONTRACT.

7. Insurance Requirements

7.1 COUNTY Provided Insurance. COUNTY will provide an Owner Controlled Insurance Program (“OCIP”) for the Project. The OCIP will be administered by Aon Risk Services of Florida, Inc. The OCIP is more fully described in the insurance manual (the “Insurance Manual”) for the Project, which is hereby incorporated into this Contract by this reference and attached hereto as Exhibit A, General Conditions Exhibit. Parties performing labor or services at the Project site are eligible to enroll in the OCIP, unless they are Excluded Parties (as defined below). The OCIP will provide to Enrolled Parties (as defined below) Workers’ Compensation and Employer’s Liability insurance, Commercial General Liability insurance, Excess Liability insurance, Builder’s Risk insurance, and Pollution Liability insurance as summarily described below, in connection with the performance of the Work (“OCIP Coverages”).

7.1.1 Enrolled Parties and Their Insurance Obligations. OCIP Coverages

shall cover Enrolled Parties. Enrolled Parties are: the COUNTY, the OCIP Administrator, CONTRACTOR and eligible Subcontractors of all tiers that enroll in the OCIP, and such other



persons or entities as COUNTY may designate, in its sole discretion (each party insured under the OCIP is an “Enrolled Party.”) Enrolled Parties shall obtain and maintain, and shall require each of its or their Subcontractors to obtain and maintain, the insurance coverage specified in Section 7.2, below, and in the Insurance Manual.

7.1.2 Excluded Parties and Their Insurance Obligations. The OCIP

Coverages do not cover the following “Excluded Parties”: (a) Hazardous materials remediation, removal and/or transport

companies and their consultants; (b) Architects, surveyors, engineers, and soil testing engineers,

and their consultants; (c) Vendors, suppliers, fabricators, material dealers, truckers,

haulers, drivers and others who merely transport, pick up, deliver, or carry materials, personnel, parts or equipment, or any other items or persons to or from the Project site;

(d) CONTRACTOR and each of its or their respective Subcontractors of all tiers that do not perform any actual labor on the Project site; and

(e) Any parties or entities excluded by COUNTY in its sole discretion, even if they are otherwise eligible.

Excluded Parties and parties no longer enrolled in or covered by

the OCIP shall obtain and maintain, and shall require each of its or their Subcontractors of all tiers to obtain and maintain, the insurance coverage specified in Section 7.2, below, and in the Insurance Manual for all on-site and off-site operations.

7.1.3 OCIP Insurance Policies Establish the OCIP Coverages. The OCIP

Coverages and exclusions summarized in this Section 7.1 or in the Insurance Manual are set forth in full in their respective insurance policies. The summary descriptions of the OCIP Coverages in this Section 7.1 or the Insurance Manual are not intended to be exhaustive, or to alter or amend any provision of the actual OCIP Coverages. In the event that any provision of this Section 7.1, or the Insurance Manual conflicts with the OCIP insurance policies, the provisions of the actual OCIP insurance policies shall govern.

7.1.4 Summary of OCIP Coverages. OCIP Coverages shall apply only to

those operations of each Enrolled Party performed at the Project site in connection with the Work, and only to Enrolled Parties that are eligible for the OCIP. OCIP Coverages shall not apply to ineligible parties, even if they are erroneously enrolled in the OCIP.



An Enrolled Party’s operations away from the Project site, including product manufacturing, assembling, or otherwise, shall only be covered if such off-site operations are identified and are dedicated solely to the Project. OCIP Coverages shall not cover off-site operations until receipt by Contractor or its Subcontractor of any tier of written acknowledgment of such coverage from the OCIP Administrator. The OCIP shall provide only the following insurance to eligible and Enrolled Parties:

Summary Only

7.1.4.1 Workers’ Compensation insurance at the Statutory Limit

in compliance with the Workers’ Compensation Law of the State of Florida, and in compliance with all federal laws, including U.S. Longshore & Harbor Workers Act, and Jones Act coverage, where appropriate.

This insurance is primary for all occurrences at the Project site.

7.1.4.2 Employer’s Liability Insurance with the following

limits:

Bodily Injury by Accident, each accident

$1,000,000

Bodily Injury by Disease, each employee

$1,000,000

Bodily Injury by Disease, policy limit $1,000,000


7.1.4.3 Commercial General Liability Insurance provided on ISO Occurrence Form, or its equivalent, with the following limits:

Each Occurrence Limit $2,000,000

General Aggregate Limit for all Enrolled Parties

$4,000,000

Products & Completed Operations Aggregate for all Enrolled Parties

$4,000,000

Ten (10) Years Products &



Completed Operations Extension


7.1.4.4 Excess Liability Insurance (over Employer’s Liability &

General Liability), with the following limits:

Combined Single Limit $200,000,000

General Annual Aggregate for all Enrolled Parties

$200,000,000

Products & Completed Operations Aggregate for all Enrolled Parties

$200,000,000

Ten (10) Years Products & Completed Operations Extension

7.1.4.5 COUNTY shall obtain and maintain Builder’s Risk

insurance for the Project, if applicable, providing coverage for all risks of direct physical loss or damage including flood, earthquake, and named windstorm, as more fully described in the original policy wording. CONTRACTOR, and all subcontractors of every tier performing a portion of the Work on the Project shall be additional insureds under the Builder’s Risk insurance, as their respective interests appear. The Builder’s Risk insurance will provide for property in the course of construction, including offsite storage, transit, buildings, structures, fixtures, materials, foundations, machinery and equipment, cold testing, and damage to existing property business interruption at the New Broward County Courthouse all as more fully described in the original policy wording. The Builder’s Risk insurance will provide minimum limits of liability of $50,000,000 for physical damage and loss per project, subject to additional sub-limits as set forth in the original policy wording. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for all deductibles under the Builder’s Risk insurance up to $25,000.

7.1.4.6 Contractor’s Pollution Liability (“CPL”) insurance,

providing coverage for claims for bodily injury, property damage, clean-up costs, and related legal defense expense for pollution conditions that result from, or are



disrupted by, the services rendered in performance of the contract by or on behalf of CONTRACTOR or any Subcontractor. Coverage will include, clean up costs, extensions for transportation and disposal, will include full severability of interests, and will not be restricted by any time element limitations, mold, asbestos, or lead based paint exclusions. Coverage will apply to pollution conditions on, at, under, or migrating from the Project site. The CPL insurance shall have the following limits:

Each Loss $200,000,000

Aggregate $200,000,000

CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for all deductibles under the Contractor’s Pollution Liability (“CPL”) insurance, up to $50,000.

7.1.5 COUNTY’S Obligations. COUNTY shall pay the costs of premiums

for the OCIP Coverages. COUNTY will receive or pay, as the case may be, all adjustments to such costs, whether by way of dividends, retroactive adjustments, return premiums, other moneys due, audits or otherwise. CONTRACTOR hereby assigns to COUNTY the right to receive all such adjustments, and shall require each of its Subcontractors of every tier to assign to COUNTY the right to receive all such adjustments. COUNTY assumes no obligation to provide insurance other than that specified in this Section 7.1, and in the OCIP insurance policies. COUNTY’S furnishing of OCIP Coverages shall in no way relieve or limit, or be construed to relieve or limit, CONTRACTOR or any of its Subcontractors of any responsibility, liability, or obligation imposed by the Contract Documents, the OCIP insurance policies, or by law, including, without limitation, any indemnification obligations which CONTRACTOR or any of its Subcontractors have to COUNTY there under. COUNTY reserves the right at its option, without obligation to do so, to furnish other insurance coverage of various types and limits provided that such coverage is not less than that specified in the Contract Documents.

7.1.6 CONTRACTOR’S OCIP Obligations. CONTRACTOR shall:

7.1.6.1 Incorporate the terms of Section 7.1 of this Contract, concerning the OCIP, into all subcontract agreements.



7.1.6.2 Enroll in the OCIP within five (5) days of execution of the Contract and maintain enrollment in the OCIP for the duration of the Contract, and assure that each of CONTRACTOR’S eligible Subcontractors of every tier enroll in the OCIP, and maintain enrollment in the OCIP for the duration of their respective subcontract within five (5) days of subcontracting and prior to the commencement of Work at the Project site.

7.1.6.3 Comply with all of the administrative, safety, insurance, and

other requirements outlined in this Section 7.1, the Insurance Manual, the OCIP Safety and Loss Prevention Manual which is attached hereto as Exhibit B the OCIP insurance policies, or elsewhere in the Contract Documents.

7.1.6.4 Provide to each of its Subcontractors of every tier a copy of

the Insurance Manual, and ensure Subcontractor compliance with the provisions of the OCIP insurance policies, the Insurance Manual, this Section 7.1, and the Contract Documents. The failure of (a) COUNTY to include the Insurance Manual in the bid documents or (b) CONTRACTOR to provide to each of its eligible Subcontractors of every tier a copy of the same shall not relieve CONTRACTOR or any of its Subcontractors from any of the obligations contained therein.

7.1.6.5 Acknowledge, and require all of its Subcontractors of every

tier to acknowledge, in writing, that COUNTY and the OCIP Administrator are not agents, partners or guarantors of the insurance companies providing coverage under the OCIP (each such insurer, an “OCIP Insurer”), that neither COUNTY nor the OCIP Administrator are responsible for any claims or disputes between or among CONTRACTOR, its Subcontractors of any tier, and any OCIP Insurer(s), and that neither COUNTY nor OCIP Administrator guarantees the solvency or the availability of limits of any OCIP Insurer(s). Any type of insurance coverage or limits of liability in addition to the OCIP Coverages that CONTRACTOR or its Subcontractors of any tier require for its or their own protection, or that is required by applicable laws or regulations, shall be CONTRACTOR’S or its Subcontractors’ sole responsibility and expense, and shall not be billed to COUNTY.



7.1.6.6 Exclude the Cost of OCIP Coverages from

CONTRACTOR’S bid or proposal, and ensure that each Subcontractor of every tier excludes the Cost of OCIP Coverages from their respective bids or proposals. The “Costs of OCIP Coverages” is defined as the amount of CONTRACTOR’S and its Subcontractors’ reduction in insurance costs due to eligibility for OCIP Coverages which includes reduction in insurance premiums, related taxes and assessments, markup on the insurance premiums and losses retained through the use of a self-funded program, self-insured retention, or deductible program. The Cost of OCIP Coverages must include expected losses within any retained risk. CONTRACTOR must deduct the Cost of OCIP Coverages for all Subcontractors in addition to their own Cost of OCIP Coverages. Change orders must also be priced to exclude the Cost of OCIP Coverages.

7.1.6.7 Cooperate fully with the OCIP Administrator and the OCIP

Insurers, as applicable, in the administration of the OCIP. 7.1.6.8 Provide, within five (5) days of COUNTY’S or the OCIP

Administrator’s request, all documents or information requested of CONTRACTOR or its Subcontractors relating to eligibility for, enrollment in, or administration of the OCIP. Such information may include, but may not be limited to, payroll records, certified copies of insurance coverages, declaration pages of coverages, certificates of insurance, underwriting data, prior loss history information, safety records or history, OSHA citations, construction cost estimates for this Project, including auditable records of the calculation of the bid or Contract Price or any subcontract amount, pricing for each cost included in the bid or Contract Price or any subcontract amount, or such other data or information as COUNTY, the OCIP Administrator, or OCIP Insurers may request in the administration of the OCIP, to verify that the Costs of OCIP Coverages were not included in the Contract Price or any subcontract amount, or as required by the Insurance Manual. All such records shall be maintained through the term of the Contract and for a period of one (1) year thereafter.



7.1.6.9 Comply, and require all of its Subcontractors to comply with OCIP Administrator’s instructions for electronically enrolling in the OCIP using “Aon Wrap” and for electronically reporting payroll using “AonWrap.” If a Contractor or Subcontractor cannot provide payroll information electronically, they may provide it to the OCIP Administrator.

7.1.6.10 Pay to COUNTY a sum of up to $5,000 for each

occurrence under the OCIP’s Commercial General Liability Policy, including court costs, attorneys fees and costs of defense for bodily injury or property damage to the extent losses are attributable to CONTRACTOR’S Work, acts, or omissions, the Work, acts, or omissions of any of CONTRACTOR’S Subcontractors, or the Work, acts or omissions of any other entity or party for whom CONTRACTOR or its Subcontractor may be responsible (“General Liability Obligation”).

7.2 Additional Insurance Required From Enrolled Parties and Excluded

Parties. CONTRACTOR shall obtain and maintain, and shall require each of its Subcontractors of all tiers to obtain and maintain, the insurance coverages specified in this Section 7.2 in a form and from insurance companies reasonably acceptable to COUNTY. The insurance limits may be provided through a combination of primary and excess policies, including the umbrella form of policy. Each policy required under this Section 7.2, except the Workers’ Compensation policy, shall name COUNTY, CONSULTANT, OCPM, the OCIP Administrator, their respective officers, agents and employees, and any additional entities as COUNTY may request as additional insureds. The additional insured endorsement shall state that the coverage provided to the additional insureds is primary and non-contributory with respect to any other insurance available to the additional insureds. CONTRACTOR shall provide certificates of insurance coverage to COUNTY or the OCIP Administrator as required by the Insurance Manual. Enrolled Parties are to provide evidence of Worker’s Compensation, Employer’s Liability, General Liability, and Excess Liability insurance, as set out below, for off-site activities, and evidence of Automobile Liability insurance for all activities, both on-site and off-site. Excluded Parties must provide evidence of all insurance set out below for both on-site and off-site activities. 7.2.1 Standard Commercial Automobile Liability Insurance covering all

owned, non-owned, and hired automobiles, trucks, and trailers with



a combined single limit of not less than $1,000,000 for bodily injury, $1,000,000 for property damage, with a $5,000,000 policy limit for vehicles.

7.2.2 Workers’ Compensation insurance at the Statutory Limit in

compliance with the Workers Compensation Law of the State of Florida, and in compliance with all federal laws, including U.S. Longshore & Harbor Workers Act, and Jones Act coverage, where appropriate, and Employer’s Liability insurance with limits of not less than $1,000,000 each accident, $1,000,000 each employee, and with a $1,000,000 policy limit.

7.2.3 Commercial General Liability Insurance in a form providing

coverage not less than the standard ISO Commercial General Liability insurance policy (“Occurrence Form”). The limits shall be:

Enrolled Parties/Excluded Parties

Each Occurrence $1,000,000/$2,000,000

General Aggregate $2,000,000/$4,000,000

Products/Completed Operations Aggregate

$2,000,000/$4,000,000

Personal/Advertising Injury Aggregate

$1,000,000/$2,000,000

Ten (10) Years Products/Completed Operations Extension

7.2.4 If required by COUNTY, Aviation and/or Watercraft Liability

Insurance, in form and with limits of liability and from an insurer reasonably satisfactory to the COUNTY.

7.2.5 Contractor’s Pollution Liability insurance for Excluded Parties, with

the following limits:

Combined Single Limit per Occurrence $2,000,000

General Annual Aggregate $2,000,000

If transporting hazardous waste/materials from the Project site, an

appropriate MCS-90 Endorsement must be attached and supplied to COUNTY on a primary basis with $5,000,000 limits of liability.



7.2.6 Installation Floater coverage for the installation of machinery and/or equipment into an existing structure, on an "All Risk" coverage form including installation and transit for one hundred percent (100%) percent of the "installed replacement cost value," covering COUNTY as a named insured, with a deductible of not more than Ten Thousand Dollars ($10,000.00) each claim.

7.2.6.1 Cessation of Insurance. Installation Floater coverage is not

to cease and is to remain in force (subject to cancellation notice) until final acceptance by Broward County.

7.2.6.2 Flood Insurance. When the machinery or equipment

covered under the Installation Floater is located within an identified special flood hazard area, flood insurance must be afforded for the lesser of the total insurable value of such buildings or structure, or, the maximum amount of flood insurance coverage available under the National Flood Insurance Program.

7.2.7 For all policies provided under this Section 7.2, if the initial

insurance expires prior to the completion of the work, renewal copies of policies shall be furnished at least thirty (30) days prior to the date of their expiration.

7.2.8 For all policies provided under this Section 7.2, the policy(ies) must

be endorsed to provide COUNTY with at least thirty (30) days notice of cancellation and/or restriction.

7.2.9 CONTRACTOR shall furnish to the COUNTY, or the OCIP

Administrator, Certificates of Insurance or endorsements evidencing the insurance coverage specified above within fifteen (15) calendar days after notification of award of the Contract, in the form attached hereto as Exhibit C. The required Certificates of Insurance shall name the types of policies provided, refer specifically to this Contract, and state that such insurance is as required by this Contract. The Certificate of Insurance shall be in form similar to and contain the information set forth in a standard Acord form 25-S. The failure to provide the Certificate of Insurance within fifteen (15) days shall be the basis for the rescission of the awarding contract. The official title of the certificate holder is Broward County Board of County Commissioners. This official title shall be used in all insurance documentation.

7.2.10 Right to revise or reject. Broward County's Risk Management

Division reserves the right, but not the obligation, to review and



revise any insurance requirements at the time of contract renewal and/or any amendments, not limited to deductibles, limits, coverages and endorsements based on insurance market conditions affecting the availability or affordability of coverage; or changes in the scope of work/specifications affecting the applicability of coverage.

7.2.11 COUNTY, OCPM and CONSULTANT are to be expressly included

as an Additional Insured in the name of Broward County Board of County Commissioners with respect to general liability and excess liability coverages arising out of operations performed for COUNTY by or on behalf of CONTRACTOR or acts or omissions of CONTRACTOR in connection with general supervision of such operation. If CONTRACTOR uses a subcontractor, then CONTRACTOR shall ensure that subcontractor names COUNTY and CONSULTANT as an additional insured.

CONTRACTOR’S failure to procure or maintain the insurance required by this section 7.2 and to ensure that all of its Subcontractors of every tier maintain the required insurance during the entire term of their respective contracts shall constitute a material breach of this Contract pursuant to which COUNTY may immediately suspend or terminate this Contract, or, at its discretion, procure or renew such insurance to protect COUNTY’S interests, pay any and all premiums in connection therewith, and withhold or recover all monies so paid from CONTRACTOR.

7.3 Additional Insurance Provisions.

7.3.1 Representations and Warranties. CONTRACTOR represents and warrants to COUNTY, and shall require its Subcontractors of every tier represent and warrant to COUNTY that:

7.3.1.1 All information they submit to COUNTY, or to the OCIP

Administrator, shall be accurate and complete. 7.3.1.2 They have had the opportunity to read and analyze copies

of the OCIP insurance policies that are on file in COUNTY’S office, and they understand the OCIP Coverages. Any reference or summary in the Contract, this Section 7, the Insurance Manual, or elsewhere in any other Contract Document as to amount, nature, type or extent of OCIP Coverages and/or potential applicability to any potential claim or loss is for reference only. CONTRACTOR and its Subcontractors of all tiers have not relied upon said reference, but solely upon their own independent review and



analysis of the OCIP Coverages in formulating any understanding and/or belief as to amount, nature, type or extent of any OCIP Coverages and/or its potential applicability to any potential claim or loss.

7.3.1.3 The Costs of OCIP Coverages were not included in

CONTRACTOR’S bid or proposal for the Work, the Contract Price, and will not be included in any change order or any request for payment for the Work or extra work.

7.3.1.4 CONTRACTOR acknowledges that COUNTY shall not pay

or compensate CONTRACTOR or any Subcontractor of any tier, in any manner, for the Costs of OCIP Coverages.

7.3.2 Audits. CONTRACTOR agrees that OWNER, the OCIP

Administrator, and/or any OCIP Insurer may audit CONTRACTOR’S or any of its Subcontractors’ payroll records, books and records, insurance coverages, insurance cost information, bid estimates, or pricing for any cost in the Contract Price or any subcontracted Work, or any information that CONTRACTOR provides to COUNTY, the OCIP Administrator, or the OCIP Insurers to confirm their accuracy, and to ensure that the Costs of OCIP Coverages are not included in any payment for the Work.

7.3.3 COUNTY’S Election to Modify or Discontinue the OCIP. COUNTY

may, for any reason, modify the OCIP Coverages, discontinue the OCIP, or request that CONTRACTOR or any of its Subcontractors of any tier withdraw from the OCIP upon thirty (30) days written notice. Upon such notice CONTRACTOR and/or one or more of its Subcontractors, as specified by COUNTY in such notice, shall obtain and thereafter maintain during the performance of the Work, all (or a portion thereof as specified by COUNTY) of the OCIP Coverages. The form, content, limits of liability, cost, and the insurer issuing such replacement insurance shall be subject to COUNTY’S approval. The cost of the replacement coverage shall be at COUNTY’S expense, but only to the extent of the applicable Costs of OCIP Coverages.

7.3.4 Withholding Payments. COUNTY may withhold from any payment

owed or owing to CONTRACTOR or its Subcontractors of any tier the Costs of OCIP Coverages if they are included in a request for payment. In the event a COUNTY audit of CONTRACTOR’S records and information reveals a discrepancy in the insurance,



payroll, safety, or any other information required by the Contract Documents to be provided by CONTRACTOR to COUNTY, or to the OCIP Administrator, or reveals the inclusion of the Cost of OCIP Coverages in any payment for the Work, COUNTY shall have the right to full deduction from the Contract Price of all such Costs of OCIP Coverages and all audit costs. Audit costs shall include, but shall not be limited to, the fees of the OCIP Administrator, and the fees of attorneys and accountants conducting the audit and review. If the CONTRACTOR or its Subcontractors fail to timely comply with any provisions of this Contract concerning the OCIP, COUNTY may withhold any payments due to CONTRACTOR and/or its Subcontractors of any tier until such time as they have complied. Such withholding by COUNTY shall not be deemed to be a default under the Contract Documents.

7.3.5 Waiver of Subrogation. Where permitted by law, CONTRACTOR

hereby waives all rights of recovery by subrogation because of deductible clauses, inadequacy of limits of any insurance policy, limitations or exclusions of coverage, or any other reason against COUNTY, the OCIP Administrator, their officers, agents, or employees, and any other contractor or Subcontractor performing Work or rendering services on behalf of COUNTY in connection with the planning, development and construction of the Project. COUNTY also requires that all CONTRACTOR maintained insurance coverage related to the Work include clauses providing that each insurer shall waive all of its rights of recovery by subrogation against CONTRACTOR, COUNTY, the OCIP Administrator, and their officers, agents, or employees. Where permitted by law, CONTRACTOR shall require similar written express waivers and insurance clauses from each of its Subcontractors. A waiver of subrogation shall be effective as to any individual or entity even if such individual or entity (a) would otherwise have a duty of indemnification, contractual or otherwise, (b) did not pay the insurance premium directly or indirectly, and (c) whether or not such individual or entity has an insurable interest in the property damaged.

7.3.6 Duty of Care. Nothing contained in this Section 7, or the Insurance

Manual shall relieve the CONTRACTOR or any of its Subcontractors of any tier of their respective obligations to exercise due care in the performance of their duties in connection with the Work, and to complete the Work in strict compliance with the Contract Documents.



7.3.7 Conflicts. In the event of a conflict, the provisions of the OCIP insurance policies shall govern, then the provisions of the Contract and its other related Contact Documents, then the provisions of the Insurance Manual.

8. Labor and Materials:

8.1 Unless otherwise provided herein, CONTRACTOR shall provide and pay for all materials (other than Direct Purchase Materials purchased by COUNTY), labor, water, tools, equipment, light, power, transportation and other facilities and services necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work, whether temporary or permanent and whether or not incorporated or to be incorporated in the Work.

8.1.1 Direct Purchase Materials purchased by COUNTY shall be

delivered to the Project site. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for all labor, water, tools, equipment, light, power, transportation and other facilities and services necessary for the proper installation, execution and completion of the Work related to the Direct Purchase Materials.

9. Royalties and Patents:

All fees, royalties, and claims for any invention, or pretended inventions, or patent of any article, material, arrangement, appliance, or method that may be used upon or in any manner be connected with the construction of the Work or appurtenances, are hereby included in the prices stipulated in this Contract for said Work.

10. Weather: Extensions to the Contract Time for delays caused by the effects of

abnormal weather shall be submitted as a request for change in Contract Time. These time extensions are justified only when the CONTRACTOR can demonstrate that rains or other inclement weather conditions or related adverse soil conditions exceed the mean historical climatic conditions based upon the preceding ten (10) year records published for the Miami Dade Metropolitan Area Miami-South Florida by the U.S. Weather Bureau Service and prevent CONTRACTOR from productively performing controlling items of work identified on the accepted schedule or updates resulting in CONTRACTOR being unable to work on controlling items of work identified on the accepted schedule.

11. Permits, Licenses and Impact Fees:



COUNTY shall pay the Master Building Permit Fees and other permit fees assessed by Broward County. CONTRACTOR is responsible to include in its bid and pay all permit fees except those fees COUNTY expressly agrees to pay.

11.1 Except as otherwise provided within the Supplemental Conditions, all permits and licenses required by federal, state or local laws, rules and regulations necessary for the prosecution of the Work undertaken by CONTRACTOR pursuant to the Contract Documents shall be secured and paid for by CONTRACTOR. It is CONTRACTOR's responsibility to have and maintain appropriate Certificate(s) of Competency, valid for the Work to be performed and valid for the jurisdiction in which the Work is to be performed for all persons working on the Project for whom a Certificate of Competency is required.

11.2 Impact fees levied by any municipality shall be paid by CONTRACTOR.

CONTRACTOR shall be reimbursed only for the actual amount of the impact fee levied by the municipality as evidenced by an invoice or other acceptable documentation issued by the municipality. Reimbursement to CONTRACTOR in no event shall include profit or overhead of CONTRACTOR.

12. Resolution of Disputes:

12.1 To prevent all disputes and litigation, it is agreed by the parties hereto that, the Contract Administrator shall decide all questions, claims, difficulties and disputes of whatever nature which may arise relative to the technical interpretation of the Contract Documents and fulfillment of this Contract as to the character, quality, amount and value of any work done and materials furnished, or proposed to be done or furnished under or, by reason of, the Contract Documents and Contract Administrator’s estimates and decisions upon all claims, questions, difficulties and disputes shall be final and binding to the extent provided in Section 12.2. Any claim, question, difficulty or dispute which cannot be resolved by mutual agreement of the Contract Administrator and CONTRACTOR shall be submitted to County Administration in writing within twenty-one (21) calendar days. Unless a different period of time is set forth herein, County Administration shall notify the Contract Administrator and CONTRACTOR in writing of County Administration’s decision within twenty-one (21) calendar days from the date of the submission of the claim, question, difficulty or dispute, unless County Administration requires additional time to gather information or allow the parties to provide additional information. Except for disputes directly related to the promptness of payment as set forth in Section 5.1 of the Contract, all non-technical administrative disputes, shall be determined by the County Administration pursuant to



the time periods provided herein. During the pendency of any dispute and after a determination thereof, CONTRACTOR, CONSULTANT and the Contract Administrator shall act in good faith to mitigate any potential damages including utilization of construction schedule changes and alternate means of construction.

12.2 In the event the determination of a dispute under this Article is

unacceptable to either party hereto, the party objecting to the determination must notify the other party in writing within ten (10) days of receipt of the written determination. The notice must state the basis of the objection and must be accompanied by a statement that any Contract Price adjustment claimed is the entire adjustment to which the objecting party has reason to believe it is entitled to as a result of the determination. Within sixty (60) days after Final Completion of the Work, the parties shall participate in mediation to address all objections to any determinations hereunder and to attempt to prevent litigation. The mediator shall be mutually agreed upon by the parties. Should any objection not be resolved in mediation, the parties retain all their legal rights and remedies provided under State law. A party objecting to a determination specifically waives all of its rights provided hereunder, including its rights and remedies under State law, if said party fails to comply in strict accordance with the requirements of this Article.

13. Inspection of Work:

13.1 CONSULTANT, OCPM and COUNTY shall at all times have access to the Work, and CONTRACTOR shall provide proper facilities for such access and for inspecting, measuring and testing by County, OCPM, jurisdictional agencies and other independent inspection or testing agencies as may be employed by the Owner in addition to that testing and inspection required of CONTRACTOR by Division 1 and the technical specifications.

13.1.1 Should the Contract Documents, CONSULTANT's instructions,

any laws, ordinances, or any public authority require any of the Work to be specially tested or approved, CONTRACTOR shall give CONSULTANT and OCPM timely notice of readiness of the Work for testing. Inspections for subsurface soil compaction and concrete testing shall be coordinated by the CONTRACTOR. If the testing or approval is to be made by an authority other than COUNTY, timely notice shall be given of the date fixed for such testing. Testing shall be made promptly, and, where practicable, at the source of supply. If any of the Work should be covered up without approval or consent of CONSULTANT and OCPM, it must, if required by



CONSULTANT or OCPM, be uncovered for examination and properly restored at CONTRACTOR's expense.

13.1.2 Reexamination of any of the Work may be ordered by

CONSULTANT or OCPM with prior written approval by the Contract Administrator, and if so ordered, the Work must be uncovered by CONTRACTOR. If such Work is found to be in accordance with the Contract Documents, COUNTY shall pay the cost of reexamination and replacement by means of a Change Order. If such Work is not in accordance with the Contract Documents, CONTRACTOR shall pay such cost.

13.2 Inspectors shall have no authority to permit deviations from, nor relax any

of the provisions of the Contract Documents, nor to delay the Project by failure to inspect the materials and work with reasonable promptness without the written permission or instruction of CONSULTANT.

13.3 The payment of any compensation, whatever may be its character or form,

or the giving of any gratuity or the granting of any favor by CONTRACTOR to any inspector, directly or indirectly, is strictly prohibited, and any such act on the part of CONTRACTOR will constitute a breach of this Contract.

14. Superintendence and Supervision: 14.1 The orders of COUNTY are to be given through OCPM, which instructions

are to be strictly and promptly followed in every case. CONTRACTOR shall keep on the Project during its progress, a full-time competent English speaking superintendent and any necessary assistants, all satisfactory to OCPM. The superintendent shall not be changed except with the written consent of OCPM, unless the superintendent proves to be unsatisfactory to CONTRACTOR and ceases to be in its employ. The superintendent shall represent CONTRACTOR and all directions given to the superintendent shall be binding as if given to CONTRACTOR and will be confirmed in writing by OCPM upon the written request of CONTRACTOR. CONTRACTOR shall give efficient supervision to the Work, using its best skill and attention.

14.2 Each work day, CONTRACTOR's superintendent shall record, at a

minimum, the following information in a bound log: the day; date; weather conditions and how any weather condition affected progress of the Work; time of commencement of Work for the day; the work being performed; materials, labor, personnel, equipment and subcontractors at the Project site; visitors to the Project site, including representatives of COUNTY, OCPM, CONSULTANT, regulatory representatives; any special or unusual



conditions or occurrences encountered; delays to any controlling items of Work; and the time of termination of Work for the day. All information shall be recorded in the daily log in ink. The daily log shall be kept on the Project site and shall be available at all times for inspection and copying by COUNTY, OCPM and CONSULTANT.

14.3 The Contract Administrator, CONTRACTOR, OCPM and CONSULTANT

shall meet at least every two (2) weeks or as determined by the Contract Administrator, during the course of the Work to review and agree upon the Work performed to date and to establish the controlling items of Work for the next two (2) weeks. The CONSULTANT shall publish, keep, and distribute minutes and any comments thereto of each such meeting.

14.4 If CONTRACTOR, in the course of prosecuting the Work, finds any

discrepancy between the Contract Documents and the physical conditions of the locality, or any errors, omissions, or discrepancies in the Contract Documents, it shall be CONTRACTOR's duty to immediately inform OCPM, in writing, and OCPM in conjunction with the OWNER and CONSULTANT will promptly review the same. Any Work done after such discovery, until authorized, will be done at CONTRACTOR's sole risk.

14.5 CONTRACTOR shall supervise and direct the Work competently and

efficiently, devoting such attention thereto and applying such skills and expertise as may be necessary to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. CONTRACTOR shall be solely responsible for the means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction.



15. COUNTY's Right to Terminate Contract:

15.1 If CONTRACTOR fails to begin the Work within fifteen (10) calendar days after the Project Initiation Date or effective date of a Notice to Proceed, or fails to perform the Work with sufficient workers and equipment or with sufficient materials to insure the prompt completion of the Work, or shall perform the Work unsuitably, or cause it to be rejected as defective and unsuitable, or shall discontinue the prosecution of the Work pursuant to the accepted schedule or if CONTRACTOR shall fail to perform any material term set forth in the Contract Documents or if CONTRACTOR shall become insolvent or be declared bankrupt, or commit any act of bankruptcy or insolvency, or shall make an assignment for the benefit of creditors, or from any other cause whatsoever shall not carry on the Work in an acceptable manner, or if CONTRACTOR is placed on the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List or the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Energy Sector List created pursuant to Section 215.473, Florida Statutes, as amended or if CONTRACTOR provides a false certification submitted pursuant to Section 287.135, Florida Statutes, as amended, CONTRACT ADMINISTRATOR may give notice in writing to CONTRACTOR and its Surety of such delay, neglect or default, specifying the same with a notice to cure. If CONTRACTOR, within a period of ten (10) calendar days after such notice, shall not proceed in accordance therewith, then the COUNTY’s awarding authority for the Contract, may upon written certificate from CONSULTANT of the fact of such delay, neglect or default and CONTRACTOR's failure to comply with such notice, terminate the services of CONTRACTOR, exclude CONTRACTOR from the Project site and take the prosecution of the Work out of the hands of CONTRACTOR. In such case, CONTRACTOR shall not be entitled to receive any further payment until the Project is completed. In addition COUNTY may enter into an agreement for the completion of the Project according to the terms and provisions of the Contract Documents, or use such other methods as in COUNTY's sole opinion shall be required for the completion of the Project according to the terms and provisions of the Contract Documents. All damages, costs and charges incurred by COUNTY, together with the costs of completing the Project, shall be deducted from any monies due or which may become due to CONTRACTOR. In case the damages and expenses so incurred by COUNTY shall exceed the unpaid balance, then CONTRACTOR shall be liable and shall pay to COUNTY the amount of said excess.

15.2 If after notice of termination of CONTRACTOR, it is determined for any

reason that CONTRACTOR was not in default, the rights and obligations of COUNTY and CONTRACTOR shall be the same as if the notice of



termination had been issued pursuant to the Termination for Convenience clause as set forth in Section 15.3 below.

15.3 This Contract may be terminated for convenience in writing by COUNTY

upon ten (10) days written notice to CONTRACTOR (delivered by certified mail, return receipt requested) of intent to terminate and the date on which such termination becomes effective. In such case, CONTRACTOR shall be paid for all work executed and expenses incurred prior to termination in addition to termination settlement costs reasonably incurred by CONTRACTOR relating to commitments which had become firm prior to the termination. No payment shall be made for profit for work which has not been performed.

15.4 Upon receipt of Notice of Termination pursuant to Sections 15.1 or 15.3

above, CONTRACTOR shall promptly discontinue all affected work unless the Notice of Termination directs otherwise and deliver or otherwise make available to COUNTY all data, drawings, specifications, reports, estimates, summaries, documents and such other information as may have been required by the Contract Documents whether completed or in process.

15.5 This Agreement may also be terminated by the Board:

15.5.1 Upon the disqualification of CONTRACTOR as a CBE firm by

COUNTY’s Director of the Office of Economic and Small Business Development if CONTRACTOR’s status as CBE firm was a factor in the award of this Agreement and such status was misrepresented by CONTRACTOR;

15.5.2 Upon the disqualification of CONTRACTOR by COUNTY’s

Director of the Office of Economic and Small Business Development due to fraud, misrepresentation, or material misstatement by CONTRACTOR in the course of obtaining this Agreement or attempting to meet the CBE contractual obligations;

15.5.3 Upon the disqualification of one or more of CONTRACTOR’s

CBE participants by COUNTY’s Director of the Office of Economic and Small Business Development if any such participant’s status as a CBE firm was a factor in the award of this Agreement and such status was misrepresented by CONTRACTOR or such participant;

15.5.4 Upon the disqualification of one or more of CONTRACTOR’s

CBE participants by COUNTY’s Director of the Office of



Economic and Small Business Development if such CBE participant attempted to meet its CBE contractual obligations through fraud, misrepresentation, or material misstatement;

15.5.5 If CONTRACTOR is determined by COUNTY’s Director of the

Office of Economic and Small Business Development to have been knowingly involved in any fraud, misrepresentation, or CBE participant. If so determined, CONTRACTOR shall not be awarded CBE participation credit.

16. CONTRACTOR's Right to Stop Work:

Should CONSULTANT fail to review and approve or state in writing reasons for non-approval of any Application for Payment within fifteen (15) business days after it is presented, or if COUNTY fails either to pay CONTRACTOR within twenty-five (25) business days after CONSULTANT receives CONTRACTOR’s proper Application for Payment, or to notify CONTRACTOR and CONSULTANT in writing of any objection to the Application for Payment, then CONTRACTOR may, give written notice to COUNTY and CONSULTANT of such delay, neglect or default, specifying the same. If COUNTY or CONSULTANT (where applicable), within a period of ten (10) calendar days after such notice shall not remedy the delay, neglect, or default upon which the notice is based, then CONTRACTOR may stop work until the delay, neglect or default is cured.

17. Assignment:

Neither party hereto shall assign the Contract or any subcontract in whole or in part without the written consent of the other, nor shall CONTRACTOR assign any monies due or to become due to it hereunder, without the previous written consent of the County Administrator.

18. Rights of Various Interests:

Whenever work being done by COUNTY's forces or by other contractors is contiguous to or within the limits of work covered by this Contract, the respective rights of the various interests involved shall be established by the Contract Administrator to secure the completion of the various portions of the work in general harmony.



19. Explosives:

Explosives shall not be used for completion of the Work without express written permission of the Owner. When the use of explosives is necessary in the prosecution of the work, CONTRACTOR shall exercise the utmost care in handling and usage of such explosives to the protection of life and property. All explosives shall be stored in a safe manner and storage places shall be clearly marked "Dangerous-Explosives" and placed in the care of competent watchmen. When such use of explosives becomes necessary, CONTRACTOR shall furnish to COUNTY proof of coverage, adequately providing public liability and property damage insurance as a rider attached to its regular policies, unless otherwise included.

20. Differing Site Conditions:

In the event that during the course of the Work CONTRACTOR encounters subsurface or concealed conditions at the Project site which differ materially from those shown on the Contract Documents and from those ordinarily encountered and generally recognized as inherent in work of the character called for in the Contract Documents; or unknown physical conditions of the Project site, of an unusual nature, which differ materially from that ordinarily encountered and generally recognized as inherent in work of the character called for in the Contract Documents, CONTRACTOR, without disturbing the conditions and before performing any work affected by such conditions, shall, within twenty-four (24) hours of their discovery, notify COUNTY and CONSULTANT in writing of the existence of the aforesaid conditions. CONSULTANT and COUNTY shall, within two (2) business days after receipt of CONTRACTOR's written notice, investigate the site conditions identified by CONTRACTOR. If, in the sole opinion of CONSULTANT, the conditions do materially so differ and cause an increase or decrease in CONTRACTOR's cost of, or the time required for, the performance of any part of the Work, whether or not charged as a result of the conditions, CONSULTANT shall recommend an equitable adjustment to the Contract Price, or the Contract Time, or both. If COUNTY and CONTRACTOR cannot agree on an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Time, the adjustment shall be referred to CONSULTANT for determination in accordance with the provisions of Article 12. Should CONSULTANT determine that the conditions of the Project site are not so materially different to justify a change in the terms of the Contract, CONSULTANT shall so notify COUNTY and CONTRACTOR in writing, stating the reasons, and such determination shall be final and binding upon the parties hereto.

No request by CONTRACTOR for an equitable adjustment to the Contract under this provision shall be allowed unless CONTRACTOR has given written notice in strict accordance with the provisions of this Article.



No request for an equitable adjustment or change to the Contract Price or Contract Time for differing site conditions shall be allowed if made after the date certified by CONSULTANT as the date of substantial completion.

21. Plans and Working Drawings:

COUNTY and OCPM, through CONSULTANT, shall have the right to modify the details of the plans and specifications, to supplement the plans and specifications with additional plans, drawings or additional information as the Work proceeds, all of which shall be considered as part of the Contract Documents. In case of disagreement between the written and graphic portions of the Contract Documents, the written portion shall govern.

22. CONTRACTOR to Check Plans, Specifications and Data:

CONTRACTOR shall verify all dimensions, quantities and details shown on the plans, specifications or other data received from CONSULTANT, and shall notify CONSULTANT of all errors, omissions and discrepancies found therein within three (3) calendar days of discovery. CONTRACTOR will not be allowed to take advantage of any error, omission or discrepancy, as full instructions will be furnished by CONSULTANT. CONTRACTOR shall not be liable for damages resulting from errors, omissions or discrepancies in the Contract Documents unless CONTRACTOR recognized such error, omission or discrepancy and knowingly failed to report it to CONSULTANT.

23. CONTRACTOR's Responsibility for Damages and Accidents:

23.1 CONTRACTOR shall accept full responsibility for the Work against all loss or damage of whatsoever nature sustained until substantial completion of each phase final acceptance by COUNTY, and shall promptly repair any damage done from any cause whatsoever, except as provided in Article 30.

23.2 CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for all materials, equipment and

supplies pertaining to the Project. In the event any such materials, equipment and supplies are lost, stolen, damaged or destroyed prior to substantial completion of each phase final acceptance by COUNTY, CONTRACTOR shall replace same without cost to COUNTY, except as provided in Article 30.

24. Warranty:



CONTRACTOR warrants to COUNTY that all materials and equipment furnished under this Contract will be new unless otherwise specified and that all of the Work will be of good quality, free from faults and defects and in conformance with the Contract Documents. All work not conforming to these requirements, including substitutions not properly approved and authorized, may be considered defective. If required by CONSULTANT, CONTRACTOR shall furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials and equipment. This warranty is not limited by the provisions of Article 26 herein.

25. Supplementary Drawings:

25.1 When, in the opinion of CONSULTANT, it becomes necessary to explain the Work to be done more fully, or to illustrate the Work further, or to show any changes which may be required, supplementary drawings, with specifications pertaining thereto, will be prepared by CONSULTANT.

25.2 The supplementary drawings shall be binding upon CONTRACTOR with

the same force as the Contract Documents. Where such supplementary drawings require either less or more than the original quantities of work, appropriate adjustments shall be made by Change Order.

26. Defective Work:

26.1 CONSULTANT and OCPM shall have the authority to reject or disapprove work which CONSULTANT or OCPM finds to be defective. If required by CONSULTANT or OCPM, CONTRACTOR shall promptly either correct all defective work or remove such defective work and replace it with non-defective work. CONTRACTOR shall bear all direct, indirect and consequential costs of such removal or corrections including cost of testing laboratories and personnel.

26.2 Should CONTRACTOR fail or refuse to remove or correct any defective

work or to make any necessary repairs in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents within the time indicated in writing by CONSULTANT or OCPM, COUNTY shall have the authority to cause the defective work to be removed or corrected, or make such repairs as may be necessary at CONTRACTOR's expense. Any expense incurred by COUNTY in making such removals, corrections or repairs, shall be paid for out of any monies due or which may become due to CONTRACTOR, or may be charged against the Performance Bond. In the event of failure of CONTRACTOR to make all necessary repairs promptly and fully, COUNTY may declare CONTRACTOR in default.



26.3 If, within one (1) year after the date of substantial completion or such longer period of time as may be prescribed by the terms of any applicable special warranty required by the Contract Documents, or by any specific provision of the Contract Documents, any of the Work is found to be defective or not in accordance with the Contract Documents, CONTRACTOR, after receipt of written notice from COUNTY, shall promptly correct such defective or nonconforming Work within the time specified by COUNTY without cost to COUNTY, to do so. Nothing contained herein shall be construed to establish a period of limitation with respect to any other obligation which CONTRACTOR might have under the Contract Documents including but not limited to, Article 24 hereof and any claim regarding latent defects.

26.4 Failure to reject any defective work or material shall not in any way

prevent later rejection when such defect is discovered, or obligate COUNTY to final acceptance.

27. Taxes:

CONTRACTOR shall pay all applicable sales, consumer, use and other taxes required by law except for materials purchased under an Owner Controlled Direct Purchase Program.. CONTRACTOR is responsible for reviewing the pertinent state statutes involving state taxes and complying with all requirements.

28. Subcontracts:

28.1 Each subcontractor must possess certificates of competency and licenses required by law. CONTRACTOR shall have a continuing obligation to notify COUNTY, OCPM and CONSULTANT of any change in subcontractors.

28.2 CONTRACTOR shall not employ any subcontractor against whom

COUNTY, OCPM or CONSULTANT may have a reasonable objection. CONTRACTOR shall not be required to employ any subcontractor against whom CONTRACTOR has a reasonable objection.

28.3 CONTRACTOR shall be fully responsible for all acts and omissions of its

subcontractors and of persons directly or indirectly employed by its subcontractors and of persons for whose acts any of them may be liable to the same extent that CONTRACTOR is responsible for the acts and omissions of persons directly employed by it. Nothing in the Contract Documents shall create any contractual relationship between any subcontractor and COUNTY or any obligation on the part of COUNTY to pay or to see the payment of any monies due any subcontractor.



COUNTY, OCPM or CONSULTANT may furnish to any subcontractor evidence of amounts paid to CONTRACTOR on account of specific work performed.

28.4 CONTRACTOR agrees to bind specifically every subcontractor to the

applicable terms and conditions of the Contract Documents for the benefit of COUNTY.

29. Separate Contracts:

29.1 COUNTY reserves the right to let other contracts in connection with this Project. CONTRACTOR shall afford other persons reasonable opportunity for the introduction and storage of their materials and the execution of their work and shall properly connect and coordinate this Work with theirs.

29.2 If any part of CONTRACTOR's Work depends for proper execution or

results upon the work of any other persons, CONTRACTOR shall inspect and promptly report to OCPM any defects in such work that render it unsuitable for such proper execution and results. CONTRACTOR's failure to so inspect and report shall constitute an acceptance of the other person's work as fit and proper for the reception of CONTRACTOR's Work, except as to defects which may develop in other contractor's work after the execution of CONTRACTOR's.

29.3 CONTRACTOR shall conduct its operations and take all reasonable steps

to coordinate the prosecution of the Work so as to create no interference or impact on any other contractor on the site. Should such interference or impact occur, CONTRACTOR shall be liable to the affected contractor for the cost of such interference or impact.

29.4 To insure the proper execution of subsequent work, CONTRACTOR shall

inspect the work already in place and shall at once report to OCPM any discrepancy between the executed work and the requirements of the Contract Documents.

30. Use of Completed Portions:

30.1 COUNTY shall have the right at its sole option to take possession of and use any completed or partially completed portions of the Project. Such possession and use shall not be deemed an acceptance of any of the Work not completed in accordance with the Contract Documents. If such possession and use increases the cost of or delays the Work, CONTRACTOR shall be entitled to reasonable extra compensation or



reasonable extension of time or both, as recommended by CONSULTANT and OCPM and approved by COUNTY.

30.2 In the event COUNTY takes possession of any completed or partially

completed portions of the Project, the following shall occur:

30.2.1 COUNTY shall give notice to CONTRACTOR in writing at least thirty (30) calendar days prior to COUNTY's intended occupancy of a designated area.

30.2.2 CONTRACTOR shall complete to the point of Substantial

Completion the designated area and request inspection and issuance of a Certificate of Substantial Completion Form (00 65 16) from CONSULTANT.

30.2.3 Upon CONSULTANT's issuance of a Certificate of Substantial

Completion, COUNTY will assume full responsibility for maintenance, utilities, subsequent damages of COUNTY and public, adjustment of insurance coverages and start of warranty for the occupied area.

30.2.4 CONTRACTOR shall complete all items noted on the Certificate

of Substantial Completion within the time specified by CONSULTANT on the Certificate of Substantial Completion, as soon as possible and request final inspection and final acceptance of the portion of the Work occupied. Upon completion of final inspection and receipt of an application for final payment, CONSULTANT shall issue a Final Certificate of Payment relative to the occupied area.

30.2.5 If COUNTY finds it necessary to occupy or use a portion or

portions of the Work prior to Substantial Completion thereof, such occupancy or use shall not commence prior to a time mutually agreed upon by COUNTY and CONTRACTOR and to which the insurance company or companies providing the property insurance have consented by endorsement to the policy or policies. Insurance on the unoccupied or unused portion or portions shall not be canceled or lapsed on account of such partial occupancy or use. Consent of CONTRACTOR and of the insurance company or companies to such occupancy or use shall not be unreasonably withheld.

31. Lands for Work and Air Rights:



31.1 COUNTY shall provide, as may be indicated in the Contract Documents, the lands upon which the Work is to be performed, rights-of-way and easements for access thereto and such other lands as are designated by COUNTY for the use of CONTRACTOR.

31.2 CONTRACTOR shall provide, at CONTRACTOR's own expense and

without liability to COUNTY, any additional land and access thereto that may be required for temporary construction facilities, including office space, parking and or for storage of materials. CONTRACTOR shall furnish to COUNTY copies of written permission obtained by CONTRACTOR from the owners of such land. CONTRACTOR shall obtain without expense or liability to COUNTY any necessary approvals, authorizations or licenses from public or private property owners for operation of cranes or other construction equipment within the air space above those neighboring properties.

32. Legal Restrictions and Traffic Provisions:

CONTRACTOR shall conform to and obey all applicable laws, regulations, or ordinances with regard to labor employed, hours of work and CONTRACTOR's general operations. CONTRACTOR shall conduct its operations so as not to close any thoroughfare, nor interfere in any way with traffic on railway, highways, or water, without the written consent of the proper authorities.

33. Location and Damage to Existing Facilities, Equipment or Utilities:

33.1 As far as possible, all existing utility lines in the Project area have been shown on the plans. However, COUNTY does not guarantee that all lines are shown, or that the ones indicated are in their true location. It shall be the CONTRACTOR’S responsibility to identify and locate all underground and overhead utility lines or equipment affecting or affected by the Project. No additional payment will be made to the CONTRACTOR because of discrepancies in actual and plan location of utilities, and additional costs suffered as a result thereof.

33.2. The CONTRACTOR shall notify each utility company involved at least

thirty (30) days prior to the start of construction to arrange for positive underground location, relocation or support of its utility where that utility may be in conflict with or endangered by the proposed construction. Relocation of water mains or other utilities for the convenience of the CONTRACTOR shall be paid by the CONTRACTOR. All charges by utility companies for temporary support of its utilities shall be paid for by the CONTRACTOR. All costs of permanent utility relocation to avoid conflict shall be the responsibility of the utility company involved. No additional



payment will be made to the CONTRACTOR for utility relocations, whether or not said relocation is necessary to avoid conflict with other lines.

33.3. The CONTRACTOR shall schedule the work in such a manner that the

work is not delayed by the utility providers relocating or supporting their utilities. The CONTRACTOR shall coordinate its activities with any and all public and private utility providers occupying the right-of-way. No compensation will be paid to the CONTRACTOR for any loss of time or delay.

33.4. All overhead, surface or underground structures and utilities encountered

are to be carefully protected from injury or displacement. All damage to such structures is to be completely repaired within a reasonable time; needless delay will not be tolerated. The COUNTY reserves the right to remedy such damage by ordering outside parties to make such repairs at the expense of the CONTRACTOR. All such repairs made by the CONTRACTOR are to be made to the satisfaction of the utility owner. All damaged utilities must be replaced or fully repaired. All repairs are to be inspected by the utility owner prior to backfilling.

34. Substitutions:

34.1 CONTRACTOR may request substitution of materials, articles, pieces of equipment or any changes that reduce the Contract Price by making such request to the Contract Administrator and OCPM through the CONSULTANT in writing. Contract Administrator will be the sole judge of acceptability, and no substitute will be ordered, installed, used or initiated without CONSULTANT's and OCPM’s prior written recommendation and Contract Administrator’s acceptance which will be evidenced by a Contract Administrator approved and executed Contractor’s Request for Substitution. However, any substitution accepted by CONSULTANT shall not result in any increase in the Contract Price or Contract Time.

34.2 By making a request for substitution, CONTRACTOR agrees to pay

directly to CONSULTANT and OCPM all CONSULTANT’s and OCPM's fees and charges related to CONSULTANT's and OCPM’s review of the request for substitution, whether or not the request for substitution is accepted by Contract Administrator. Any substitution submitted by CONTRACTOR must meet the form, fit, function and life cycle criteria of the item proposed to be replaced and there must be a net dollar savings to the COUNTY including CONSULTANT and OCPM review fees and charges. If a substitution is approved, the net dollar savings shall accrue to the County and shall be processed as a deductive Change Order.



COUNTY may require CONTRACTOR to furnish at CONTRACTOR's expense a special performance guarantee or other surety with respect to any substitute approved after award of the Contract.

35. Continuing the Work:

CONTRACTOR shall carry on the Work and adhere to the progress schedule during all disputes or disagreements with COUNTY, including disputes or disagreements concerning a request for a Change Order, a request for a change in the Contract Price or Contract Time, a Construction Change Directive or CPEAM. The Work shall not be delayed or postponed pending resolution of any disputes or disagreements.

36. Changes in the Work or Terms of Contract Documents:

36.1 Without invalidating the Contract and without notice to any surety COUNTY reserves and shall have the right, from time to time to make such increases, decreases or other changes in the character or quantity of the Work as may be considered necessary or desirable to complete fully and acceptably the proposed construction in a satisfactory manner. Any extra or additional work within the scope of this Project must be accomplished by means of appropriate Supplemental Instructions or Change Orders.

37. Supplemental Instructions:

37.1 The Contract Administrator, OCPM, and CONSULTANT, shall have the right to approve and issue Supplemental Instructions setting forth written interpretations of the intent of the Contract Documents and ordering minor changes in Work execution, providing the Supplemental Instruction involves no change in the Contract Price or the Contract Time.

38. Contract Price Element Adjustment Memoranda (CPEAM)

38.1 The Contract Administrator shall be authorized to issue a CPEAM which is

agreed to by the CONTRACTOR and the Contract Administrator to memorialize the reallocation of sums between the Contract Price Elements. The following specific CPEAM’s are contemplated, but additional or different CPEAM’s may be issued, provided they do not result in a change to the Contract Price.

38.1.1 If the County elects to pursue an Direct Owner Purchase

Program, a CPEAM may be issued to remove material costs



related to those direct purchases from the Contract Price base bid price or any of the County-elected alternates.

38.1.2 If the Contract Administrator elects to make changes to the Work

required by the Contract Documents a CPEAM may be issued to re-allocate costs to or from the Owner’s Allowance Account in order to adjust the lump sum amounts of the Lump Sum Base Bid or County-elected Alternates,

38.1.3 If differing site conditions, or errors and omissions in the Contract

Documents are discovered during the progress of the Work, the Contract Administrator may elect to issue a CPEAM to cover the costs of any additional work required by the discovery of those unforeseen conditions, errors, or omissions.

38.2 The CONTRACTOR shall not perform Work subject to the Owner’s

Allowance Account without receipt of the Contract Administrator’s executed CPEAM transferring such approved amounts from the Owner’s Allowance Account to an existing or new lump sum line item..

38.3 During the progress of construction, sums transferred to the Owner’s Allowance Account may be re-deployed by the Contract Administrator through a CPEAM or removed from the Project via a change order reducing the Owner’s Allowance Account and, in turn, the Contract Price.

38.4 Adjustments of Contract Time associated with the use of the Owner’s Allowance Account for additional Work shall be made by Change Order.

39. Change Orders:

39.1 Changes in the quantity or character of the Work within the scope of the Project which are not properly the subject of Supplemental Instructions, including all changes resulting in changes in the Contract Price, or the Contract Time, shall be authorized only by Change Orders approved in advance and issued in accordance with the provisions of the Broward County Procurement Code, as amended from time to time.

39.2 CONTRACTOR shall not start work on any changes requiring an increase

in the Contract Price or the Contract Time until a Change Order setting forth the adjustments is approved by the COUNTY. Upon receipt of a Change Order, CONTRACTOR shall promptly proceed with the work set forth within the document.



39.3 In the event satisfactory adjustment cannot be reached for any item requiring a change in the Contract Price or Contract Time, and a Change Order has not been issued, COUNTY reserves the right at its sole option to either delete the item from the Contract, make such arrangements as may be deemed necessary to complete the disputed work; or submit the matter in dispute to Contract Administrator as set forth in Article 12 hereof. During the pendency of the dispute, and upon receipt of a Change Order approved by COUNTY, CONTRACTOR shall promptly proceed with the change in the Work involved and advise the CONSULTANT and Contract Administrator in writing within seven (7) calendar days of CONTRACTOR's agreement or disagreement with the method, if any, provided in the Change Order for determining the proposed adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Time.

39.4 On approval of any change increasing the Contract Price, CONTRACTOR

shall ensure that the performance bond and payment bond are increased so that each reflects the total Contract Price as increased.

39.5 Under circumstances determined necessary by COUNTY, Change Orders

may be issued unilaterally by COUNTY. Additionally, the County may utilize a Construction Change Directive in the absence of total agreement on the terms of a Change Order or where COUNTY’s process for consideration of a Change Order might, at the Contract Administrator’s sole discretion, prohibit the CONTRACTOR from completing time critical elements of the Work.

40. Value of Change Order Work:

40.1 The value of any work covered by a Change Order or of any claim for an increase or decrease in the Contract Price shall be determined in one or a combination of the following ways:

40.1.1 Where the work involved is covered by unit prices contained in

the Contract Documents, by application of unit prices to the quantities of items involved, subject to the provisions of Section 40.7.

40.1.2 By mutual acceptance of a lump sum which CONTRACTOR

and COUNTY acknowledge contains a component for overhead and profit.

40.1.3 On the basis of the "cost of work," determined as provided in

Sections 40.2 and 40.3, plus a CONTRACTOR's fee for



overhead and profit which is determined as provided in Section 40.4.

40.2 The term "cost of work" means the sum of all direct costs necessarily

incurred and paid by CONTRACTOR in the proper performance of the Work described in the Change Order. Except as otherwise may be agreed to in writing by COUNTY, such costs shall be in amounts no higher than those prevailing in the locality of the Project, shall include only the following items and shall not include any of the costs itemized in Section 40.3.

40.2.1 Payroll costs for employees in the direct employ of

CONTRACTOR in the performance of the work described in the Change Order under schedules of job classifications agreed upon by COUNTY and CONTRACTOR. Payroll costs for employees not employed full time on the work covered by the Change Order shall be apportioned on the basis of their time spent on the work. Payroll costs shall include, but not be limited to, salaries and wages plus the cost of fringe benefits which shall include social security contributions, unemployment, excise and payroll taxes, workers' or workmen's compensation, health and retirement benefits, bonuses, sick leave, vacation and holiday pay application thereto. Such employees shall include superintendents and foremen at the site. The expenses of performing the work after regular working hours, on Sunday or legal holidays, shall be included in the above to the extent authorized by COUNTY.

40.2.2 Cost of all materials and equipment furnished and incorporated

in the work, including costs of transportation and storage thereof, and manufacturers' field services required in connection therewith. All cash discounts shall accrue to CONTRACTOR unless COUNTY deposits funds with CONTRACTOR with which to make payments, in which case the cash discounts shall accrue to COUNTY. All trade discounts, rebates and refunds, and all returns from sale of surplus materials and equipment shall accrue to COUNTY and CONTRACTOR shall make provisions so that they may be obtained. Rentals of all construction equipment and machinery and the parts thereof whether rented from CONTRACTOR or others in accordance with rental agreements approved by COUNTY with the advice of CONSULTANT and the costs of transportation, loading, unloading, installation, dismantling and removal thereof, all in accordance with the terms of said agreements. The rental of



any such equipment, machinery or parts shall cease when the use thereof is no longer necessary for the work.

40.2.3 Payments made by CONTRACTOR to Subcontractors for work

performed by Subcontractors. If required by COUNTY, CONTRACTOR shall obtain competitive bids from Subcontractors acceptable to CONTRACTOR and shall deliver such bids to COUNTY who will then determine, with the advice of CONSULTANT, which bids will be accepted. If the Subcontract provides that the Subcontractor is to be paid on the basis of cost of the work plus a fee, the Subcontractor's cost of the work shall be determined in the same manner as CONTRACTOR'S cost of the work. All Subcontractors shall be subject to the other provisions of the Contract Documents insofar as applicable.

40.2.4 Supplemental costs including the following:

40.2.4.1 The proportion of necessary transportation, travel and subsistence expenses of CONTRACTOR's employees incurred in discharge of duties connected with the work except for local travel to and from the site of the work.

40.2.4.2 Cost, including transportation and maintenance, of all

materials, supplies, equipment, machinery, appliances, office and temporary facilities at the site and hand tools not owned by the workmen, which are consumed in the performance of the work, and cost less market value of such items used but not consumed which remains the property of CONTRACTOR.

40.2.4.3 Sales, use, or similar taxes related to the work, and

for which CONTRACTOR is liable, imposed by any governmental authority.

40.2.4.4 Deposits lost for causes other than CONTRACTOR's

negligence; royalty payments and fees for permits and licenses.

40.2.4.5 The cost of utilities, fuel and sanitary facilities at the

site.



40.2.4.6 Receipted minor expenses such as telegrams, long distance telephone calls, telephone service at the site, expressage and similar petty cash items in connection with the work.

40.2.4.7 Cost of premiums for additional bonds and insurance

required because of changes in the work.

40.3 The term "cost of the work" shall not include any of the following:

40.3.1 Payroll costs and other compensation of CONTRACTOR's officers, executives, principals (of partnership and sole proprietorships), general managers, engineers, architects, estimators, lawyers, auditors, accountants, purchasing and contracting agents, expediters, timekeepers, clerks and other personnel employed by CONTRACTOR whether at the site or in its principal or a branch office for general administration of the work and not specifically included in the agreed-upon schedule of job classifications referred to in Section 40.2.1, all of which are to be considered administrative costs covered by CONTRACTOR's fee.

40.3.2 Expenses of CONTRACTOR's principal and branch offices

other than CONTRACTOR's office at the site. 40.3.3 Any part of CONTRACTOR's capital expenses, including

interest on CONTRACTOR's capital employed for the work and charges against CONTRACTOR for delinquent payments.

40.3.4 Cost of premiums for all Bonds and for all insurance whether or

not CONTRACTOR is required by the Contract Documents to purchase and maintain the same, except for additional bonds and insurance required because of changes in the work.

40.3.5 Costs due to the negligence or neglect of CONTRACTOR, any

Subcontractors, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them may be liable, including but not limited to, the correction of defective work, disposal of materials or equipment wrongly supplied and making good any damage to property.

40.3.6 Other overhead or general expense costs of any kind and the

cost of any item not specifically and expressly included in Section 40.2.



40.4 CONTRACTOR's fee allowed to CONTRACTOR for overhead and profit

shall be determined as follows:

40.4.1 A mutually acceptable fixed fee or if none can be agreed upon. 40.4.2 A fee based on the following percentages of the various portions

of the cost of the work:

40.4.2.1 For costs incurred under Sections 40.2.1 and 40.2.2 which do not exceed $100,000, CONTRACTOR's fee shall not exceed ten percent (10%). For costs incurred under Sections 40.2.1 and 40.2.2 which exceed $100,000, CONTRACTOR's fee shall not exceed seven and one half percent (7.5%).

40.4.2.2 For costs incurred under Section 40.2.3:

a. Which do not exceed $100,000 for all Subcontractors’ work, CONTRACTOR's fee shall not exceed seven and one half percent (7.5%);

b. Which exceed $100,000 for all Subcontractors’ work, CONTRACTOR's fee shall not exceed five percent (5%);

c. If a subcontract is on the basis of cost of the work plus a fee, the maximum allowable to the Subcontractor as a fee for overhead and profit shall not exceed seven and one half percent (7.5%); and

40.4.2.3 No fee shall be payable on the basis of costs itemized

under Section 40.2.5. 40.4.2.3 No fee shall be payable to the CONTRACTOR for

work which the Owner determines will be paid from the funds included in the Owner’s Allowance Account.

40.5 The amount of credit to be allowed by CONTRACTOR to COUNTY for any

such change which results in a net decrease in Contract Price, will be the amount of the actual net decrease. When both additions and credits are involved in any one change, the combined overhead and profit shall be figured on the basis of the net increase, if any, however, CONTRACTOR shall provide a credit to the COUNTY for overhead and profit.



40.6 Whenever the cost of any work is to be determined pursuant to Sections 40.2, CONTRACTOR will submit in a form acceptable to OCPM an itemized cost breakdown together with the supporting data.

40.7 Where the quantity of any item of the Work that is covered by a unit price

is increased or decreased by more than twenty percent (20%) from the quantity of such work indicated in the Contract Documents, an appropriate Change Order shall be issued to adjust the unit price (increase or decrease), if warranted.

40.8 Whenever a change in the Work is to be based on mutual acceptance of a

lump sum, whether the amount is an addition, credit or no change-in-cost, CONTRACTOR shall submit an initial cost estimate acceptable to OCPM and Contract Administrator.

40.8.1 Breakdown shall list the quantities and unit prices for materials,

labor, equipment and other items of cost. 40.8.2 Whenever a change involves CONTRACTOR and one or more

Subcontractors and the change is an increase in the Contract Price, overhead and profit percentage for CONTRACTOR and each Subcontractor shall be itemized separately.

40.9 Each Change Order must state within the body of the Change Order

whether it is based upon unit price, negotiated lump sum, or "cost of the work."

41. Notification and Claim for Change of Contract Time or Contract Price:

41.1 Any claim for a change in the Contract Time or Contract Price shall be made by written notice by CONTRACTOR to the Contract Administrator, OCPM and to CONSULTANT within five (5) calendar days of the commencement of the event giving rise to the claim and stating the general nature and cause of the claim. Thereafter, within twenty (20) calendar days of the termination of the event giving rise to the claim, written notice of the extent of the claim with supporting information and documentation shall be provided unless OCPM or CONSULTANT allows an additional period of time to ascertain more accurate data in support of the claim and such notice shall be accompanied by CONTRACTOR's written notarized statement that the adjustment claimed is the entire adjustment to which the CONTRACTOR has reason to believe it is entitled as a result of the occurrence of said event. All claims for changes in the Contract Time or Contract Price shall be determined by Contract Administrator. IT IS EXPRESSLY AND SPECIFICALLY AGREED THAT



ANY AND ALL CLAIMS FOR CHANGES TO THE CONTRACT TIME OR CONTRACT PRICE SHALL BE WAIVED IF NOT SUBMITTED IN STRICT ACCORDANCE WITH THE REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SECTION.

41.2 The Contract Time will be extended in an amount equal to time lost on

critical Work items due to delays beyond the control of and through no fault or negligence of CONTRACTOR if a claim is made thereof as provided in Section 41.1. Such delays shall include, but not be limited to, acts or neglect by any separate contractor employed by COUNTY, fires, floods, labor disputes, epidemics, abnormal weather conditions or acts of God.

42. No Damages for Delay:

No claim for damages or any claim, other than for an extension of time, shall be made or asserted against COUNTY by reason of any delays except as provided herein. CONTRACTOR shall not be entitled to an increase in the Contract Price or payment or compensation of any kind from COUNTY for direct, indirect, consequential, impact or other costs, expenses or damages, including but not limited to costs of acceleration or inefficiency, arising because of delay, disruption, interference or hindrance from any cause whatsoever, whether such delay, disruption, interference or hindrance be reasonable or unreasonable, foreseeable or unforeseeable, or avoidable or unavoidable; provided, however, that this provision shall not preclude recovery of damages by CONTRACTOR for actual delays due solely to fraud, bad faith or active interference on the part of COUNTY or its CONSULTANT. Otherwise, CONTRACTOR shall be entitled only to extensions of the Contract Time as the sole and exclusive remedy for such resulting delay, in accordance with and to the extent specifically provided above.

43. Excusable Delay; Compensable; Non-Compensable:

43.1 Excusable Delay. Delay which extends the completion of the Work and which is caused by circumstances beyond the control of CONTRACTOR or its subcontractors, suppliers or vendors are Excusable Delay.

CONTRACTOR is entitled to a time extension of the Contract Time for each day the Work is delayed due to Excusable Delay. CONTRACTOR shall document its claim for any time extension as provided in Article 40 hereof.

Failure of CONTRACTOR to comply with Article 40 hereof as to any particular event of delay shall be deemed conclusively to constitute a



waiver, abandonment or relinquishment of any and all claims resulting from that particular event of delay.

Excusable Delay may be compensable or non-compensable:

(a) Compensable Excusable Delay. Excusable Delay is compensable

when (i) the delay extends the Contract Time, (ii) is caused by circumstances beyond the control of the CONTRACTOR or its subcontractors, suppliers or vendors, and (iii) is caused solely by fraud, bad faith or active interference on the part of COUNTY or its agents. In no event shall CONTRACTOR be compensated for interim delays which do not extend the Contract Time.

CONTRACTOR shall be entitled to direct and indirect costs for Compensable Excusable Delay. Direct costs recoverable by CONTRACTOR shall be limited to the actual additional costs allowed pursuant to Article 40 hereof. COUNTY and CONTRACTOR recognize and agree that the amount of CONTRACTOR's precise actual indirect costs for delay in the performance and completion of the Work is impossible to determine as of the date of execution of the Contract Documents, and that proof of the precise amount will be difficult. Therefore, indirect costs recoverable by the CONTRACTOR shall be liquidated on a daily basis for each day the Contract Time is delayed due to a Compensable Excusable Delay. These liquidated indirect costs shall be paid to compensate CONTRACTOR for all indirect costs caused by a Compensable Excusable Delay and shall include, but not be limited to, all lost profits, all profit on indirect costs, home office overhead, acceleration, loss of earnings, loss of productivity, loss of bonding capacity, loss of opportunity and all other indirect costs incurred by CONTRACTOR. The amount of liquidated indirect costs recoverable shall be $2,000.00 $6000.00 per day for each calendar day the Contract is delayed due to a Compensable Excusable Delay.

(b) Non-Compensable Excusable Delay. When Excusable Delay is

(i) caused by circumstances beyond the control of CONTRACTOR, its subcontractors, suppliers and vendors, and is also caused by circumstances beyond the control of the COUNTY or CONSULTANT, or (ii) is caused jointly or concurrently by CONTRACTOR or its subcontractors, suppliers or vendors and by the COUNTY or CONSULTANT, then CONTRACTOR shall be entitled only to a time extension and no further compensation for the delay.



44. Substantial Completion:

When CONTRACTOR considers that the Work, or a portion thereof designated by COUNTY pursuant to Article 30 hereof, has reached Substantial Completion, CONTRACTOR shall so notify COUNTY and CONSULTANT in writing. CONSULTANT and COUNTY shall then promptly inspect the Work. When CONSULTANT, on the basis of such an inspection, determines that the Work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete, it will then prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion in specification section 00 65 16. The Contract Administrator shall determine the date of Substantial Completion to be set forth in the Certificate of Substantial Completion which shall establish the Date of Substantial Completion. The Certificate of Substantial Completion shall state the responsibilities of COUNTY and CONTRACTOR for security, maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the Work, and insurance. The CONSULTANT and COUNTY shall develop and the CONTRACTOR shall review the list of all Work yet to be completed by CONTRACTOR to satisfy the requirements of the Contract Documents for Final Completion and to make the Work satisfactory and acceptable. The list shall be provided to the CONTRACTOR within five (5) days after final development and review. If the final list is not provided within the stated five (5) days, the contract time for completion shall be extended by the number of days exceeding the five (5) days. The failure to include any items of corrective work on such list does not alter the responsibility of CONTRACTOR to complete all of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Warranties required by the Contract Documents shall commence on the date of Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof unless otherwise provided in the Certificate of Substantial Completion.

45. No Interest: Any monies not paid by COUNTY when claimed to be due to CONTRACTOR under this Agreement, including, but not limited to, any and all claims for contract damages of any type, shall not be subject to interest including, but not limited to prejudgment interest. However, the provisions of COUNTY's prompt payment ordinance, as such relates to timeliness of payment, and the provisions of Section 218.74(4), Florida Statutes, as such relates to the payment of interest, shall apply to valid and proper invoices.

46. Shop Drawings and Other Submittals:

46.1 CONTRACTOR shall submit shop drawings and other submittals as required by Division 1 and the technical specification sections in regard to materials, products, assemblies and systems. The purpose of the Shop Drawings and other submittals is to show the suitability, efficiency,



technique of manufacture, installation requirements, and details of materials, products, assemblies or systems and to provide evidence of their compliance or noncompliance with the Contract Documents.

46.2 Within thirty (30) calendar days after the Project Initiation Date specified in

the first Notice to Proceed, CONTRACTOR shall submit to CONSULTANT a complete list of preliminary data on items for which Shop Drawings and other submittals are to be submitted and shall identify the critical items. Approval of this list by CONSULTANT shall in no way relieve CONTRACTOR from submitting complete Shop Drawings and other submittals and providing materials, equipment, etc., fully in accordance with the Contract Documents. This procedure is required in order to expedite final approval of Shop Drawings and other submittals.

46.3 After the approval of the list of items required in Section 45.2 above,

CONTRACTOR shall promptly request Shop Drawings and submittals from the various manufacturers, fabricators, and suppliers. CONTRACTOR shall include all shop drawings and other submittals in its certification.

46.4 CONTRACTOR shall thoroughly review and check the Shop Drawings

and other submittals and each and every copy shall show this approval thereon.

46.5 If the Shop Drawings and other submittals show or indicate departures

from the Contract Documents, CONTRACTOR shall make specific mention thereof in its letter of transmittal. Failure to point out such departures shall not relieve CONTRACTOR from its responsibility to comply with the Contract Documents.

46.6 CONSULTANT shall review and approve Shop Drawings and other

submittals within fifteen (15) calendar days from the date received, unless said Drawings or submittals are rejected by CONSULTANT for material reasons. CONSULTANT's approval of Shop Drawings and other submittals will be general and shall not relieve CONTRACTOR of responsibility for the accuracy of such Drawings, nor for the proper fitting and construction of the work, nor for the furnishing of materials or work required by the Contract Documents and not indicated on the Drawings. No work called for by Shop Drawings or other submittals shall be performed until the said Drawings or submittals have been approved by CONSULTANT. Approval shall not relieve CONTRACTOR from responsibility for errors or omissions of any sort on the Shop Drawings.



46.7 No approval will be given to partial submittals of Shop Drawings or other submittals for items which interconnect and/or are interdependent where necessary to properly evaluate the design. It is CONTRACTOR's responsibility to assemble the Shop Drawings and other submittals for all such interconnecting and/or interdependent items, check them and then make one submittal to CONSULTANT along with its comments as to compliance, noncompliance, or features requiring special attention.

46.8 If catalog sheets or prints of manufacturers' standard drawings are

submitted, any additional information or changes on such submittals shall be typewritten or lettered in ink.

46.9 CONTRACTOR shall submit the number of copies required by

CONSULTANT. Resubmissions of Shop Drawings shall be made in the same quantity until final approval is obtained.

46.10 CONTRACTOR shall keep one set of Shop Drawings and other submittals

marked with CONSULTANT's approval at the job site at all times.

47. Field Layout of the Work and Record Drawings:

47.1 The entire responsibility for establishing and maintaining line and grade in the field lies with CONTRACTOR. CONTRACTOR shall maintain an accurate and precise record of the location and elevation of all pipe lines, conduits, structures, maintenance access structures, handholes, fittings and the like and shall prepare record or "as-built" drawings of the same which are signed and sealed by a Professional Surveyor. CONTRACTOR shall deliver these records in good order to CONSULTANT as the Work is completed. The cost of all such field layout and recording work is included in the Contract Price. All record drawings shall be made on reproducible paper and shall be delivered to CONSULTANT prior to, and as a condition of, final payment.

47.2 CONTRACTOR shall maintain in a safe place at the Project site one

record copy of all Drawings, Plans, Specifications, Addenda, written amendments, Change Orders, Supplemental Instructions and written interpretations and clarifications in good order and annotated to show all changes made during construction. Additionally, CONTRACTOR shall maintain, at both the project site and a separate secure location acceptable to the OCPM, digital copies of those documents maintained at the Project site as described above. These record documents together with all approved samples and a counterpart of all approved Shop Drawings and other submittals shall be available at all times to CONSULTANT for reference. Upon Final Completion of the Project and



prior to Final Payment, these record documents, samples and Shop Drawings shall be delivered to the Contract Administrator. Prior to, and as a condition precedent to Final Payment, CONTRACTOR shall submit to COUNTY, CONTRACTOR's record drawings or as-built drawings acceptable to CONSULTANT and OCPM.

48. Safety and Protection:

48.1 CONTRACTOR shall be solely responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the Project. CONTRACTOR shall take all necessary precautions for the safety of, and shall provide the necessary protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to:

48.1.1 All employees on the work site and other persons who may be

affected thereby; 48.1.2 All the work and all materials or equipment to be incorporated

therein, whether in storage on or off the Project site; and 48.1.3 Other property at the Project site or adjacent thereto, including

trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures and utilities not designated for removal, relocation or replacement in the course of construction.

48.2 CONTRACTOR shall comply with all applicable laws, ordinances, rules,

regulations and orders of any public body having jurisdiction for the safety of persons or property or to protect them from damage, injury or loss; and shall erect and maintain all necessary safeguards for such safety and protection. CONTRACTOR shall notify owners of adjacent property and utilities when prosecution of the work may affect them. All damage, injury or loss to any property referred to in Sections 47.1.2 and 47.1.3 above, caused directly or indirectly, in whole or in part, by CONTRACTOR, any Subcontractor or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, shall be remedied by CONTRACTOR. CONTRACTOR's duties and responsibilities for the safety and protection of the work shall continue until such time as all the Work is completed and CONSULTANT has issued a notice to COUNTY and CONTRACTOR that the Work is acceptable except as otherwise provided in Article 30 hereof.

48.3 CONTRACTOR shall designate a responsible member of its organization

at the Work site whose duty shall be the prevention of accidents. This



person shall be CONTRACTOR'S superintendent unless otherwise designated in writing by CONTRACTOR to COUNTY.

48.4 CONTRACTOR shall at all times enforce strict discipline and good order

among its employees and subcontractors at the Project site and shall not employ on the Project any unfit person or anyone not skilled in the Work to which they are assigned.

49. Final Bill of Materials:

CONTRACTOR shall be required to submit to COUNTY and CONSULTANT a final bill of materials with unit costs for each bid item for supply of materials in place. This shall be an itemized list of all materials with a unit cost for each material and the total shall agree with unit costs established for each Contract item. A Final Certificate for Payment cannot be issued by CONSULTANT until CONTRACTOR submits the final bill of materials and CONSULTANT verifies the accuracy of the units of Work.

50. Payment by COUNTY for Tests:

Except when otherwise specified in the Contract Documents, the expense of all tests requested by CONSULTANT shall be borne by COUNTY and performed by a testing firm chosen by the OWNER. For road construction projects the procedure for making tests required by CONSULTANT will be in conformance with the most recent edition of the State of Florida, Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction. The cost of any required test which CONTRACTOR fails shall be paid for by CONTRACTOR. The Owner will provide inspection and quality assurance from firms separate from and independent of the Local Building Departments and the required statutory Threshold and Special Inspectors. The primary purpose shall be to assure that the installation of various components is in full compliance with the contract documents and installed in accordance with the manufactures direction. This does not relive the contractor of the responsibility for providing his own quality assurance. The contractor shall cooperate fully with these inspections and shall provide the required access for the inspectors to be able to observe the work. Access shall include scaffolding, swing stages, lighting, etc. These inspections shall include but not be limited to all components of the interior and exterior building envelope, the security system, the communication and audio visual systems, generators, vertical transportation systems, and other building mechanical/electrical plants. The contractor shall make corrections for all documented deficiencies and the cost of excessive and/or repeat inspections shall be charged to the contractor.

51. Project Sign:



Any requirements for a project sign shall be as set forth within the Technical Specifications and/or the Drawings.

52. Hurricane Precautions:

52.1. During such periods of time as are designated by the United States Weather Bureau as being a hurricane or tropical storm watch or warning, and no later than 48 hours prior to when a named storm is forecast to affect the Ft. Lauderdale area, the CONTRACTOR, at no cost to the COUNTY, shall take all precautions necessary to secure the Project site in response to all threatened storm events, regardless of whether the COUNTY or CONSULTANT has given notice of same.

52.2. Compliance with any specific hurricane watch or warning precautions will

not constitute additional work. 52.3. Suspension of the Work caused by a threatened or actual storm event,

regardless of whether the COUNTY has directed such suspension, will entitle the CONTRACTOR to additional Contract Time as non-compensable, excusable delay, and shall not give rise to a claim for compensable delay.

53. Cleaning Up; COUNTY’s Right to Clean Up:

CONTRACTOR shall at all times keep the premises free from accumulation of waste materials or rubbish caused by its operations. At the completion of the Project, CONTRACTOR shall remove all its waste materials and rubbish from and about the Project as well as its tools, construction equipment, machinery and surplus materials. If CONTRACTOR fails to clean up during the prosecution of the Work or at the completion of the Work, COUNTY may do so and the cost thereof shall be charged to CONTRACTOR. If a dispute arises between CONTRACTOR and separate contractors as to their responsibility for cleaning up, COUNTY may clean up and charge the cost thereof to the contractors responsible therefore as CONSULTANT shall determine to be just.

54. Removal of Equipment:

In case of termination of this Contract before completion for any cause whatever, CONTRACTOR, if notified to do so by COUNTY, shall promptly remove any part or all of CONTRACTOR's equipment and supplies from the property of COUNTY, failing which COUNTY shall have the right to remove such equipment and supplies at the expense of CONTRACTOR.



55. EEO AND CBE COMPLIANCE

55.1 NONDISCRIMINATION, EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY, AND AMERICANS WITH DISABILITIES ACT

CONTRACTOR shall not unlawfully discriminate on the basis of race, religion, age, color, sex, national origin, political affiliation, familial status, disability, pregnancy, sexual orientation, gender identity or expression, marital status or political affiliation in the performance of this Agreement, or in subcontracting work in the performance of this Agreement and shall not otherwise unlawfully discriminate in violation of the Broward County Code, Chapter 16 ½, as may be amended from time to time. CONTRACTOR shall take affirmative action to ensure that applicants are employed, and that employees are treated during their employment without regard to their race, religion, color, sex or National origin, sexual orientation, marital status, political affiliation, or physical or mental disability. Such actions shall include, but not be limited to the following: employment, upgrading, demotion, or transfer, recruitment or recruitment advertising, layoff or termination, rates of pay or other forms of compensation; and selection of training, including apprenticeship. CONTRACTOR agrees to post in conspicuous places available to employees and applicants for employment, notices setting forth the provisions of this non-discrimination clause.

55.1.1 COUNTY shall also require that any contractor selected to

perform work on a COUNTY project include the foregoing or similar language in its contracts with any subcontractors, except that any project assisted by U.S. Department of Transportation funds shall comply with the non-discrimination requirements in 49 C.F.R. Parts 23 and 26, as amended. Subcontractors, if any, will be made aware of and will comply with this nondiscrimination clause. Failure to comply with above requirements is a material breach of the contract, and may result in the termination of this contract or such other remedy as COUNTY deems appropriate.

55.1.2 CONTRACTOR shall comply with Title I of the Americans with

Disabilities Act regarding nondiscrimination on the basis of disability in employment and further shall not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, age, religion, color, gender, sexual orientation, national origin, marital status, political affiliation, or physical or mental disability. In addition, CONTRACTOR shall take affirmative



steps to ensure nondiscrimination in employment against disabled persons. Such actions shall include, but not be limited to, the following: employment, upgrading, demotion, transfer, recruitment or recruitment advertising, layoff, termination, rates of pay, other forms of compensation, terms and conditions of employment, training (including apprenticeship), and accessibility.

55.1.3 By execution of this Agreement, CONTRACTOR represents that

it has not been placed on the discriminatory vendor list (as provided in Section 287.134, Florida Statutes). COUNTY hereby materially relies on such representation in entering into this Agreement. An untrue representation of the foregoing shall entitle COUNTY to terminate this Agreement and recover from CONTRACTOR all monies paid by COUNTY pursuant to this Agreement, and may result in debarment from COUNTY’s competitive procurement activities.

55.2 COUNTY BUSINESS ENTERPRISE (“CBE”) COMPLIANCE

In completing this Project, CONTRACTOR agrees to and shall comply with COUNTY Business Enterprise Act of 2009 (Broward County Ordinance No. 2009-40, as may be amended from time to time), hereinafter referred to as the “Act,” which provides for the establishment and implementation of CBE participation goals, initiatives, and other opportunities for COUNTY contracts. Failure by CONTRACTOR to carry out any of the CBE Program requirements shall constitute a material breach of this Agreement, which shall permit COUNTY to terminate this Agreement or to exercise any other remedy available under this Agreement, under the Broward County Administrative Code, under the Broward County Code of Ordinances, or under applicable law, all of which remedies being cumulative. CONTRACTOR acknowledges that the Broward County Board of County Commissioners, acting by and through the Director of the Broward County Office of Economic and Small Business Development, may make minor administrative modifications to the CBE Program which shall become applicable to this Agreement if the administrative modifications are not unreasonable. Written notice of any such modification shall be provided to CONTRACTOR and shall include a deadline for CONTRACTOR to notify COUNTY if CONTRACTOR concludes that the modification exceeds the authority of this section of this Agreement. Failure of CONTRACTOR to timely notify COUNTY of its conclusion that the modification exceeds such



authority shall be deemed acceptance of the modification by CONTRACTOR. The COUNTY shall review each proposed modification to this Agreement that, by itself or aggregated with previous modifications, increase the contract value of this Agreement by ten percent (10%) of the initial contract value, or Fifty Thousand Dollars ($50,000) whichever is less, for opportunities to include or increase the participation of CBE firms, already involved on this Agreement.

55.2.1 COUNTY and CONTRACTOR agree that prime and subcontract awards to CBE firms are crucial to the achievement of COUNTY's CBE participation goals. In an effort to assist COUNTY in achieving its established goals for this Project, CONTRACTOR agrees to meet the current CBE participation goals established by COUNTY.

55.2.1.2. CONTRACTOR may not terminate for convenience a

certified CBE listed as a subcontractor in the CONTRACTORS bid or offer without the County's prior written consent, which consent shall not be unreasonable withheld. CONTRACTOR shall inform COUNTY immediately when a CBE firm is not able to perform or if CONTRACTOR believes the CBE firm should be replaced for any other reason, so that the Office of Economic and Small Business Development may review and verify the good faith efforts of CONTRACTOR to substitute the CBE firm with another CBE firm. Whenever a certified CBE subcontractor is terminated for any reason, including for cause, CONTRACTOR shall make good faith efforts to find another certified CBE firm to perform the work required of the original CBE firm.

55.2.2 CONTRACTOR has committed to the CBE performance delineated in the

CBE Performance Commitment referenced in Supplemental General Conditions. CONTRACTOR has committed to the CBE performance delineated on Exhibit 1, CBE Performance Commitment. CONTRACTOR shall, in performing services for this Project, incorporate by Exhibit 1, the names, addresses, scope of work, and dollar value of CBE participation on the Schedule of CBE Participation into CONTRACTOR’s contracts. CONTRACTOR understands that each CBE firm utilized on the Project to meet the participation goals must be certified by the Broward County Office of Economic and Small Business Development. CONTRACTOR



agrees to enter into contracts with CBE subcontractors which are listed on the Schedule of CBE Participation upon execution of this Agreement and to provide copies of its contracts with such persons to the Contract Administrator and the Broward County Office of Economic and Small Business Development. CONTRACTOR may not deviate from the CBEs delineated in the CBE Performance Commitment, without the prior approval of the OESBD (or designee).

55.2.3 CONTRACTOR understands that it is the responsibility of the Contract Administrator and the Broward County Office of Economic and Small Business Development to monitor compliance with the CBE requirements. In that regard, CONTRACTOR agrees to furnish a Monthly CBE Utilization Report (00 62 39), to both the Contract Administrator and the Broward County Office of Economic and Small Business Development on the progress of CBE participation commencing with the first payment application. This form may be changed by

the Contract Administrator for form and/or content during the course of the project. CONTRACTOR shall coordinate with Contract Administrator prior to all Application for Payment to ensure use of Contract Administrator's current requirements for formal and content

of the CBE Participation Performance Report. All reports shall include the name and business address of each CBE firm solicited by CONTRACTOR to work as a subcontractor in this Agreement and the responses received by CONTRACTOR to such solicitation; the name and business address of each CBE firm actually involved in this Agreement, a description of the work performed and/or product or service supplied by the CBE firms; the date and amount of each expenditure; the CBE status of any contractor performing any portion of this Agreement; and any other information requested by COUNTY which may assist COUNTY in determining the CONTRACTOR’s compliance with its contractual obligations, or may assist in the implementation and enforcement of the Act. The submission of the report required by this subparagraph shall be a condition of payment to CONTRACTOR.

55.2.4 In the event of CONTRACTOR’s noncompliance with its

participation commitment to a CBE firm (including without limitation the unexcused reduction of CBE participation), the affected CBE firm shall have the right to exercise the following remedies if the noncompliance is or was due to no fault of the CBE firm, and due to the willful action or omission of CONTRACTOR:



55.2.4.1 The affected CBE firm shall be entitled to damages

pursuant to its agreement with CONTRACTOR. 55.2.4.2 If a subcontractor or other similarly-situated person

institutes an arbitration proceeding claiming non-compliance with the Act by CONTRACTOR, then only in such event shall the remedies include an undertaking by CONTRACTOR to submit any dispute concerning such damages to binding arbitration by an independent arbitrator. However, binding arbitration shall not be available as to any dispute between CONTRACTOR and COUNTY; nor shall COUNTY incur any cost, fee, or liability relative to any arbitration proceedings. An arbitrator may award reasonable attorney's fees and costs against a non-prevailing party.

55.2.4.3 Nothing under this Subsection 55.2.4 shall be

construed to limit the rights of and remedies available to COUNTY, including the right to seek its own damages pursuant to this Agreement.

55.2.5 CONTRACTOR agrees that nonpayment of a CBE

subcontractor as required by Article 5 of the Contract shall be a material breach of this Agreement and that COUNTY’s Contract Administrator may, at its option, increase allowable retainage or withhold progress payments unless and until CONTRACTOR demonstrates timely payments of sums due to such subcontractors. CONTRACTOR agrees that the presence of a "pay when paid" provision in a subcontract shall not preclude COUNTY or its representatives from inquiring into allegations of nonpayment. The foregoing remedies under this Subsection 55.2.5 shall not be employed when CONTRACTOR demonstrates that failure to pay results from a bona fide dispute with its subcontractor.

55.2.6 COUNTY shall have access without limitation to

CONTRACTOR’s books and records including payroll records, tax returns and records, and books of account, on five (5) business day’s notice, to allow COUNTY to determine CONTRACTOR’s compliance with its commitment to CBE participation and the status of any CBE firm performing any portion of this Agreement. On-site reviews to monitor the



CONTRACTOR’s progress in achieving and maintaining CBE obligations will be carried out by the Contract Administrator in conjunction with OESBD (or designee).

55.2.7 If CONTRACTOR fails to comply with the requirements of this

Agreement or the requirements of the County Business Enterprise Act of 2009, COUNTY shall have the right to exercise any administrative remedies provided by the Business Opportunity Act of 2004, or any other right or remedy provided in this Agreement or under applicable law, with all such rights and remedies being cumulative

56. Project Records:

CONTRACTOR and its subcontractors shall maintain all books and records and accounts, whether financial or otherwise, which relate to the Project and to any claim including without limitation CONTRACTOR’s bid take off, for additional compensation made by CONTRACTOR, including, without limitation, complete and correct records of payments to each of its subcontractors. For each subcontractor, the books and records and accounts shall reflect each payment to the subcontractor and the cumulative total of the payments made to the subcontractor. COUNTY shall have the right to inspect and copy, at COUNTY's expense, the books and records and accounts of CONTRACTOR and its subcontractors which relate in any way to the Project, and to any claim for additional compensation made by CONTRACTOR, and to conduct an audit of the financial and accounting records of CONTRACTOR and its subcontractors which relate to the Project and to any claim for additional compensation made by CONTRACTOR. CONTRACTOR and its subcontractors shall retain and make available to COUNTY all such books and records and accounts, whether financial or otherwise, which relate to the Project and to any claim for a period of three (3) years following Final Completion of the Project. During the Project and the three (3) year period following Final Completion of the Project, CONTRACTOR shall provide COUNTY access to its books and records and accounts upon seventy-two (72) hours written notice

57. POST-HURRICANE AND DISASTER PROVISIONS

57.1 The COUNTY may issue, through its Director of Public Works or Contract Administrator, Construction Change Directives or other enabling documents to mobilize CONTRACTOR and its subcontractors in the aftermath of a hurricane, natural disaster or other emergency for the purposes of damage assessment and providing temporary and permanent repairs to COUNTY facilities (or other facilities as may be assigned by



COUNTY). CONTRACTOR shall mobilize upon mutual agreement of specific terms for this work.

57.1.1 In the immediate aftermath of a storm, natural disaster or other

emergency, the CONTRACTOR and Contract Administrator shall establish communications to determine an assessment and recovery plan and to establish a preliminary list of emergency recovery activities that the CONTRACTOR shall undertake.

57.1.2 CONTRACTOR and Contract Administrator shall utilize that

preliminary list of emergency recovery activities to develop one or more Construction Change Directives for execution by the Contract Administrator and CONTRACTOR. Upon mutual agreement, Contract Administrator shall issue the executed Construction Change Directives upon receipt of which, CONTRACTOR shall immediately undertake the emergency actions described therein.

57.1.3 CONTRACTOR shall mobilize personnel, subcontractors and

equipment as necessary to complete the tasks required by a Construction Change Directive for hurricane or other disaster recovery.

57.1.4 COUNTY shall issue Purchase Orders and other procurement

documents as necessary to support of Construction Change Directives as issued by the Director of Public Works or the Contract Administrator.

57.1.5 CONTRACTOR shall maintain detailed records of the Work and

provide full information required for evaluation and to substantiate costs and time adjustments as may be necessitated by these required changes in the Work.

57.1.6 CONTRACTOR shall coordinate invoicing and payment

procedures for emergency recovery work with the Contract Administrator to ensure expeditious payment and segregation of such payments from those applicable to the non-emergency Work required by this Agreement.

(Rest of page left intentionally blank)

Broward County Courthouse UNIT MASONRY August 15October 21, 2011 04 20 00 - 1 BID SETAddendum #6

SECTION 04 20 00 - UNIT MASONRY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Concrete Block.

B. Mortar and Grout.

C. Reinforcement and Anchorage.

D. Lintels.

E. Accessories.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 01 18 113.13 - Sustainable Design Requirements

B. Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications: Loose steel lintels.

C. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Nailing strips built into masonry.

D. Section 07 21 00 - Thermal Insulation: Insulation.

E. Section 07 84 00 - Firestopping: Firestopping at penetrations of fire-rated masonry and at top of fire-rated walls.

F. Section 07 90 05 - Joint Sealers: Backing rod and sealant at control and expansion joints.

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ACI 530/ASCE 5/TMS 402 - Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures; American Concrete Institute International; 2008.

B. ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 - Specification For Masonry Structures; American Concrete Institute International; 2008.

C. ASTM A 615/A 615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement; 2009b.

D. ASTM C 90 - Standard Specification for Loadbearing Concrete Masonry Units; 2009.

E. ASTM C 129 - Standard Specification for Nonloadbearing Concrete Masonry Units; 2006.

F. ASTM C 140 - Standard Test Methods of Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Units and Related Units; 2010.

G. ASTM C 144 - Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar; 2004.

H. ASTM C 150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 2007.

I. ASTM C 207 - Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes; 2006.

J. ASTM C 270 - Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry; 2008a.

K. ASTM C 404 - Standard Specification for Aggregates for Masonry Grout; 2007.

L. ASTM C 476 - Standard Specification for Grout for Masonry; 2009.

M. ASTM C 780 - Standard Test Method for Preconstruction and Construction Evaluation of Mortars for Plain and Reinforced Unit Masonry; 2009.

N. IMIAWC (CW) - Recommended Practices & Guide Specifications for Cold Weather Masonry


Construction; International Masonry Industry All-Weather Council; 1993.

O. IMIAWC (HW) - Recommended Practices & Guide Specifications for Hot Weather Masonry Construction; International Masonry Industry All-Weather Council; current edition.

P. UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures, for submittal procedures.

B. Product Data: Provide data for masonry units, fabricated wire reinforcement, mortar, and masonry accessories.

C. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for the following: 1. Reinforcing Steel: Detail bending and placement of masonry unit masonry reinforcing bars. 2. Comply with CI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement". 3. Fabricated Flashing: Detail corner units, end-dam units and other special applications. 4. Control Joints: Show location and details of control joints in masonry.

D. Samples: Submit four samples of concrete masonry units to illustrate color, texture, and extremes of color range. Submit colored mortar samples showing the full range of colors available.

E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that masonry units meet or exceed specified requirements.

F. LEED Submittals: 1. Submit applicable LEED Submittal Form for each different product or component which contains

recycled content. 2. Submit applicable LEED Submittal Form for each different product or component which has been

extracted, recovered, or manufactured within 500 miles of the project site. 3. Include statement indicating cost for each regional material and the fraction by weight that is

considered regional.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Comply with provisions of ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602, except where exceeded by requirements of the contract documents. 1. Maintain one copy of each document on project site.

B. Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, through one source from a single manufacturer for each product required.

C. Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, including color for exposed masonry, from one manufacturer for each cementitious component and from one source or producer for each aggregate.

D. Fire Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies with fire resistance ratings determined per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency, by equivalent concrete masonry thickness, or by another means, as acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver, handle, and store masonry units by means that will prevent mechanical damage and contamination by other materials.

1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with waterproof sheeting at end of day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when construction is not in progress. 1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down both sides and hold cover securely in place.


B. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads for at least 3 days

after building masonry walls or columns.

C. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such masonry. 1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and from mortar splatter by covering spread on ground

and over wall surface. 2. Protect sills, ledges and projections from mortar droppings. 3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and integral

surfaces from mortar droppings. 4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain from splashing

mortar and dirt onto completed masonry.

D. Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to minimum 40 degrees F prior to, during, and 48 hours after completion of masonry work.

E. Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to maximum 90 degrees F prior to, during, and 48 hours after completion of masonry work.

1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS

A. Regional Materials: CMUs shall be manufactured within 500 miles of Project site from aggregates and cement that have been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as manufactured, within 500 miles of Project site.

B. Units shall include recycled slag concrete and fly ash to the extent possible.

C. Concrete Block: Comply with referenced standards and as follows: 1. Size: Standard units with nominal face dimensions of 16 x 8 inches and nominal depths as

indicated on the drawings for specific locations. 2. Special Shapes: Provide non-standard blocks configured for corners, lintels, headers, control joint

edges, and other detailed conditions. Exterior corner concrete masonry units of interior partitions, walls, window and door jambs (without wrap-around frames) shall have a 1" radius.

3. Unit Compressive Strength: 2150 psi, unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. 4. Load-Bearing Units: ASTM C 90, normal weight.

a. Hollow block. b. Exposed faces: Manufacturer's standard color and texture.

5. Non-Loadbearing Units: ASTM C 129. a. Hollow block. b. Normal weight. c. Exposed faces: Exterior corner concrete masonry units of interior partitions, walls, window

and door jambs (without wrap-around frames) shall have a 1" radius. Exposed concrete masonry units shall be finish grade, fine textured, suitable for painting.

D. Concrete Building Brick: ASTM C 55. 1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive strength of

2500 psi. 2. Weight Classification: Normal weight.

2.2 CONCRETE AND MASONRY LINTELS


A. General: Provide either concrete or masonry lintels, at Contractor's option, complying with requirements below.

B. Concrete Lintels: Precast or formed-in-place concrete lintels complying with requirements in Section 03 30 00 - "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

2.3 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS

A. Regional Materials: Provide aggregate for mortar and grout, cement and lime that have been extracted, harvested or recovered, as well as manufactured, within 500 miles of project site.

B. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91. 1. Products:

a. Lafarge North America Inc.; Magnolia Masonry Cement or Lafarge Masonry Cement. b. Lehigh Cement Company; Lehigh Masonry Cement.

C. Mortar Cement: ASTM C 1329. 1. Products:

a. Lafarge North America Inc.; Lafarge Mortar Cement or Magnolia Superbond Mortar Cement.

D. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144.

E. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404.

F. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I; color as required to produce approved color sample. 1. Not more than 0.60 percent alkali. 2. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. 3. Mortar Aggregate: ASTM C 144. 4. Grout Aggregate: ASTM C 404.

G. Water: Clean and potable.

2.4 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE

A. Manufacturers of Joint Reinforcement and Anchors: 1. Dur-O-Wal: www.dur-o-wal.com. 2. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc (including Dur-O-Wall brand): www.h-b.com. 3. Masonry Reinforcing Corporation of America: www.wirebond.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 61 00 – Basic Product Requirements

B. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A 615/A 615M Grade 60 (420) deformed billet bars; galvanized. 1. Uncoated Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M or ASTM A 996/A 996M, Grade 60. 2. Masonry Joint Reinforcement, General: ASTM A 951.

a. Interior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized, carbon steel. b. Exterior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized, carbon steel. c. Wire Size for Side Rods: W1.7 or 0.148-inch diameter. d. Wire Size for Cross Rods: W1.7 or 0.148-inch diameter.

3. Masonry Joint Reinforcement for Single-Wythe Masonry: Ladder type, unless otherwise indicated.

2.5 TIES AND ANCHORS

A. Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in subsequent paragraphs that are made from materials that comply with eight subparagraphs below, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Mill-Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82; with ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 coating. 2. Hot-Dip Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82; with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B-2

coating. 3. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel, G60 zinc coating. 4. Steel Sheet, Galvanized after Fabrication: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel, hot-dip

galvanized after fabrication to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M.


5. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

B. Corrugated Metal Ties: Metal strips not less than 7/8 inch wide with corrugations having a wavelength of 0.3 to 0.5 inch and an amplitude of 0.06 to 0.10 inch made from steel sheet, galvanized after fabrication not less than 0.043 inch thick.

C. Wire Ties, General: Unless otherwise indicated, size wire ties to extend at least halfway through veneer but with at least 5/8-inch cover on outside face. Outer ends of wires are bent 90 degrees and extend 2 inches parallel to face of veneer.

D. Partition Top anchors: Unless otherwise indicated on structural drawings, provide 0.097-inch- thick metal plate with 3/8-inch- diameter metal rod 6 inches long welded to plate and with closed-end plastic tube fitted over rod that allows rod to move in and out of tube. Fabricate from steel, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.

E. Rigid Anchors: Fabricate from steel bars 1-1/2 inches wide by 1/4 inch thick by 24 inches long, with ends turned up 2 inches or with cross pins, unless otherwise indicated bent to configuration indicated.

F. Corrosion Protection: Hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 153.

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS ANCHORS

A. Dovetail Slots in Concrete: Specified in Section 03300.

B. Anchor Bolts: Headed or L-shaped steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers; hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C; of dimensions indicated.

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES

A. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1; compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from urethane or PVC.

B. Preformed Control-Joint Gaskets: Made from styrene-butadiene-rubber compound, complying with ASTM D 2000, Designation M2AA-805 or PVC, complying with ASTM D 2287, Type PVC-65406 and designed to fit standard sash block and to maintain lateral stability in masonry wall; size and configuration as indicated.

2.8 ACCESSORIES

A. Preformed Control Joints: Rubber material. Provide with corner and tee accessories, fused joints. 1. Manufacturers:

a. Dur-O-Wal: www.dur-o-wal.com. b. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc (including Dur-O-Wall brand): www.h-b.com. c. Masonry Reinforcing Corporation of America: www.wirebond.com. d. Substitutions: See Section 01 61 00 – Basic Product Requirements

B. Joint Filler: Closed cell polyvinyl chloride; oversized 50 percent to joint width; self expanding; 3/4 inch wide x by maximum lengths available. 1. Manufacturers:

a. Dur-O-Wal: www.dur-o-wal.com. b. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc: www.h-b.com. c. Masonry Reinforcing Corporation of America: www.wirebond.com. d. Substitutions: See Section 01 61 00 – Basic Product Requirements.

C. Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated, organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt).

D. Isolation Tape: Sponge Neoprene tape. Available Manufacturer: Williams Products SCE452 C5, NN-1 or NN-3 to be selected by Architect.


2.9 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES

A. Mortar for Unit Masonry: ASTM C 270, using the Proportion Specification.

B. Colored Mortar: Proportion selected pigments and other ingredients to match Architect's sample, without exceeding manufacturer's recommended pigment-to-cement ratio.

C. Grout: ASTM C 476. Consistency required to fill completely volumes indicated for grouting; fine grout for spaces with smallest horizontal dimension of 2 inches or less; coarse grout for spaces with smallest horizontal dimension greater than 2 inches.

D. Mixing: Use mechanical batch mixer and comply with referenced standards.

2.10 MASONRY-CELL INSULATION

A. Molded-Polystyrene Insulation Units: Rigid, cellular thermal insulation formed by the expansion of polystyrene-resin beads or granules in a closed mold to comply with ASTM C 578, Type I. Provide specially shaped units designed for installing in cores of masonry units.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Concrete Block Insulating Systems; Korfil. b. Shelter Enterprises Inc.; Omni Core. c. Substitutions: See Section 1 61 00 – Basic Product Requirements

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive masonry.

B. Verify that related items provided under other sections are properly sized and located.

C. Verify that built-in items are in proper location, and ready for roughing into masonry work.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Direct and coordinate placement of metal anchors supplied for installation under other sections.

B. Provide temporary bracing during installation of masonry work. Maintain in place until building structure provides permanent bracing.

3.3 COLD AND HOT WEATHER REQUIREMENTS

A. Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to minimum 40 degrees F prior to, during, and 48 hours after completion of masonry work.

B. Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to maximum 90 degrees F prior to, during, and 48 hours after completion of masonry work.

3.4 COURSING

A. Establish lines, levels, and coursing indicated. Protect from displacement.

B. Maintain masonry courses to uniform dimension. Form vertical and horizontal joints of uniform thickness.

C. Concrete Masonry Units: 1. Bond: Running. 2. Coursing: One unit and one mortar joint to equal 8 inches. 3. Mortar Joints: Concave, at exposed units. 4. Mortar Joints: Flush at units to receive plaster or other direct applied finishes other than paint.


3.5 PLACING AND BONDING

A. Lay solid masonry units in full bed of mortar, with full head joints, uniformly jointed with other work.

B. Buttering corners of joints or excessive furrowing of mortar joints is not permitted.

C. Remove excess mortar and mortar smears as work progresses.

D. Interlock intersections and external corners, except for units laid in stack bond.

E. Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has achieved initial set. Where adjustment must be made, remove mortar and replace.

F. Perform job site cutting of masonry units with proper tools to provide straight, clean, unchipped edges. Prevent broken masonry unit corners or edges.

G. Cut mortar joints flush.

H. Isolate masonry partitions from vertical structural framing members with a control joint.

I. Isolate top joint of masonry partitions from horizontal structural framing members and slabs or decks with compressible joint filler.

J. Stopping and Resuming Work: Stop work by racking back units in each course from those in course below; do not tooth. When resuming work, clean masonry surfaces that are to receive mortar, remove loose masonry units and mortar.

K. Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar, unless otherwise indicated.

L. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of metal lath, wire mesh, or plastic mesh in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into core.

M. Build non-load-bearing interior partitions full height of story to underside of solid floor or roof structure above, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Install compressible filler in joint between top of partition and underside of structure above. 2. Fasten partition top anchors to structure above and build into top of partition. Grout cells of CMUs

solidly around plastic tubes of anchors and push tubes down into grout to provide 1/2-inch clearance between end of anchor rod and end of tube. Space anchors 48 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated.

3. Wedge non-load-bearing partitions against structure above with small pieces of tile, slate, or metal. Fill joint with mortar after dead-load deflection of structure above approaches final position.

4. At fire-rated partitions, treat joint between top of partition and underside of structure above to comply with Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems."

5. At partitions indicated, use continuous sponge neoprene tape on steel angle facing masonry to isolate steel angle bracing from masonry.

3.6 ANCHORING MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL MEMBERS

A. Anchor masonry to structural members where masonry abuts or faces structural members to comply with the following: 1. Provide an open space not less than 1/2 inch in width between masonry and structural member,

unless otherwise indicated. Keep open space free of mortar and other rigid materials. 2. Anchor masonry to structural members with anchors embedded in masonry joints and attached to

structure. 3. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 24 inches o.c. vertically and 36 inches o.c.

horizontally.

3.7 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE - GENERAL

A. Unless otherwise indicated on drawings or specified under specific wall type, install horizontal joint reinforcement 16 inches on center.


B. Place masonry joint reinforcement in first and second horizontal joints above and below openings. Extend minimum 16 inches each side of opening.

C. Place continuous joint reinforcement in first and second joint below top of walls.

D. Lap joint reinforcement ends minimum 6 inches.

E. Fasten anchors to structural framing and embed in masonry joints as masonry is laid. Unless otherwise indicated on drawings or closer spacing is indicated under specific wall type, space anchors at maximum of 32 inches horizontally and 16 inches vertically.

3.8 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE - SINGLE WYTHE MASONRY

A. Install horizontal joint reinforcement 8 inches on center.

B. Place masonry joint reinforcement in first and second horizontal joints above and below openings. Extend minimum 16 inches each side of opening.

3.9 LINTELS

A. Install reinforced unit masonry lintels over openings where steel or precast concrete lintels are not scheduled. 1. Openings to 42 inches: Place two, No. 3 reinforcing bars 1 inch from bottom web. 2. Openings from 42 inches to 78 inches: Place two, No. 5 reinforcing bars 1 inch from bottom web. 3. Openings over 78 inches: Reinforce openings as detailed. 4. Do not splice reinforcing bars. 5. Support and secure reinforcing bars from displacement. Maintain position within 1/2 inch of

dimensioned position. 6. Place and consolidate grout fill without displacing reinforcing. 7. Allow masonry lintels to attain specified strength before removing temporary supports.

3.10 MASONRY-CELL INSULATION

A. Install molded-polystyrene insulation units into masonry unit cells before laying units.

3.110 GROUTED COMPONENTS

A. Reinforce bond beams with 2, No. 5 bars, 1 inch from bottom web.

B. Lap splices minimum 24 bar diameters.

C. Support and secure reinforcing bars from displacement. Maintain position within 1/2 inch of dimensioned position.

D. Place and consolidate grout fill without displacing reinforcing.

3.121 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS

A. Do not continue horizontal joint reinforcement through control and expansion joints.

B. Install preformed control joint device in continuous lengths. Seal butt and corner joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

C. Form expansion joint as detailed.

3.132 BUILT-IN WORK

A. As work progresses, install built-in louvers and other items to be built into the work and furnished under other sections.

B. Install built-in items plumb, level, and true to line.


C. Bed anchors of metal door frames in adjacent mortar joints. Fill frame voids solid with grout. 1. Fill adjacent masonry cores with grout minimum 12 inches from framed openings.

D. Do not build into masonry construction organic materials that are subject to deterioration.

3.143 TOLERANCES

A. Comply with construction tolerances in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 and with the following: 1. Maximum Variation from Alignment of Columns: 1/4 inch. 2. Maximum Variation From Unit to Adjacent Unit: 1/16 inch. 3. Maximum Variation from Plane of Wall: 1/4 inch in 10 ft and 1/2 inch in 20 ft or more. 4. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1/4 inch per story non-cumulative; 1/2 inch in two stories or

more. 5. Maximum Variation from Level Coursing: 1/8 inch in 3 ft and 1/4 inch in 10 ft; 1/2 inch in 30 ft. 6. Maximum Variation of Joint Thickness: 1/8 inch in 3 ft. 7. Maximum Variation from Cross Sectional Thickness of Walls: 1/4 inch.

3.154 CUTTING AND FITTING

A. Cut and fit for chases. Coordinate with other sections of work to provide correct size, shape, and location.

B. Obtain approval prior to cutting or fitting masonry work not indicated or where appearance or strength of masonry work may be impaired.

3.165 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. An independent testing agency will perform field quality control tests, as specified in Section 01 40 00.

B. Concrete Masonry Unit Tests: Test each variety of concrete unit masonry in accordance with ASTM C 140 for conformance to requirements of this specification.

C. Mortar Tests: Test each type of mortar in accordance with ASTM C 780, testing with same frequency as masonry samples.

D. Grout shall be sampled and tested for compressive strength per ASTM C 1019.

E. Prism Test: For each type of construction provided, according to ASTM C 1314 at 28 days.

3.176 CLEANING

A. Remove excess mortar and mortar droppings.

B. Replace defective mortar. Match adjacent work.

C. Clean soiled surfaces with cleaning solution.

D. Use non-metallic tools in cleaning operations.

3.187 PROTECTION

A. Without damaging completed work, provide protective boards at exposed external corners that are subject to damage by construction activities.

3.198 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL

A. Excess Masonry Waste: Unless otherwise indicated, excess masonry materials are Contractor's property. At completion of unit masonry work, remove from Project site, and legally dispose of off Owner's property.


END OF SECTION

Broward County Courthouse ROUGH CARPENTRY August 15, 2011October 21, 2011 06 10 00 - 1 BID SETAddendum #6

SECTION 06 10 00 - ROUGH CARPENTRY

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Rough opening framing for doors, windows, and roof openings.

B. Roof-mounted curbs.

C. Roofing nailers.

D. Roofing cant strips.

E. Preservative treated wood materials.

F. Fire retardant treated wood materials.

G. Communications and electrical room mounting boards.

H. Concealed wood blocking, nailers, and supports.


A. Section 01 81 13.13 - Sustainable Design Requirements.

B. Section 05 12 00 - Structural Steel Framing: Prefabricated beams and columns for support of wood framing.

C. Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications: Miscellaneous steel connectors and support angles for wood framing.

D. Section 07 62 00 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Sill flashings.


A. ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2009a

B. ASTM C 1396/C 1396M - Standard Specification for Gypsum Board; 2009a.

C. ASTM D 2898 - Standard Test Methods for Accelerated Weathering of Fire-Retardant-Treated Wood for Fire Testing; 2009.

D. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2010.

E. AWPA C2 - Lumber, Timber, Bridge Ties and Mine Ties -- Preservative Treatment by Pressure Processes; American Wood Protection Association; 2003.

F. AWPA C9 - Plywood -- Preservative Treatment by Pressure Processes; American Wood Protection Association; 2003.

G. AWPA C20 - Structural Lumber -- Fire Retardant Treatment by Pressure Processes; American Wood-Protection Association; 2003.

H. AWPA C27 - Plywood -- Fire-Retardant Treatment by Pressure Processes; American Wood-Protection Association; 2002.

I. AWPA U1 - Use Category System: User Specification for Treated Wood; American Wood Protection Association; 2010.

J. FM DS 1-28 - Wind Design; Factory Mutual Research Corporation; 2007.

K. FM 1-29 - Roof Deck Securement and Above-Deck Roof Components; 2007.


L. FM 1-49 - Perimeter Flashing; 2000.

M. FM P7825 - Approval Guide; Factory Mutual Research Corporation; current edition.

N. FLA (FBC-B) - Florida Building Code: Building; 2007, with 2009 Supplement.

O. PS 1 - Structural Plywood; 2007.

P. PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard; National Institute of Standards and Technology (Department of Commerce); 2005.

Q. SPIB (GR) - Grading Rules; Southern Pine Inspection Bureau, Inc.; 2002.

R. WWPA G-5 - Western Lumber Grading Rules; Western Wood Products Association; 2011.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.

B. Product Data: Provide technical data on wood preservative materials and application instructions.

C. Wind Calculations for Wood Nailers: Submit wind calculations indicating that the roof wood nailers meet the wind uplift pressures on elevations greater than 40 feet as required by the Florida Building Code. Calculations shall be signed and sealed by a licensed engineer registered in the State of Florida.

D. Structural Composite Lumber: Submit manufacturer's published structural data including span tables, marked to indicate which sizes and grades are being used; if structural composite lumber is being substituted for dimension lumber or timbers, submit grading agency structural tables marked for comparison. 1. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by

treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Include physical properties of treated materials, both before and after exposure to elevated temperatures when tested according to ASTM D 5516 and ASTM D 5664.

2. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to project site.

3. Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of treatment. 4. Research/Evaluation Reports: For the following, show compliance with building code in effect for

project: a. Fire-retardant treated wood. b. Power driven fasteners.

E. Samples: For rough carpentry members that will be exposed to view, submit two samples, illustrating wood grain, color, and general appearance.

F. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that wood products supplied for rough carpentry meet or exceed specified requirements.

G. LEED Submittals: Submit applicable LEED Submittal Form for each different product made of sustainably harvested wood, salvaged and reused wood, wood fabricated from recovered timber, as well as locally-sourced wood, as specified in Section 01 35 15. 1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For adhesives, including printed statement of VOC content. 2. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.4: For composite-wood products, documentation indicating that

product contains no urea formaldehyde. 3. Certificates for Credit MR 7: Chain-of-custody certificates certifying that products specified to be

made from certified wood comply with forest certification requirements. Include evidence that mill is certified for chain of custody by an FSC-accredited certification body.

4. Submit applicable LEED Submittal Form for each different product or component which has been extracted, recovered, or manufactured within 500 miles of the project site.



A. General: Cover wood products to protect against moisture. Support stacked products to prevent deformation and to allow air circulation.

B. Fire Retardant Treated Wood: Prevent exposure to precipitation during shipping, storage, or installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Dimension Lumber: Comply with PS 20 and requirements of specified grading agencies. 1. If no species is specified, provide any species graded by the agency specified; if no grading agency

is specified, provide lumber graded by any grading agency meeting the specified requirements. 2. Grading Agency: Any grading agency whose rules are approved by the Board of Review,

American Lumber Standard Committee (www.alsc.org) and who provides grading service for the species and grade specified; provide lumber stamped with grade mark unless otherwise indicated.

3. Lumber of other species or grades is acceptable provided structural and appearance characteristics are equivalent to or better than products specified.

B. Lumber fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted.

C. Provide wood harvested within a 500 mile radius of the project site; see Section 01 60 00 for requirements for locally-sourced products.

2.2 DIMENSION LUMBER FOR CONCEALED APPLICATIONS

A. Grading Agency: Southern Pine Inspection Bureau, Inc. (SPIB).

B. Sizes: Nominal sizes as indicated on drawings, S4S.

C. Moisture Content: S-dry or MC19.

D. Miscellaneous Framing, Blocking, Nailers, Grounds, and Furring: 1. Lumber: S4S, No. 2 or Standard Grade. 2. Boards: Standard or No. 3.

2.3 CONSTRUCTION PANELS

A. Communications and Electrical Room Mounting Boards: PS 1 A-D plywood, or medium density fiberboard; 3/4 inch thick; fire retardant treated.

2.4 SUBSTRATE PANELS

Medium Density Fiberboard: Manufacturer's industrial grade medium density fiberboard (MDF), manufactured with a formaldehyde-free adhesive system which meets the requirements of ANSI A208.2. 1. Density: 48 lbs/cubic ft. 2. Internal Bond: 115 lb/sq.in. 3. Modulus of Rupture: 4,800 lb/sq.in. 4. Modulus of Elasticity: 480,000 lb/sq.in. 5. Water Absorption: 8%. 6. Flame Spread Rating: Class C (3). 7. Moisture Content: 4-6%.

2.45 ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners and Anchors: 1. Metal and Finish: Stainless steel for high humidity and preservative-treated wood locations,

unfinished steel elsewhere.


2. Drywall Screws: Bugle head, hardened steel, power driven type, length to achieve full penetration of sheathing substrate.

3. Anchors: Toggle bolt type for anchorage to hollow masonry. 4. Nails: Ring or annular shanks. 5. Mounting: “Z” clips.

B. Water Resistive Barrier: Self-adhering membrane seperation sheet between pressure-treated wood products and coated and uncoated metals: 1. Basis of Design Manufacturer and Product: Ice and Water Shield HT by Grace Construction

Products. 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 61 00 – Basic Product Requirements

2.56 FACTORY WOOD TREATMENT

A. Treated Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements of AWPA U1 - Use Category System for wood treatments determined by use categories, expected service conditions, and specific applications. 1. Fire-Retardant Treated Wood: Mark each piece of wood with producer's stamp indicating

compliance with specified requirements. 2. Preservative-Treated Wood: Provide lumber and plywood marked or stamped by an

ALSC-accredited testing agency, certifying level and type of treatment in accordance with AWPA standards.

B. Fire Retardant Treatment: 1. Manufacturers:

a. Arch Wood Protection, Inc: www.wolmanizedwood.com. b. Hoover Treated Wood Products, Inc: www.frtw.com. c. Substitutions: See Section 01 61 00 – Basic Product Requirements

2. Exterior Type: AWPA U1, Category UCFB, Commodity Specification H, chemically treated and pressure impregnated; capable of providing a maximum flame spread rating of 25 when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84, with no evidence of significant combustion when test is extended for an additional 20 minutes both before and after accelerated weathering test performed in accordance with ASTM D 2898. a. Kiln dry wood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent for lumber and 15

percent for plywood. b. Treat all exterior rough carpentry items. c. Do not use treated wood in direct contact with the ground.

3. Interior Type A: AWPA U1, Use Category UCFA, Commodity Specification H, low temperature (low hygroscopic) type, chemically treated and pressure impregnated; capable of providing a maximum flame spread rating of 25 when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84, with no evidence of significant combustion when test is extended for an additional 20 minutes. a. Kiln dry wood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent for lumber and 15

percent for plywood. b. n to make sure that they can meet the NTreat all interior rough carpentry. c. Do not use treated wood in applications exposed to weather or where the wood may become

wet.

C. Preservative Treatment: 1. Manufacturers:

a. Arch Wood Protection, Inc: www.wolmanizedwood.com. b. Chemical Specialties, Inc: www.treatedwood.com. c. Osmose, Inc: www.osmose.com. d. Substitutions: See Section 01 61 00 – Basic Product Requirements.

D. Preservative Pressure Treatment of Lumber Above Grade: AWPA U1, Use Category UC3B,


Commodity Specification A using waterborne preservative to 0.25 lb/cu ft retention. 1. Kiln dry lumber after treatment to maximum moisture content of 19 percent. 2. Treat lumber in contact with roofing, flashing, or waterproofing. 3. Treat lumber in contact with masonry or concrete. 4. Treat lumber less than 18 inches above grade.

a. Treat lumber in other locations as indicated. 5. Preservative Pressure Treatment of Plywood Above Grade: AWPA U1, Use Category UC2 and

UC3B, Commodity Specification F using waterborne preservative to 0.25 lb/cu ft retention. a. Kiln dry plywood after treatment to maximum moisture content of 19 percent. b. Treat plywood in contact with roofing, flashing, or waterproofing. c. Treat plywood in contact with masonry or concrete. d. Treat plywood less than 18 inches above grade. e. Treat plywood in other locations as indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Where wood framing bears on cementitious foundations, install full width sill flashing continuous over top of foundation, lap ends of flashing minimum of 4 inches and seal.

B. Install sill gasket under sill plate of framed walls bearing on foundations; puncture gasket cleanly to fit tightly around protruding anchor bolts.

C. Coordinate installation of rough carpentry members specified in other sections.

3.2 INSTALLATION - GENERAL

A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate furring, nailers, blocking and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction.

B. Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of rough carpentry or pieces that are too small to use with minumum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement.

C. Select material sizes to minimize waste.

D. Reuse scrap to the greatest extent possible; clearly separate scrap for use on site as accessory components, including: shims, bracing, and blocking.

E. Where treated wood is used on interior, provide temporary ventilation during and immediately after installation sufficient to remove indoor air contaminants.

3.3 BLOCKING, NAILERS, AND SUPPORTS

A. Provide framing and blocking members as indicated or as required to support finishes, fixtures, specialty items, and trim.

B. In framed assemblies that have concealed spaces, provide solid wood fireblocking as required by applicable local code, to close concealed draft openings between floors and between top story and roof/attic space; other material acceptable to code authorities may be used in lieu of solid wood blocking.

C. In metal stud walls, provide continuous blocking around door and window openings for anchorage of frames, securely attached to stud framing.

D. In walls, provide blocking attached to studs as backing and support for wall-mounted items, unless item can be securely fastened to two or more studs or other method of support is explicitly indicated.

E. Where ceiling-mounting is indicated, provide blocking and supplementary supports above ceiling, unless other method of support is explicitly indicated.


F. Specifically, provide the following non-structural framing and blocking: 1. Cabinets and shelf supports. 2. Wall brackets. 3. Handrails. 4. Grab bars. 5. Towel and bath accessories. 6. Wall-mounted door stops. 7. Chalkboards and marker boards. 8. Wall paneling and trim. 9. Joints of rigid wall coverings that occur between studs.

3.4 ROOF-RELATED CARPENTRY

A. Coordinate installation of roofing carpentry with deck construction, framing of roof openings, and roofing assembly installation.

B. Securely attach rough carpentry work, including blocking and nailers, to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, and complying with applicable standards as indicated in FM 1-29 and FM 1-49.

C. Provide wood curb at all roof openings except where specifically indicated otherwise. Form corners by alternating lapping side members.

3.5 INSTALLATION OF CONSTRUCTION PANELS

A. Communications and Electrical Room Mounting Boards: Secure with screws to studs with edges over firm bearing; space fasteners at maximum 24 inches on center on all edges and into studs in field of board. 1. Where boards are indicated as full floor-to-ceiling height, install with long edge of board parallel to

studs. 2. Install adjacent boards without gaps. 3. Size and Location: As indicated on drawings.

3.6 SITE APPLIED WOOD TREATMENT

A. Apply preservative treatment compatible with factory applied treatment at site-sawn cuts, complying with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Allow preservative to dry prior to erecting members.

3.7 TOLERANCES

A. Framing Members: 1/4 inch from true position, maximum.

B. Surface Flatness of Floor: 1/8 inch in 10 feet maximum, and 1/4 inch in 30 feet maximum.

C. Variation from Plane (Other than Floors): 1/4 inch in 10 feet maximum, and 1/4 inch in 30 feet maximum.

3.8 CLEANING

A. Waste Disposal: Comply with the requirements of Section 01 74 19. 1. Comply with applicable regulations. 2. Do not burn scrap on project site. 3. Do not burn scraps that have been pressure treated. 4. Do not send materials treated with pentachlorophenol, CCA, or ACA to co-generation facilities or

“waste-to-energy” facilities.

B. Do not leave any wood, shavings, sawdust, etc. on the ground or buried in fill.

C. Prevent sawdust and wood shavings from entering the storm drainage system.


END OF SECTION

Broward County Courthouse ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK October 1221, 2011 06 41 00 - 1 Addendum #56

SECTION 06 41 00 - ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Specially fabricated cabinet units.

B. Cabinet hardware.

C. Factory finishing.



B. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Support framing, grounds, and concealed blocking.

C. Section 12 36 00 - Countertops.

D. Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating: Site finishing of cabinet exterior.

E. Section 13 46 00 - Bullet Resistant Protection.


A. ANSI A208.1 - American National Standard for Particleboard; 1999.

B. NEMA LD 3 - High-Pressure Decorative Laminates; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2005.

C. PS 1 - Structural Plywood; 2007.

D. PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard; National Institute of Standards and Technology (Department of Commerce); 2005.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Show details full size.

C. Show locations and sizes of blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections.

D. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for plumbing fixtures, faucets, and other items installed in architectural woodwork.

E. Show veneer leaves with dimensions, grain direction, exposed face, and identification numbers indicating the flitch and sequence within the flitch for each leaf.

F. Show coordination with Section 061000 Rough Carpentry for judge's bench framing and other required framing.

G. Shop Drawings: Indicate materials, component profiles and elevations, assembly methods, joint details, fastening methods, accessory listings, hardware location and schedule of finishes.

H. Product Data: Provide data for hardware accessories, including cabinet hardware and accessories and finishing materials and processes. For hardboard, medium density fiberboard, particleboard, plywood, high pressure decorative laminate, adhesive for bonding plastic laminate and accessories, and finishing materials and processes.

I. Samples: Submit actual samples of architectural cabinet construction, minimum 12 inches square, illustrating proposed cabinet, countertop, and shelf unit substrate and finish.


1. Lumber with or for transparent finish, not less than 5 inches wide by 24 inches long, for each species and cut, finished on 1 side and 1 edge.

2. Veneer leaves representative of and selected from flitches to be used for transparent-finished woodwork.

3. Veneer-faced panel products with or for transparent finish, 12 by 24 inches, for each species and cut. Include at least one face-veneer seam and finish as specified.

4. Plastic laminates, 8 by 10 inches, for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish, with 1 sample applied to core material and specified edge material applied to 1 edge.

5. Corner pieces as follows: a. Wood casework front frame joints between stiles and rails, as well as exposed end pieces, 18

inches high by 18 inches wide by 6 inches deep. 6. Exposed cabinet hardware and accessories, one unit for each type and finish.

J. Woodwork Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWS/AWI Quality Certification Program certificates.

K. Qualification Data: For Installer and fabricator.

L. Samples: Submit actual sample items of proposed pulls, hinges, shelf standards, and locksets, demonstrating hardware design, quality, and finish.

M. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of woodwork certifying that products furnished comply with requirements.

N. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and address of architects and owners, and other information specified.

O. LEED Submittals: 1. Product Data for Credit EIQ 4.1: For installation adhesives, including printed statement of VOC

content. 2. Product Data for Credit EIQ 4.4:

a. For each composite-wood product used, documentation indicating that the bonding agent contains no urea formaldehyde.

b. For each adhesive used, documentation indicating that the adhesive contains no urea formaldehyde.

3. Product Data for Credit(s) MR 4.1 and MR 4.2: For products having recycled content, documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content

4. Certificates for Credit MR 7: Chain-of-custody certificates certifying that products specified to be made from certified wood comply with forest certification requirements. Include evidence that mill is certified for chain of custody by an FSC-accredited certification body.

5. Product Certificates for Credit MR 5: For products and materials required to comply with requirements for regional materials, certificates indicating location of material manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest, or recovery for each raw material. Include statement indicating distance to Project, cost for each regional material, and fraction by weight that is considered regional.

6. Product Certificates for Credit MR 5: For products and materials required to comply with requirements for regionally manufactured and regionally extracted and manufactured materials. Include statement indicating cost for each regionally manufactured material. a. Include statement indicating location of manufacturer and distance to Project for each

regionally manufactured material. b. Include statement indicating location of manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest, or

recovery for each raw material used in regionally extracted and manufactured materials. Indicate distance to Project and fraction by weight of each regionally manufactured material that is regionally extracted.

7. Laboratory Test Reports for Credit IEQ 4.1: For adhesives, documentation indicating that products


comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."


A. Source Limitations: Engage a qualified woodworking firm to assume undivided responsibility for production and installation of interior architectural woodworking including wood doors when veneer matching includes door faces.

B. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance. Shop is a certified participant in AWS's Quality Assurance Program.

C. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products.

D. Single-Source Responsibility for Fabrication and Installation: Engage a qualified woodworking firm to assume undivided responsibility for fabricating finishing and installing woodwork specified in this Section.

E. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with AWS's "Architectural Woodwork Standards" Premium grade of interior architectural woodwork indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements. 1. Provide AWS/AWI Quality Certification Program labels and certificates indicating that woodwork,

including installation, complies with requirements of grades specified.

F. Unfinished Courtrooms Mockups: Build following unfinished mockups to verify dimensions and confirm required visibility from users' side and from spectators' side. 1. Civil Courtroom as shown on Sheet A3.4.01 Detail 1. 2. Criminal Courtroom as shown on Sheet A3.4.06 Detail 3.3. Hearing Room as shown on Sheet

A3.4.09 Detail 1 4. First Apperance Courtroom as shown on Sheet A3.4.11 Detail 5. 5.. Location of Mockups: On-site at location provided by Contractor in agreement with

Owner/Owner representative 6. Mock-up to include rough simulations of major furmiture and technology elements to entire

courtroom complete with walls. 7. Courtroom mock-ups to be constructed and approved prior to submission of formal millwork shop

drawing. No fabrication of all related millwork shall proceed until associated mock-up has been approved.

8.. Demolish and remove mockups after approval. 9. All materials of constructed mock-up must be fabricated of adequate size and strength to garrentee

support

G. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Mockups required which if approved may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time

of Substantial Completion: a. Casework for Transparent Finish: One unit including countertop, drawer and door

construction. b. Hearing Room: Casework, including top and shelving; one (1) mockup typical height x5 ft. W. c. Main lobby casework including top; one (1) mockup typical height. x 3 ft. W d. Courtrooms-Hearing Rooms Mockups: Provide four full size mockups of these rooms as

follows: 1) 1,600 SF Courtroom with 3 different jury box configurations and rail locations. 2) 1 hearing room including bench and tables.


3) 1 first appearance courtroom 4) 1 Juvenile Courtroom, 5) Mock up to include proposed tables and chairs and computer screens to be used as part of

the mockup. Location for mock up to be provided. 6) Location of Mockups: Off site at location provided by Contractor in agreement with

Owner/Owner representative e. Judge's Bench: One (1) mockups; full size, as selected by Architect. Dimensions per

approved unfinished mockups. f. Jury Box: Two (2) mockups, full size each, as selected by Architect to reflect a 7 and 14

person condition. g. Courtroom Removable Railing System: Provide one (1) full size mock-up of typical

removable railing system. Location for mock up to be provided by the Architect. h. Courtroom Lectern: Provide one (1) full size mock-up of typical courtroom lectern including

the mechanical height adjustment mechanism.

1.6 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING

A. Convene not less than one week before starting work of this section.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of work specified in other Sections to ensure that interior architectural woodwork can be supported and installed as indicated.


A. Do not deliver woodwork until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If woodwork must be stored in other installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Project Conditions" Article.

1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

B. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the work. 1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork by field

measurements before being enclosed and indicate measurements on shop drawings. 2. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the work,

establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating woodwork without field measurements. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WOODWORK FABRICATORS

A. Fabricators: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide interior architectural woodwork by one of the following: 1. Refer to AWS/AWI list of regional woodworking firms.

2.2 MATERIALS


A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of AWS's quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Wood Moisture Content: 5 to 10 percent.

B. Wood Species and Cut for Transparent Finish: 1. American Cherry, Quarter Sliced, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Softwood Lumber:In accordance with AWS Architectural Woodwork StandardsPremium Grade species as scheduled.

D. Hardwood Lumber:In accordance with AWS Architectural Woodwork StandardsPremium Grade species as scheduled.

2.3 PANEL MATERIALS

A. Composite Wood and Agrifiber Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated. 1. Composite Wood and Agrifiber Products: Products shall comply with the testing and product

requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

B. Softwood Faced Plywood: DOC PS 1, medium-density overlay.

C. Exposed Surfaces: PS 1; APA A-A Grade, plainquarter-sliced American Cherry face veneer, Interior rated adhesives, core of particleboard or medium density fiberboard, thickness as indicated.

D. Veneer Faced Plywood Finish: HPVA HP-1; graded in accordance with AWS Architectural Woodwork Standards core of particleboard or medium density fiberboard; type of glue recommended for specific application; thickness as required, book matched. 1. Exposed Surfaces: Grade AA, American Cherry, quarterplain sliced, book-matched. 2. Semi-Exposed Surfaces: Grade A, American Cherry, quarterplain sliced, book-matched. 3. Concealed Surfaces: Grade B, American Cherry, quarterplain sliced, book-matched.

E. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1; medium density industrial type as specified in AWS Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated, composed of wood chips bonded with interior grade adhesive under heat and pressure; sanded faces; thickness as required; use for components indicated on drawings; made with binder containing no formaldehyde.

F. Medium Density Fiberboard (MDF): ANSI A208.2; type as specified in AWS Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated, composed of wood fibers pressure bonded with moisture resistant adhesive to suit application; sanded faces; thickness as indicated; made with binder containing no formaldehyde.

G. Fire Retardant-Treated Materials: 1. General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, use materials complying with

requirements in this Article, that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and with fire-test-response characteristics specified. a. Do not use treated materials that do not comply with requirements of referenced woodworking

standard or that are warped, discolored, or otherwise defective. b. Use fire-retardant-treatment formulations that do not bleed through or otherwise adversely

affect finishes. Do not use colorants to distinguish treated materials from untreated materials. c. Identify fire-retardant-treated materials with appropriate classification marking of UL, U.S.

Testing, Timber Products Inspection, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Comply with performance requirements of AWPA T1 and U1 for lumber and plywood. Use the following treatment type: a. Interior Type A: Low-hygroscopic formulation. b. Mill lumber before treatment and implement special procedures during treatment and drying


processes that prevent lumber from warping and developing discolorations from drying sticks or other causes, marring, and other defects affecting appearance of treated woodwork.

c. Kiln-dry materials before and after treatment to levels required for untreated materials. 3. Fire-Retardant Fiberboard: Medium-density fiberboard panels complying with ANSI A208.2,

made from softwood fibers, synthetic resins, and fire-retardant chemicals mixed together at time of panel manufacture to achieve flame-spread index of 25 or less and smoke-developed index of 200 or less per ASTM E 84. a. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "Medite FR" by SierraPine Ltd.;

Medite Div.

2.4 LAMINATE MATERIALS

A. Basis of Design Manufacturer: 1. As indicated in "Interior Finish Schedule" included on drawings.

B. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Formica Corporation: www.formica.com. 2. Panolam Industries International, Inc\Nevamar: www.nevamar.com. 3. Wilsonart International, Inc: www.wilsonart.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 61 00 - Basic Product Requirements.

C. High Pressure Decorative Laminate (HPDL): NEMA LD 3, types as recommended for specific applications and as indicated. 1. Horizontal Surfaces: HGS, 0.048 inch nominal thickness, through color, colors as scheduled, finish

as scheduled. 2. Vertical Surfaces: VGS, 0.028 inch nominal thickness, through color, colors as scheduled, finish as

scheduled. 3. Cabinet Liner: CLS, 0.020 inch nominal thickness, through color, colors as scheduled, finish as

scheduled. 4. Laminate Backer: BKL, 0.020 inch nominal thickness, undecorated; for application to concealed

backside of panels faced with high pressure decorative laminate.

2.5 ACCESSORIES

A. Adhesive: Type recommended by fabricator to suit application. Do not use adhesives that contain formaldehyde.

B. Fasteners: Size and type to suit application, fabricated from stainless steel.

C. Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Lags, Pins, and Screws: Of size and type to suit application; stainless steel throughout.

D. Concealed Joint Fasteners: Threaded steel.

2.6 CABINET HARDWARE

A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural cabinets. As follows is a list of acceptable cabinet hardware. This list may not include all required hardware. Hardware not listed below, but require to complete casework/cabinetwork must be provided manufacturer by Hafele, Soss, or KV.

B. Invisible Hinges: Manufacturers: Soss or Hafele; style as recommended by cabinetwork fabricator and per shop drawings. Provide number of hinges as recommended by manufacturer according to height and width of doors. 630 finish.

C. Semi-Concealed Hinges: Hafele “Aximat” or Grass “Atlas 961”. Provide number of hinges as recommended by manufacturer according to height and width of doors. 630 Finish.

D. Pulls for Doors and Drawer Pulls:


1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide bent round rod type, 4 inches o.c. Manufacturer: Stanley #4484; Colonial #753 or equivalent by Hafele. Finish: 630.

E. Catches: 1. Magnetic Catches: B03112 and B03172 and per approved sample.

F. Cabinet Door and Drawer Locks: Provide following locks for each cabinet drawer and door (where locks are indicated). Provide two keys for each lock, key each lock differently or key each group of locks differently as directed, master key system and provide two master keys. Finish: 626. 1. Hafele #235.

G. Gate Hardware: 1. Hinges: Bommer Spring Pivot, #7300 Series, #7400 Series or #7000 Series as required to match

existing conditions and per approved shop drawings. 2. Gate Latch: Unless otherwise indicated on drawings, provide Rockwood #602. 3. Silencers: Rockwood #608. 4. Door Guard: Rockwood #605. 5. Finish: 630 or 626.

H. Metal Supports for Built-in Adjustable Shelving without Shelf End Standards and with drilled slots: 1. KV #348 Gr.

I. Drawer Slides: Side-mounted, full-extension, zinc-plated steel drawer slides with steel ball bearings, rated for the following loads: 1. Box Drawer Slides Full Travel Up to 24 inch Wide: 100 lbs./pair capacity, steel ball bearings,

metal type, 1/2 inch side space. Detent-in and positive stop features. Finish to be selected. a. Accuride #7432 b. Equivalent by Hafele or KV.

2. File Drawer Up to 27 inch Wide: 150 lbs./pair capacity, over travel, steel ball bearings, metal type, 1/2 inch side space. Detent-in and positive stop features. Finish to be selected. a. Accuride #4032 b. Equivalent by Hafele or KV.

3. Pencil Drawer/Light Duty Drawer up to 16 inch Wide: 35 lb. Capacity, full extension, side mount. a. Accuride #2632, Bright electro-zinc b. Equivalent by Hafele or KV.

4. File Drawer up to 42 Inch Wide: 200 lbs./pair capacity, over travel, steel, rail mounted, ball bearings, metal type, 1/4 inch side space, positive stop out. a. Accuride #3640 Equivalent by Hafele or KV.

J. Grommets: Fabricated from plastic of sizes as required for miscellaneous cutout openings. Colors to be selected. 1. Hafele 429.93 or 429.99 of sizes and colors to be selected.

K. Door Bumper: Hafele 356.21.428 or acceptable equivalent.

L. Keyboard Tray: 1. Keyboard tray with adjustable plate: KV EZ Spec Series SD-3 or SD-4, integral keyboard tray

including palm rest includes mouse pad. Equivalent by Hafele.

M. Provide additional hardware as required to complete casework and cabinetwork of type as accepted by Architect-Engineer. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: Hafele; Sugatsune America, Inc.

N. For concealed hardware, provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product class requirements in BHMA A156.9 and per approved sample

O. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated.


1. Finish: 630, unless otherwise indicated.

P. Paper Slots: 12 inches long by 1-3/4 inches wide by 1 inch deep, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate from aluminum or stainless steel.

Q. Access Slots and Vent Slots: Provide custom stainless steel #4 finish, subject to Architect's review and acceptance.

R. Locks for Desks: Hafele #235.03.700. 626 finish.

S. Magnetic Touch Latch: Hafele No. 245.61 or acceptable equivalent. Finish to be selected.

T. Hinged Door Slide (Flipper Door): For up and under installation; custom to fit this application. Coordinate weight of door with stone and casework supplier. Modify hinged door slide according to manufacturer's recommendations. 1. Lamp #1F-102S or W or Accurite, Model Contractor113. Include necessary accessories for a

complete installation. Finish to be selected.

U. Shelf Slide: 130 lb. Load rating per pair. Clear zinc. 1. Accuride Model #301-2590.

2.7 FABRICATION

A. Interior Woodwork Grade: Unless otherwise indicated, provide interior woodwork complying with referenced quality standard.

B. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for wood moisture content in relation to ambient relative humidity during fabrication and in installation areas.

C. Sand fire-retardant-treated wood lightly to remove raised grain on exposed surfaces before fabrication.

D. Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges to radius indicated for the following: 1. Corners of Cabinets and Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members 3/4 Inch Thick or Less: 1/16

inch. 2. Edges of Rails and Similar Members More Than 3/4 Inch Thick: 1/8 inch. 3. Corners of Cabinets and Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members and Rails: 1/16 inch.

E. Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting.

F. Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs. 1. Seal edges of openings in countertops with a coat of varnish.

G. Wood Casework Cabinets for Transparent Finish: 1. Grade: Premium. 2. AWI Type of Cabinet Construction: Flush overlay unless otherwise indicated. 3. Wood Species and Cut for Exposed Surfaces: As specified herein.

a. Grain Direction: As indicated and per shop drawings. b. Matching of Veneer Leaves: As indicated and per shop drawings.

4. Semiexposed Surfaces: Provide surface materials indicated below: a. Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: High-pressure decorative laminate, NEMA LD 3, Grade

VGS. 1) Edges of Plastic-Laminate Shelves: High-Pressure decorative laminate, Grade VGS.


b. Drawer Sides and Backs: Solid-hardwood lumber. c. Drawer Bottoms: Hardwood plywood.

5. Dust Panels: 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) plywood above compartments and drawers unless located directly under tops.

6. Install ballistic armor in Judge's bench and where indicated in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and shop drawings. Coordinate with Section 134600.

H. Plastic Laminate Cabinets: 1. Grade: Custom. 2. AWI Type of Cabinet Construction: Flush overlay, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate complying with the

following requirements: a. Horizontal Surfaces Other Than Tops: Grade HGS. b. Postformed Surfaces: Grade HGP. c. Vertical Surfaces: Grade HGS. d. Edges: Grade HGS, matching laminate in color, pattern, and finish. e. Shelving, Exposed and Semiexposed: Grade HGL.

4. Materials for Semiexposed Surfaces: a. Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: High-pressure decorative laminate, NEMA LD 3, Grade

VGS. 1) Edges of Plastic-Laminate Shelves: High-Pressure decorative laminate, Grade VGS. 2) For semiexposed backs of panels with exposed plastic-laminate surfaces, provide surface

of high-pressure decorative laminate, NEMA LD 3, Grade VGS. b. Drawer Sides and Backs: Solid-hardwood lumber. c. Drawer Bottoms: Hardwood plywood.

5. Dust Panels: 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) plywood above compartments and drawers unless located directly under tops.

6. Concealed Backs of Panels with Exposed Plastic-Laminate Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate, NEMA LD 3, Grade BKL.

7. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: As indicated and as specified herein.

I. Plastic Laminate Countertops: Specified in Section 123600-Countertops.

J. Solid-Surfacing Material and Stone Countertops: Specified in Section 123600-Countertops.

K. Shop Finishing: 1. Grade: Premium. 2. General: Finish architectural woodwork at fabrication shop as specified in this Section. Defer

only final touchup, cleaning, and polishing until after installation. 3. Preparation for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling

countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishing architectural woodwork, as applicable to each unit of work. a. Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to concealed

surfaces of woodwork. Apply two coats to end-grain surfaces. Concealed surfaces of plastic-laminate-clad woodwork do not require backpriming when surfaced with decorative plastic laminate or backing paper.

4. Transparent Finish: a. Grade: Premium. b. Finish System: Water based stain and UV cured to comply with EPA Title 5 guidelines for

VOC emissions limitations. Finish must meet or exceed performance standards of TR-6 Catalyzed polyurethane.

c. Staining: To match Architect's sample. d. Sheen: 35 degrees.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing.

B. Verify location and sizes of utility rough-in associated with work of this section.

C. Before installation, condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Set and secure custom cabinets in place, assuring that they are rigid, plumb, and level.

B. Use fixture attachments in concealed locations for wall mounted components.

C. Use concealed joint fasteners to align and secure adjoining cabinet units and countertops.

D. Carefully scribe casework abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch. Do not use additional overlay trim for this purpose.

E. Secure cabinets to floor using appropriate angles and anchorages. Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware so center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated. 1. Install cabinets with no more than 1/8" in 96 inch sag, bow or other variation from a straight line. 2. Maintain veneer sequence matching of cabinets with transparent finish. 3. Fasten wall cabinets through back, bear top and bottom, at ends and not more than 16 inches o.c.

with No. 10 wafer head screws sized for 1 inch penetration into wood framing, blocking or hanging strips.

F. Securely anchor countertops by screwing through corner blocks of base cabinets or other supports into underside of countertop. Coordinate with Section 12 36 00 - Countertops. 1. Align adjacent solid surface material countertops and form seams to comply with manufacturer's

written recommendations using adhesive in color to match countertop. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches and clean entire surface.

2. Install countertops with no more than 1/8 inch in 96 inch sag, bow or other variation from a straight line.

3. Secure backsplashes to tops with concealed metal brackets at 16 inches o.c. and to walls with adhesive.

4. Caulk space between backsplash and wall with sealant.

G. Countersink anchorage devices at exposed locations. Conceal with solid wood plugs of species to match surrounding wood; finish flush with surrounding surfaces.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.

B. Adjust installed work.

C. Adjust moving or operating parts to function smoothly and correctly.

D. Clean woodwork on exposed and semi exposed surfaces. Touch up shop applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean casework, counters, shelves, hardware, fittings, and fixtures.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 07 21 29 - SPRAYED INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Cellulose insulation applied to underside of structure.

B. Surface sealer.


A. ASTM C 177 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded-Hot-Plate Apparatus; 2004.

B. ASTM C 739 - Standard Specification for Cellulosic Fiber Loose-Fill Thermal Insulation; 2008.

C. ASTM D1622 - Standard Test Method for Apparent Density of Rigid Cellular Plastics; 2008.

D. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2010.

E. ASTM E 136 - Standard Test Method for Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube Furnace At 750 Degrees C; 2009b.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide data on materials, describing insulation properties.

C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special attention.

D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that Products meet or exceed specified requirements.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section, with not less than three years of documented experience.

B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum five years of experience.

C. Products Specified by Flammability or Combustibility Criteria: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc.

1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Do not install insulation, sealer when ambient and surface temperatures are lower than 40 degrees F.

B. Maintain acceptable ambient and substrate surface temperatures prior to, during, and after installation of primer and insulation materials and overcoat.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Cellulose Fiber: 1. International Cellulose Corp; Product K13: www.spray-on.com. 2. ThermoCon, Inc; Product Thermocon Spray-on System: www.thermocon.com. 3. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

Broward County Courthouse SPRAYED INSULATION October 21, 2011 07 21 29 - 1 Addendum #6

Broward County Courthouse SPRAYED INSULATION October 21, 2011 07 21 29 - 2 Addendum #6

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Cellulose Fiber Insulation: ASTM C739; treated cellulose fiber, color as selected by Architect conforming to the following test requirements: 1. K factor: 0.22 K, when tested in accordance with ASTM C177. 2. Density: 2 lb/cu ft, when tested in accordance with ASTM D1622. 3. Moisture Absorption: Maximum 15 percent by weight. 4. Flame Spread and Smoke Developed Index: 10/0, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 5. Combustibility: Passing ASTM E136.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Primer: As required by insulation manufacturer.

B. Insulation Surface Sealer: Clear, latex base.

C. Overcoat: Cementitious type, spray applied; flame spread and smoke developed index of 25/50, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that surfaces are clean, dry, and free of matter that may inhibit adhesion.

B. Verify other work on and within spaces to be insulated is complete prior to application.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Mask and protect adjacent surfaces from overspray or damage.

B. Apply primer in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install insulation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install insulation to a uniform monolithic density without voids.

C. Install to achieve a thermal resistance R value of 12.

D. Apply overcoat to a uniform minimum thickness as recommended by the manufacturer. 1. Apply overcoat monolithically, without voids to fully cover insulation.


A. Independent agency field inspection will be provided under provisions of Section 01 40 00.

B. Inspection will include verification of insulation and sealer thickness and density.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Do not permit subsequent construction work to disturb applied insulation.

END OF SECTION

Broward County Courthouse JOINT SEALERS August 15October 21, 2011 07 90 05 - 1 BID SETAddendum #6

SECTION 07 90 05 - JOINT SEALERS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Sealants and joint backing.

B. Security sealant.

BC. Preformed compressible foam expansion joint sealers.

CD. Hollow gaskets.



B. Section 07 84 00 - Firestopping: Firestopping sealants.

C. Section 08 80 00 - Glazing: Glazing sealants and accessories.

D. Section 09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Acoustic sealant.


A. ASTM C 510 - Standard Test Method for Staining and Color Change of Single- or Multicomponent Joint Sealants, 2005.

B. ASTM C 518 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus; 2004.

C. ASTM C 834 - Standard Specification for Latex Sealants; 2010.

D. ASTM C 919 - Standard Practice for Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications; 2008.

E. ASTM C 920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2010.

F. ASTM C 1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants; 2009.

G. ASTM D 1056 - Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials--Sponge or Expanded Rubber; 2007.

H. ASTM E 330 - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 2002 (Reapproved 2010).

I. ASTM G 26 - Standard Practice for Operating Light-Exposure Apparatus (Xenon-Arc Type) with and without Water for Exposure of Nonmetallic Materials; 1996.

J. SCAQMD 1168 - South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1168; current edition; www.aqmd.gov.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Substrates: 1. M Type Substrates: Concrete, concrete masonry units, brick, mortar, natural stone. The term

"masonry" means brick, stone, and concrete masonry work. 2. G Type Substrates: Glass and transparent plastic glazing sheets. 3. A Type Substrates: Metal, porcelain, glazed tile and smooth plastics. 4. O Type Substrates: Wood, Unglazed tile; substrates not included under other categories.

1.5 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING

A. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Submit to joint-sealant manufacturers, for testing


indicated below, samples of materials that will contact or affect joint sealants. 1. Use ASTM C 1087 to determine whether priming and other specific joint preparation techniques are

required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of joint sealants to joint substrates. 2. Submit not fewer than eight pieces of each kind of material, including joint substrates, shims,

joint-sealant backings, secondary seals, and miscellaneous materials. 3. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work. 4. For materials failing tests, obtain joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions for corrective

measures including use of specially formulated primers. 5. Testing will not be required if joint-sealant manufacturers submit joint preparation data that are

based on previous testing, not older than 24 months, of sealant products for adhesion to, and compatibility with, joint substrates and other materials matching those submitted.

B. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Testing: Before installing sealants, field test their adhesion to Project joint substrates as follows: 1. Locate test joints where indicated on Project or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 2. Conduct field tests for each application indicated below:

a. Each kind of sealant and joint substrate indicated. 3. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when test joints will be erected. 4. Arrange for tests to take place with joint-sealant manufacturer's technical representative present.

a. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193 or Method A, Tail Procedure, in ASTM C 1521. 1) For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate separately; extend

cut along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite side. Repeat procedure for opposite side.

5. Report whether sealant failed to adhere to joint substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each kind of product and joint substrate. For sealants that fail adhesively, retest until satisfactory adhesion is obtained.

6. Evaluation of Preconstruction Field-Adhesion-Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing, in absence of other indications of noncompliance with requirements, will be considered satisfactory. Do not use sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing.

1.6 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide data indicating sealant chemical characteristics, with instructions for substrate preparation and installation.

C. Samples: Submit two samples, illustrating sealant colors for selection.

D. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From sealant manufacturer, indicating the following: 1. Materials forming joint substrates and joint-sealant backings have been tested for compatibility and

adhesion with joint sealants. 2. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation

needed for adhesion.

E. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Test Reports: Indicate which sealants and joint preparation methods resulted in optimum adhesion to joint substrates based on testing specified in "Preconstruction Testing" Article.

F. Field-Adhesion Test Reports: For each sealant application tested.

G. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From sealant manufacturer, indicating the following:

H. Certificates: For each sealant, provide manufacturer's certificate stating that the product complies with the specifications and is appropriate for the use it is being put to.


I. LEED Submittals: 1. Materials forming joint substrates and joint-sealant backings have been tested for compatibility and

adhesion with joint sealants. 2. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation

needed for adhesion. 3. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For sealants and sealant primers used inside the weatherproofing

system, including printed statement of VOC content.

J. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures.

K. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Test Reports: Indicate which sealants and joint preparation methods resulted in optimum adhesion to joint substrates based on testing specified in "Preconstruction Testing" Article.

L. Field-Adhesion Test Reports: For each sealant application tested.

M. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.


A. Maintain one copy of each referenced document covering installation requirements on site.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.

C. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum three years experience.

D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Meet with Owner, Architect, Manufacturer's representative, Installer, and installers whose work

interfaces with or affects roof specialties including installers of sealant materials and accessories. 2. Examine surface conditions for compliance with requirements, including compatibility to adjacent

materials.

1.8 MOCK-UP

A. Provide mock-up of sealant joints in conjunction with window under provisions of Section 01 40 00.

B. Construct mock-up with specified sealant types and with other components including windows, glazed aluminum curtain wall, precast concrete panels and metal wall panels.

C. Manufacturer's representative shall be required to review and approve installation of mock-up in writing indicating that the installed mock-up complies with the manufacturer's published installation guidelines.

D. Locate where directed.

E. Mock-up may not remain as part of the Work.

1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver materials in original containers or bundles with labels showing manufacturer, product name or designation, color, shelf life and installation instructions.


A. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the sealant manufacturer during and after installation.

1.11 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate the work with all sections referencing this section.


1.12 WARRANTY

A. See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.

B. Correct defective work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion.

C. Warranty: Include coverage for installed sealants and accessories which fail to achieve airtight seal, exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion, or do not cure. 1. Manufacturers of exterior silicone sealants shall provide a twenty (20) year warranty. 2. Manufacturers of exterior polyurethane sealants shall provide a five year warranty. 3. Manufacturers of preformed compressible foam expansion joint sealers shall provide a five year

warranty for installation and materials..

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Silicone Sealants: 1. Bostik Inc; Product ChemCalk 1200: www.bostik-us.com. 2. Pecora Corporation; Product 895: www.pecora.com. 3. BASF Construction Chemicals-Building Systems; Product Sonolastic 150: www.chemrex.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 61 00 – Basic Product Requirements.

B. Polyurethane Sealants: 1. Bostik Inc; Product Chem-Calk 900: www.bostik-us.com. 2. Pecora Corporation; Product Dynatrol I XL: www.pecora.com. 3. BASF Construction Chemicals-Building Systems; Product Sonolastic NP 1: www.chemrex.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 61 00 – Basic Product Requirements.

C. Acrylic Sealants (ASTM C 920): 1. Tremco Global Sealants; Product TremFlex 834: www.tremcosealants.com. 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 61 00 – Basic Product Requirements.

D. Butyl Sealants: 1. Bostik Inc; Product Chem-Calk 300: www.bostik-us.com. 2. Pecora Corporation; Product BC-158: www.pecora.com. 3. Substitutions: See Section 01 61 00 – Basic Product Requirements.

E. Acrylic Emulsion Latex Sealants: 1. Bostik Inc; Product Chem-Calk 600: www.bostik-us.com. 2. Pecora Corporation; Product AC-20: www.pecora.com. 3. BASF Construction Chemicals-Building Systems; Product Sonolac: www.chemrex.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 61 00 – Basic Product Requirements.

F. Exterior Elastomeric Silicone Sealants: 1. Dow Corning Corporation; Product 790: www.dowcorning.com. 2. Dow Corning Corporation; Product 795: www.dowcorning.com.

G. Preformed Compressible Foam Sealers: Water-based, 100% acrylic, impregnated expanding foam sealant with internal laminations of closed cell (EVA) foam. Material shall be 100% free of wax, wax compounds, asphalt or asphalt compounds. Joint movement capability of plus or minus 25% of nominal material width. 1. EMSEAL Joint Systems, Ltd; Product Backerseal: www.emseal.com. 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 61 00 – Basic Product Requirements.

H. Preformed Compressible Foam Sealers: Factory applied and cured silicone bellows weather facing with an open cell polyurethane foam infused with a water-based, non-drying acrylic dispersion. Material


shall be 100% free of wax, wax compounds, asphalt or asphalt compounds. Joint movement capability of plus or minus 50% of nominal material width. 1. EMSEAL Joint Systems, Ltd; Product Seismic Colorseal: www.emseal.com. 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 61 00 – Basic Product Requirements

2.2 SEALANTS

A. Sealants and Primers - General: Provide only products having lower volatile organic compound (VOC) content than required by South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1168, and that meet any modified requirements for LEED Credit EQ 4.1

B. General Purpose Exterior Sealant: Polyurethane; ASTM C 920, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses M, G, and A; single component. 1. Color: color as selected. 2. Applications: Use for:

a. Control, expansion, and soft joints in masonry. b. Joints between concrete and other materials. c. Joints between metal frames and other materials. d. Other exterior joints for which no other sealant is indicated.

C. General Purpose Exterior Sealant: Silicone; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, Uses NT, G, A and O; single component. 1. Color: color as selected. 2. Applications: Use for:

a. Control, expansion, and soft joints in concrete panels. b. Joints between metal wall panels and other materials. c. Joints between glazed curtain wall assemblies and other materials. d. Other exterior joints where painting over sealant is required.

D. Exterior Expansion Joint Sealer: Precompressed foam sealer; urethane with water-repellent; 1. Size as required to provide weathertight seal when installed. 2. Provide product recommended by manufacturer for traffic-bearing use. 3. Applications: Use for:

a. Exterior wall expansion joints. b. Parking deck joints.

E. General Purpose Interior Sealant: Acrylic emulsion latex; ASTM C 834, Type OP, Grade NS single component, paintable. 1. Color: Colors as selected. 2. Applications: Use for:

a. Interior wall and ceiling control joints. b. Joints between door and window frames and wall surfaces. c. Other interior joints for which no other type of sealant is indicated.

F. Bathtub/Tile Sealant: White silicone; ASTM C 920, Uses I, M and A; single component, mildew resistant. 1. Applications: Use for:

a. Joints between plumbing fixtures and floor and wall surfaces. b. Joints between kitchen and bath countertops and wall surfaces.

G. Acoustical Sealant: Acrylic sealant; ASTM C 920, Grade NS, Class 12-1/2, Uses M and A; single component, solvent release curing, non-skinning. 1. Applications: Use for concealed locations only:

a. Sealant bead between top stud runner and structure and between bottom stud track and floor.

H. Interior Floor Joint Sealant: Polyurethane, self-leveling; ASTM C 920, Grade P, Class 25, Uses T, M and A; single component.


1. Approved by manufacturer for wide joints up to 1-1/2 inches. 2. Color: Colors as selected. 3. Applications: Use for:

a. Expansion joints in floors.

I. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 920, Grade NS, Class 12-1/2, Uses NT, M, A, G, O; single component, solvent release, non-skinning, non-sagging. 1. Color: Colors as selected. 2. Movement Capability: Plus and minus 12-1/2 percent. 3. Service Temperature Range: -13 to 180 degrees F. 4. Shore A Hardness Range: 10 to 30. 5. Applications: Use for:

a. Control, expansion and soft joints in masonry and concrete. b. Joints between concrete and other materials.

J. Nonsag Polyurethane Sealant: ASTM C 920, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses NT, I, M, A, G, O; single component, chemical curing, non-staining, non bleeding, capable of continuous water immersion, non-sagging type. 1. Color: Standard colors matching finished surfaces. 2. Movement Capability: Plus and minus 25 percent. 3. Service Temperature Range: -40 to 180 degrees F. 4. Shore A Hardness Range: 20 to 35.

K. Silicone Sealant: ASTM C 920, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses NT, A, G, M, O; single component, solvent curing, non-sagging, non-staining, fungus resistant, non-bleeding. 1. Color: Standard colors matching finished surfaces. 2. Movement Capability: Plus and minus 25 percent. 3. Service Temperature Range: -65 to 180 degrees F. 4. Shore A Hardness Range: 15 to 35.

L. Security Sealant: Manufacturer's standard, high-modulus, nonsag, two-part, pick-proof, epoxy sealant recommended for sealing nonmoving interior joints in security applications. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers:

a. Degussa Building Systems; Sonneborn EpoGel. b. Pecora Corporation; DynaPoxy EP-1200.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Primer: Non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application.

B. Joint Cleaner: Non-corrosive and non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer; compatible with joint forming materials.

C. Joint Backing: Round foam rod compatible with sealant; ASTM D 1056, sponge or expanded rubber; oversized 30 to 50 percent larger than joint width.

D. Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive polyethylene tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work.

B. Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant.

3.2 PREPARATION


A. Remove loose materials and foreign matter that could impair adhesion of sealant.

B. Clean and prime joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

C. Perform preparation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ASTM C 1193.

D. Protect elements surrounding the work of this section from damage or disfigurement.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Perform work in accordance with sealant manufacturer's requirements for preparation of surfaces and material installation instructions.

B. Perform installation in accordance with ASTM C 1193.

C. Perform acoustical sealant application work in accordance with ASTM C 919.

D. Measure joint dimensions and size joint backers to achieve width-to-depth ratio, neck dimension, and surface bond area as recommended by manufacturer, except where specific dimensions are indicated.

E. Install bond breaker where joint backing is not used.

F. Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags.

G. Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges.

H. Tool joints concave.

I. Precompressed Foam Sealant: Do not stretch; avoid joints except at corners, ends, and intersections; install with face 1/8 to 1/4 inch below adjoining surface.


A. Field-Adhesion Testing: Field test joint-sealant adhesion to joint substrates as follows: 1. Extent of Testing: Test completed and cured sealant joints as follows:

a. Perform 10 tests for the first 1000 feet of joint length for each kind of sealant and joint substrate.

2. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193 or Method A, Tail Procedure, in ASTM C 1521. a. For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate separately; extend cut

along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite side. Repeat procedure for opposite side. 3. Inspect tested joints and report on the following:

a. Whether sealants filled joint cavities and are free of voids. b. Whether sealant dimensions and configurations comply with specified requirements. c. Whether sealants in joints connected to pulled-out portion failed to adhere to joint substrates or

tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each kind of product and joint substrate. Compare these results to determine if adhesion passes sealant manufacturer's field-adhesion hand-pull test criteria.

4. Record test results in a field-adhesion-test log. Include dates when sealants were installed, names of persons who installed sealants, test dates, test locations, whether joints were primed, adhesion results and percent elongations, sealant fill, sealant configuration, and sealant dimensions.

5. Repair sealants pulled from test area by applying new sealants following same procedures used originally to seal joints. Ensure that original sealant surfaces are clean and that new sealant contacts original sealant.

B. Evaluation of Field-Adhesion Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing or noncompliance with other indicated requirements will be considered satisfactory. Remove sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing or to comply with other requirements. Retest failed applications until test results prove sealants comply with indicated requirements.


3.5 CLEANING

A. Clean adjacent soiled surfaces.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect sealants until cured.

B. Remove and replace damaged sealers.

END OF SECTION

Broward County Courthouse TILING August 15October 21, 2011 09 30 00 - 1 BID SETAddendum #6

SECTION 09 30 00 - TILING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Tile for floor applications.

B. Tile for wall applications.

C. Non-ceramic trim and accessories.



B. Section 07 14 00 - Fluid-Applied Waterproofing.

C. Section 07 90 05 - Joint Sealers.

D. Section 09 24 00 - Portland Cement Plastering: Lath and Portland cement scratch coat and membrane, where required by The Tile Council of North America Method specified.

E. Section 09 21 16 - Gypsum Board for Cementitious Backer Board.


A. ANSI/ASSE A10.20 - Safe Operating Practices for Tile, Terrazzo, and Marble Work (2006).

B. ANSI A108 Series/A118 Series/A136.1 - American National Standard Specifications for the Installation of Ceramic Tile (Compendium); 2005. 1. ANSI A108.1a - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile in the

Wet-Set Method, with Portland Cement Mortar; 2005. 2. ANSI A108.1b - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile on a

Cured Portland Cement Mortar Setting Bed with Dry-Set or Latex Portland Cement Mortar; 1999 (R2005).

3. ANSI A108.1c - Specifications for Contractors Option: Installation of Ceramic Tile in the Wet-Set Method with Portland Cement Mortar or Installation of Ceramic Tile on a Cured Portland Cement Mortar Bed with Dry-Set or Latex Portland Cement Mortar; 1999 (R2005).

4. ANSI A108.4 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with Organic Adhesives or Water Cleanable Tile-Setting Epoxy Adhesive; 1999 (R2005).

5. ANSI A108.5 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar or Latex-Portland Cement Mortar; 1999 (R2005).

6. ANSI A108.6 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with Chemical Resistant, Water Cleanable Tile-Setting and -Grouting Epoxy; 1999 (R2005).

7. ANSI A108.8 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with Chemical Resistant Furan Resin Mortar and Grout; 1999 (R2005).

8. ANSI A108.9 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with Modified Epoxy Emulsion Mortar/Grout; 1999 (R2005).

9. ANSI A108.10 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Grout in Tilework; 1999 (R2005).

10. ANSI A118.7 - American National Standard Specifications for Polymer Modified Cement Grouts for Tile Installation; 1999 (R2005).

C. ASTM C 847 - Standard Specification for Metal Lath; 2010.

D. TCNA (HB) - Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation; 2010.


1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide manufacturers' data sheets on tile, mortar, grout, and accessories. Include instructions for using grouts and adhesives.

C. Master Grade Certificates: For each shipment, type, and composition of tile, signed by tile manufacturer and Installer.

D. Shop Drawings: Indicate tile layout, patterns, color arrangement, perimeter conditions, junctions with dissimilar materials, control and expansion joints, ceramic accessories, and setting details and metal edge strips.

E. Samples: Mount tile and apply grout on two plywood panels, minimum 18 x 18 inches in size illustrating patterns, color variations, and grout joint size variations.

F. Full-size units of each type of trim and accessory for each color and finish required.

G. Stone thresholds in 6-inch (150-mm) lengths.

H. Metal edge strips in 6-inch (150-mm) lengths.

I. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.

J. Qualification Data: For Installer.

K. Maintenance Data: Include recommended cleaning methods, cleaning materials, stain removal methods, and polishes and waxes.

L. LEED Submittal: Documentation of recycled content and location of manufacture. 1. Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.1: For adhesives and sealants, documentation including printed

statement of VOC content. 2. Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.3: For adhesives and grouts, documentation including printed

statement of VOC content. 3. Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.3: For tile floors, documentation from an independent testing

agency indicating compliance with the FloorScore Standard. 4. Product Data for Credit MR 4: For products having recycled content, documentation indicating

percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content. Include statement indicating cost for each product having recycled content.

5. Submit applicable LEED Submittal Form for each different product or component which has been extracted, recovered, or manufactured within 500 miles of the project site.

M. Material Test Reports: For each tile setting and grouting product.


A. Maintain one copy of The Tile Council of North America Handbook and ANSI A108 Series/A118 Series on site.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the types of products specified in this section, with minimum 5 years of documented experience.

C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing tile installation, with minimum of 5 years of documented experience.

D. Obtain tile from same production run and of consistent quality and appearance and physical properties from one source or producer for each contiguous area.

E. Obtain setting and grouting materials of uniform quality for each mortar, adhesive, and grout component from a single manufacturer and each aggregate from one source or producer.


F. Obtain other products specified in this Section through one source from a single manufacturer for each product including: 1. Thresholds 2. Waterproofing. 3. Metal Edge Strips.

1.6 MOCK-UP

A. See Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements, for general requirements for mock-up.

B. Construct tile mock-up of each type of wall and floor tile where directed, incorporating all components specified for the location. 1. Minimum size of mock-up, 48" x 48". Provide full size mock-up of CT5, CT6 and CT7 pattern as

indicated on drawings 9/A5.1.51. 2. Mock-up Review: Two weeks before starting work. 32. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial

Completion.

1.7 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Static Coefficient of Friction: For tile installed on walkway surfaces, provide products with the following values as determined by testing identical products per ATM C 1028: 1. Level Surfaces: Minimum 0.6.


A. Convene one week before starting work of this section.


A. Maintain ambient and substrate temperature of 50 degrees F during installation of mortar materials. Do not install tile until construction in spaces is complete and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at levels specified.

1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Provide 3 percent of each size, color, and surface finish of tile abd trim as specified/indicated.

B. Grout: Furnish quantity of grout equal to 3 percent of amount installed for each type, composition, and color indicated.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide tile that complies with ANSI A137.1 for types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated. 1. Provide tile complying with Standard grade requirements unless otherwise indicated.

B. FloorScore Compliance: Tile for floors shall comply with requirements of FloorScore Standard.

C. Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within ranges, blend tile in factory and package so tile units taken from one package show same range in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples.

D. Factory-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: Where indicated under tile type, protect exposed surfaces of tile against adherence of mortar and grout by precoating with continuous film of petroleum paraffin wax, applied hot. Do not coat unexposed tile surfaces.


2.2 TILE

A. Porcelain Floor Tile Type CT-3 and CT-4: ANSI A137.1 and as follows: 1. Composition: Porcelain. 2. Basis of Design Products: As indicated in the Interior Finish Schedule included on the drawings. 3. CT-3: Coefficient of Friction: 0.6 wet; 0.7 dry. 4. CT-4 Coefficient of Friction: 0.6 wet; 0.8 dry.

B. CeramicWall and Porcelain Wall Tile Type CT-1, CT-2, CT-5, CT-6, CT-7: ANSI A137.1 and as follows: 1. Basis of Design Products: As indicated in the Interior Finish Schedule included on the drawings. 2. Size and Shape: As scheduled. 3. Trim Units: Matching bead, cove, surface bullnose and metal trim shapes in sizes coordinated with

field tile, and as indicated on the shop drawings.

C. Ceramic Tile Base Type CTB-1 and CTB-2: ANSI A137.1, and as follows: 1. Composition: Ceramic. 2. Basis of Design Product: As indicated in the Interior Finish Schedule included on the drawings.

D. Glass Mosaic Wall Tile GMT-1 and GMT-2: 1. Basis of Design Product and Installation Method: As indicated in the Interior Finish Schedule

included on the drawings or acceptable equivalent by the following manufacturers: a. TREND Group USA: www.trendgroup-usa.com. b. Design District: www.designdistrictgroup.com.

2.3 GLASS WALL TILE

A. Glass Tile GT-1. 1. Basis of Design Product: As indicated in the Interior Finish Schedule included on the drawings.

2.4 TRIM AND ACCESSORIES

A. Non-Ceramic Trim: Finish as indicated, style and dimensions as indicated on drawings. 1. Metal Cove Base - Type MT-1:

a. Basis of Design Manufacturer: Schluter-Systems: www.schluter.com. 1) Style Profile: 2) Finish: Brushed Stainless Steel.

2. Metal Base - Type MT-2: a. Basis of Design Product: Fry-Reglet: www.fryreglet.com.

1) Style Profile: As indicated in Interior Finish Schedule. 2) Finish: Aluminum with chemical conversion coating.

13. Edge Protection and Transition Profiles for Floors - MT-7: a. Basis of Design Product: Schluter-Systems: www.schluter.com or acceptable equivalent by

Blanke or Butech: www.porcelanosa-usa.com.. 1) Style Profile: As indicated in Interior Finish Schedule. 2) Finish: Brushed Stainless Steel.

24. Applications: Use in the following locations: a. Open edges of floor tile. b. Transition between floor finishes of different heights. c. Thresholds at door openings. d. Floor to wall joints. e. As indicated on the drawings.

2.5 SETTING MATERIALS

A. Manufacturers: 1. Bonsal American, Inc: www.sakrete.com 2. Bostik Inc: www.bostik-us.com.

http://www.schluter.com/�


3. Custom Building Products. 4. Jamo Inc. 5. Laticrete International, Inc. 6. MAPEI Corporation. 7. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc. 8. Summitville Tiles, Inc. 9. TEC; a subsidiary of H. B. Fuller Company. 10. Substitutions: See Section 01 61 00 – Basic Product Requirements.

B. Mortar Bed (Thickset) Materials: Portland cement, sand, latex additive and water as per ANSI A108.02.

C. Latex Additive: acrylic resin or styrene-butadiene-rubber water emulsion, serving as replacement for part or all of gaging water, of type specifically recommended by latex-additive manufacturer for use with field-mixed portland cement and aggregate mortar bed.

D. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI A118.4. 1. Manufacturers:

a. Bonsal American, Inc: www.sakrete.com b. Bostik Inc: www.bostik-us.com. c. Custom Building Products. d. Jamo Inc. e. Laticrete International, Inc. f. MAPEI Corporation. g. Summitville Tiles, Inc.

2. Provide prepackaged, dry-mortar mix containing dry, redispersible, vinyl acetate or acrylic additive to which only water must be added at Project site.

3. For wall applications, provide mortar that complies with requirements for nonsagging mortar in addition to the other requirements in ANSI A118.4.

E. Medium-Bed, Latex-Portland Cement Mortar: Comply with requirements in ANSI A118.4. Provide product that is approved by manufacturer for application thickness of 5/8 inch. 1. Manufacturers:


2. Provide prepackaged, dry-mortar mix containing dry, redispersible, vinyl acetate or acrylic additive to which only water must be added at Project site.

2.6 GROUT MATERIALS

A. Manufacturers: 1. Bonsal American, Inc: www.sakrete.com 2. Bostik Inc: www.bostik-us.com. 3. Custom Building Products. 4. Jamo Inc. 5. Laticrete International, Inc. 6. MAPEI Corporation. 7. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc. 8. Summitville Tiles, Inc. 9. TEC; a subsidiary of H. B. Fuller Company. 10. Summitville Tiles, Inc.; www.summitvilletiles.com. 11. Substitutions: See Section 01 61 00 – Basic Product Requirements.


B. Standard Grout: Polymer modified cement grout, sanded or unsanded, as specified in ANSI A118.7. 1. Colors: As scheduled.

C. Water-Cleanable Epoxy Grout: ANSI A118.3, with a VOC content of 65 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D. 1. Manufacturers:


2.7 WATERPROOF AND CRACK ISOLATION MEMBRANES

A. General: Manufacturer's standard product that complies with ANSI A118.10 and/or ANSI A118.12 and that is recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated. Include reinforcement and accessories recommended by manufacturer.

B. Chlorinated Polyethylene Sheet Waterproofing for application under thickset mortar bed: Nonplasticized, chlorinated polyethylene faced on both sides with nonwoven polyester fabric; 0.030-inch nominal thickness. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:

a. Noble Company (The); Nobleseal TS.

C. Chlorinated Polyethylene Sheet Waterproofing and Crack Isolation Membrane for application under thin set tile: Nonplasticized, chlorinated polyethylene faced on both sides with nonwoven polyester fabric; 0.030-inch nominal thickness. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:

a. Noble Company (The); Nobleseal CIS.

D. Fluid-Applied Crack Isolation Membrane: Liquid-latex rubber or elastomeric polymer. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:

a. Custom Building Products; FractureFree Crack Prevention Membrane or Semco Crack Prevention Membrane.

2.8 ACCESSORY MATERIALS

A. Cleavage Membrane: 4 mil thick polyethylene film.

B. Reinforcing Mesh: 2 x 2 inch size weave of 16/16 wire size; welded fabric, galvanized.

C. Metal Lath: ASTM C 847, Flat diamond mesh, of weight to suit application, galvanized finish.

D. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile setting materials for installations indicated.

E. Sealant: Provide sealants, primers, backer rods, and other sealant accessories that comply with the following requirements and with the applicable requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

F. Metal Edge Strips: Angle or L-shape, height to match tile and setting-bed thickness, metallic, designed specifically for flooring applications; stainless-steel, ASTM A 666, 300 Series exposed-edge material.

G. Tile Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming tile and grout surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by tile and grout manufacturers.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm, dry, clean, free of coatings that are incompatible with tile-setting materials including curing compounds and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone; and comply with flatness tolerances required by ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated.

B. Verify that concrete substrates for tile floors installed with bonded mortar bed or thin-set mortar comply with surface finish requirements in ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated. 1. Verify that surfaces that received a steel trowel finish have been mechanically scarified. 2. Verify that protrusions, bumps, and ridges have been removed by sanding or grinding.

C. Verify that concrete sub-floor surfaces are ready for tile installation by testing for moisture emission rate and alkalinity; obtain instructions if test results are not within the following limits: 1. Moisture emission rate: Not greater than 3 lb per 1000 sq ft per 24 hours when tested using

calcium chloride moisture test kit for 72 hours. 2. Alkalinity: pH range of 5-9.

D. Verify that required floor-mounted utilities are in correct location.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Protect surrounding work from damage.

B. Vacuum clean surfaces and damp clean.

C. Seal substrate surface cracks with filler. Level existing substrate surfaces to acceptable flatness tolerances.

D. Where indicated, prepare substrates to receive waterproofing by applying a reinforced mortar bed that complies with ANSI A108.1A and is sloped 1/4 inch per foot (1:50) toward drains.

3.3 INSTALLATION - GENERAL

A. Install tile and grout in accordance with applicable requirements of ANSI A108.1 through A108, manufacturer's instructions, and TCNA Handbook recommendations.

B. Follow procedures in the ANSI A108 Series of tile installation standards for providing 95 percent mortar coverage for all tile work.

C. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete covering without interruptions unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.

D. Provide manufacturer's standard trim shapes where necessary to eliminate exposed tile edges.

E. Joint Widths: Unless otherwise indicated, install tile with the following joint widths: 1. Ceramic Tile and Porcelain Tile: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), unless otherwise recommended by tile

manufacturer and per mockup. 2. Glazed Wall Tile: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm).

F. Lay out tile wainscots to dimensions indicated or to next full tile beyond dimensions indicated.

G. Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including control, contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated and where required by TCNA EJ171. Form joints during installation of setting materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after installing tiles. 1. Where joints occur in concrete substrates, locate joints in tile surfaces directly above them. 2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Section 079200 - "Joint Sealants."

H. Glass Mosaic Tile: Comply with Glass mosaic tile published manufacturer's recommendations for


required back up material setting bed and grout materials and installation. Comply with TCNA for general recommendations and requirements for expansion and contraction joints.

I. Metal Edge Strips: Install where exposed edge of tile flooring meets carpet, or other flooring that finishes flush with or below top of tile and no threshold is indicated.

J. Lay tile to pattern indicated. Do not interrupt tile pattern through openings.

K. Cut and fit tile to penetrations through tile, leaving sealant joint space. Form corners and bases neatly. Align floor joints.

L. Place tile joints uniform in width, subject to variance in tolerance allowed in tile size. Make joints watertight, without voids, cracks, excess mortar, or excess grout.

M. Form internal angles square and external angles bullnosed.

N. Sound tile after setting. Replace hollow sounding units.

O. Allow tile to set for a minimum of 48 hours prior to grouting.

P. Grout tile joints. Use standard grout unless otherwise indicated.

Q. Apply sealant to junction of tile and dissimilar materials and junction of dissimilar planes.

3.4 WATERPROOFING INSTALLATION

A. Install waterproofing to comply with ANSI A108.13 and manufacturer's written instructions to produce waterproof membrane of uniform thickness and bonded securely to substrate.

B. Do not install tile or setting materials over waterproofing until waterproofing has cured and been tested to determine that it is watertight.

3.5 CRACK ISOLATION MEMBRANE INSTALLATION

A. Install crack isolation membrane to comply with ANSI A108.17 and manufacturer's written instructions to produce membrane of uniform thickness and bonded securely to substrate.

B. Do not install tile or setting materials over crack isolation membrane until membrane has cured.

3.6 INSTALLATION - FLOORS - THIN-SET METHODS

A. Over interior concrete substrates, install in accordance with TCNA Handbook Method latex-portland cement bond coat, with standard grout, unless otherwise indicated where tile 8 x 8 inch or larger is indicated, install tile over medium bed-latex mortar. 1. Where waterproofing membrane is indicated, install in accordance with TCA Handbook Method

F122, with latex-portland cement grout or medium bed latex mortar for tiles 8 x 8 inches or larger..

B. Metal Edge Strips: Install at locations indicated or where exposed edge of tile flooring meets carpet, wood, or other flooring that finishes with flush with top of tile.

3.7 INSTALLATION FLOOR CEMENT MORTAR BED METHOD

A. Interior Floor Installations, Concrete Subfloor: 1. Tile Installation F111: Cement mortar bed (thickset) with cleavage membrane; TCA F111 and

ANSI A108.1 for over structural floors subject to bending and deflection. a. Thin-Set Mortar for Cured-Bed Method: Medium-bed, latex portland cement mortar. b. Grout: Standard grout.

3.8 INSTALLATION - WALL TILE

A. Over cementitious backer units on studs, install in accordance with The Tile Council of North America Handbook Method W244, using membrane at shower areas.


B. Over gypsum wallboard on wood or metal studs install in accordance with The Tile Council of North America Handbook Method W243, thin-set with dry-set or latex-portland cement bond coat, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Where mortar bed is indicated, install in accordance with The Tile Council of North America

Handbook Method W222, one coat method.

C. Over interior concrete and masonry install in accordance with The Tile Council of North America Handbook Method W201, cement mortar method.

3.9 CLEANING

A. On completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are free of foreign matter. 1. Remove latex-portland cement grout residue from tile as soon as possible. 2. Clean grout smears and haze from tile according to tile and grout manufacturer's written

instructions, but no sooner than 10 days after installation. Use only cleaners recommended by tile and grout manufacturers and only after determining that cleaners are safe to use by testing on samples of tile and other surfaces to be cleaned. Protect metal surfaces and plumbing fixtures from effects of cleaning. Flush surfaces with clean water before and after cleaning.

B. When recommended by tile manufacturer, apply coat of neutral protective cleaner to completed tile walls and floors. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy covering during construction period to percent staining, damage and wear.

C. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least seven days after grouting is completed.

D. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral cleaner from tile surfaces.

3.10 PROTECTION

A. Do not permit traffic over finished floor surface for 4 days after installation.

END OF SECTION

Broward County Courthouse RESILIENT FLOORING August 15October 21, 2011 09 65 00 - 1 BID SETAddendum #6

SECTION 09 65 00 - RESILIENT FLOORING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Resilient tile flooring.

B. Resilient base.

C. Installation accessories.



B. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Restrictions on curing compounds for concrete slabs and floors.


A. ASTM E 648 - Standard Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor-Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source; 2009a.

B. ASTM F 710 - Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring; 2008.

C. ASTM F 1861 - Standard Specification for Resilient Wall Base; 2008.

D. BAAQMD 8-51 - Bay Area Air Quality Management District Regulation 8, Rule 51, Adhesive and Sealant Products; www.baaqmd.gov; 2002.

E. RFCI - Recommended Work Practices for Removal of Resilient Floor Coverings; Resilient Floor Covering Institute; 1998.

F. SCAQMD 1168 - South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1168; current edition; www.aqmd.gov.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide data on specified products, describing physical and performance characteristics; including sizes, patterns and colors available; and installation instructions.

C. Shop Drawings: For each type of floor tile. Include floor tile layouts, edges, columns, doorways, enclosing partitions, built-in furniture, cabinets, and cutouts. 1. Show details of special patterns.

D. Seam Samples: For seamless-installation technique indicated and for each flooring product, color, and pattern required; with seam running lengthwise and in center of 6-by-9-inch. Sample applied to a rigid backing and prepared by Installer for this Project.

E. Product Schedule: For floor tile. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.

F. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

G. Shop Drawings: Indicate seaming plan.

H. Verification Samples: Submit two samplesof each type of tile indicated, illustrating color and pattern for each resilient flooring product specified. Submit two 16 inch samples of each base indicated, including accessories. Submit two 12 inch samples of each metal edge strip.

I. Concrete Testing Standard: Submit a copy of ASTM F 710.


J. Certification: Prior to installation of flooring, submit written certification by flooring manufacturer and adhesive manufacturer that condition of sub-floor is acceptable.

K. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

L. Maintenance Data: Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials, and suggested schedule for cleaning, stripping, and re-waxing.

M. LEED Submittal: Documentation of recycled content and location of manufacture. 1. Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.1: For adhesives sealants and chemical-bonding compounds,

documentation including printed statement of VOC content. 2. Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.3: For adhesives and chemical-bonding compounds, documentation

including printed statement of VOC content. 3. Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.3: For resilient tile flooring, documentation from an independent

testing agency indicating compliance with the FloorScore Standard. 4. Product Data for Credit MR 4: For products having recycled content, documentation indicating

percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content.


A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs workers for this Project who are competent in techniques required by manufacturer for floor tile installation and seaming method indicated. 1. Engage an installer who employs workers for this Project who are trained or certified by

manufacturer for installation techniques required.

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency. 1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.

C. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Build mockups for each floor tile required including resilient base and accessories.

a. Size: Minimum 100 sq. ft. for each type, color, and pattern in locations directed by Architect.


A. Store floor tile and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) or more than 90 deg F (32 deg C). Store floor tiles on flat surfaces.


A. Maintain temperature in storage area between 55 degrees F and 90 degrees F.

B. Store materials for not less than 48 hours prior to installation in area of installation at a temperature of 70 degrees F to achieve temperature stability. Thereafter, maintain conditions above 55 degrees F.

1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. See Section 01 61 00 - Basic Product Requirements, for additional provisions.

B. Provide 2 percent of flooring, 5 percent of base, and 5 percent of installed stair materials of each type and color specified.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. FloorScore Compliance: Resilient tile flooring shall comply with requirements of FloorScore Standard.


2.2 TILE FLOORING

A. Linoleum Tile (RF-1, RF-2 and RF-3): Homogeneous wear layer bonded to backing, with color and pattern through wear layer thickness: 1. Basis of Design Manufacturer/Product/Style/Size/Color: As inidcated in "Interior Finish Schedule"

included on the drawings. Other acceptable manufacturers: Johnsonite: www.johnsonite.com. a. Description: Homogeneous tile of primarily natural materials consisting of linseed oil, wood

flour, and rosin binders, mixed and calendered onto a polyester backing. Pattern and color shall extend throughout total thickness of tile material.

b. Adhesive: Forbo Flooring, Inc., T 940 adhesive. c. Heat Welding Rod: Forbo Flooring, Inc., Marmoweld color-matched welding rod.

2.3 RESILIENT BASE

A. Resilient Base (RB-1 and RB-2 and RB-3): ASTM F 1861, Type TP, rubber, thermoplastic; Group 1, smooth surface and as follows: 1. Critical Radiant Flux (CRF): Minimum 0.45 watt per square centimeter, when tested in accordance

with ASTM E 648. 2. Height: As indicated on the drawings. 3. Thickness: 0.125 inch thick. 4. Style: Straight, where flooring is carpet; Cove where flooring other than carpet is indicated 5. Length: As indicated on the drawings. 6. Color: As indicated on the drawings. 7. Accessories: Premolded external corners, internal corners, and end stops. 8. Basis of Design Product: As inidcated in "Interior Finish Schedule" included on the drawings. 9. Other Acceptable Manufacturers:

a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.: www.armstrong.com. b. Burke Flooring: www.burkemercer.com. c. Roppe Corp: www.roppe.com. d. Substitutions: See Section 01 61 00 - Basic Product Requirements.

2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. Subfloor Filler: White premix latex; type recommended by adhesive material manufacturer.

B. Primers, Adhesives, and Seaming Materials: Waterproof; types recommended by flooring manufacturer. 1. Provide only products having lower volatile organic compound (VOC) content than required by the

more stringent of the South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1168 and the Bay Area Air Quality Management District Regulation 8, Rule 51.

C. Metal Edge Strips: Stainless steel ASTM A 666, 300 Series exposed-edge material. Width and configuration shown, of height required to protect exposed edges of tiles, and in maximum available lengths to minimize running joints.

D. Heat-Welding Bead: Solid strand product of floor covering manufacturer, color to match floor covering.

E. Filler for Coved Base: Plastic.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work and are ready to receive resilient flooring.

B. Verify that wall surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work, are dust-free, and are ready to receive resilient base.

C. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are dust-free and free of substances that could impair bonding of adhesive


materials to sub-floor surfaces.

D. Verify that concrete sub-floor surfaces are dry enough and ready for resilient flooring installation by testing for moisture emission rate and alkalinity in accordance with ASTM F 710; obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by resilient flooring manufacturer and adhesive materials manufacturer.

E. Verify that required floor-mounted utilities are in correct location.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare sub-floor surfaces as recommended by flooring and adhesive manufacturers.

B. Remove sub-floor ridges and bumps. Fill minor low spots, cracks, joints, holes, and other defects with sub-floor filler to achieve smooth, flat, hard surface.

C. Prohibit traffic until filler is cured.

D. Clean substrate.

E. Apply primer as required to prevent "bleed-through" or interference with adhesion by substances that cannot be removed.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Starting installation constitutes acceptance of sub-floor conditions.

B. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

C. Spread only enough adhesive to permit installation of materials before initial set.

D. Fit joints tightly.

E. Set flooring in place, press with heavy roller to attain full adhesion.

F. Where type of floor finish, pattern, or color are different on opposite sides of door, terminate flooring under centerline of door.

G. Install edge strips at unprotected or exposed edges, where flooring terminates, and where indicated.

H. Scribe flooring to walls, columns, cabinets, floor outlets, and other appurtenances to produce tight joints.

3.4 TILE FLOORING

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Mix tile from container to ensure shade variations are consistent when tile is placed, unless manufacturer's instructions say otherwise.

C. Spread only enough adhesive to permit installation of materials before initial set.

D. Set flooring in place, press with heavy roller to attain full adhesion.

E. Lay flooring with joints and seams parallel to building lines to produce symmetrical tile pattern.

F. Where floor finishes are different on opposite sides of door, terminate flooring under centerline of door.

G. Install edge strips at unprotected or exposed edges, where flooring terminates, and where indicated. After installation of flooring, secure metal strips with stainless steel screws.

H. Scribe flooring to walls, columns, cabinets, floor outlets, and other appurtenances to produce tight joints.

I. Install flooring in recessed floor access covers. Maintain floor pattern.

J. Install feature strips and floor markings where indicated. Fit joints tightly.


3.5 RESILIENT BASE

A. Fit joints tightly and make vertical. Maintain minimum dimension of 18 inches between joints.

B. Miter internal corners. At external corners, use premolded units. At exposed ends, use premolded units.

C. Install base on solid backing. Bond tightly to wall and floor surfaces.

D. Scribe and fit to door frames and other interruptions.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Remove excess adhesive from floor, base, and wall surfaces without damage.

B. Clean in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

C. Clean, seal, and wax resilient flooring products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Prohibit traffic on resilient flooring for 48 hours after installation.

END OF SECTION

Broward County Courthouse RESINOUS MATRIX TERRAZZO FLOORING October 1212, 2011 09 66 23 - 1 Addendum #56

SECTION 09 66 23 - RESINOUS MATRIX TERRAZZO FLOORING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Epoxy matrix terrazzo floor and base.


A. Section 01 81 13.13 - Sustainable Design Requirements

B. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete subfloor with wood float finish.

C. Section 05 51 00 - Metal Stairs: Formed steel stair pans.

D. Section 07 95 13 - Expansion Joint Cover Assemblies: Building expansion joint covers.

E. Section 07 90 05 - Joint Sealers: Joint between terrazzo base and wall surface.

F. Section 12 48 13 - Entrance Floor Mats and Frames: Product requirements for recessed floor mat frames installed under this section.


A. NTMA (SPECS) - Terrazzo Specifications; The National Terrazzo and Mosaic Association, Inc.; current edition located at www.ntma.com.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide data for divider strips, control joint strips, expansion joints, and sealer; include printed copy of current NTMA recommendations for type of terrazzo involved.

C. LEED Submittal: Documentation of recycled content and location of manufacture. 1. Product Data for Credit MR 4: For products having recycled content, documentation indicating


2. Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.1: For adhesives, documentation including printed statement of VOC content.

3. Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.3: For sealers, documentation including printed statement of VOC content.

4. Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.3: For terrazzo flooring, documentation from an independent testing agency indicating compliance with the FloorScore Standard.

D. Shop Drawings: Include terrazzo installation requirements. Include plans, elevations, sections, component details, and attachments to other work. Show layout of the following: 1. Divider strips. 2. Control-joint strips. 3. Accessory strips. 4. Abrasive strips. 5. Precast terrazzo jointing and edge configurations. 6. Terrazzo patterns.

E. Samples for Verification: For each type, material, color, and pattern of terrazzo and accessory required showing the full range of color, texture, and pattern variations expected. Label each terrazzo sample to identify manufacturer's matrix color and aggregate types, sizes, and proportions. Prepare Samples of same thickness and from same material to be used for the Work, in size indicated below: 1. Terrazzo: 6-inch- square Samples.


2. Precast Terrazzo: 6-inch- (150-mm-) square Samples. 3. Accessories: 6-inch- (150-mm-) long Samples of each exposed strip item required.

F. Qualification Data: For Installer.

G. Material Certificates: For each type of terrazzo material or product, from manufacturer.

H. Installer Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that installers comply with requirements.

I. Cleaning and Maintenance Data: Include procedures for stain removal, stripping, and sealing.


A. Perform work in accordance with NTMA recommendations as posted at their web site at www.ntma.com.

B. Installer Qualifications: 1. Engage an installer who is a contractor member of NTMA. 2. Engage an installer who is certified in writing by terrazzo manufacturer as qualified to install

manufacturer's products.

C. Source Limitations: Obtain primary terrazzo materials from single source from single manufacturer. Provide secondary materials including patching and fill material, joint sealant, and repair materials of type and from source recommended by manufacturer of primary materials.

D. Source Limitations for Aggregates: Obtain each color, grade, type, and variety of granular materials from single source with resources to provide materials of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties.

E. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Build mockups for terrazzo including accessories.

a. Size: Minimum 100 sq. ft. (9 sq. m) of typical poured-in-place flooring condition for each color and pattern in locations directed by Architect.

b. Include base. 2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents

contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.


A. Store resin materials in a dry, secure area.

B. Maintain minimum temperature of 55 degrees F.

C. Keep products away from fire or open flame.


A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for substrate temperature, ambient temperature, moisture, ventilation, and other conditions affecting terrazzo installation.

B. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of construction contiguous with precast terrazzo by field measurements before fabrication.

C. Provide permanent lighting or, if permanent lighting is not in place, simulate permanent lighting conditions during terrazzo installation.

D. Close spaces to traffic during terrazzo application and for not less than 24 hours after application unless manufacturer recommends a longer period.

E. Control and collect water and dust produced by grinding operations. Protect adjacent construction from detrimental effects of grinding operations.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. NTMA Standards: Comply with NTMA's "Terrazzo Specifications and Design Guide" and with written recommendations for terrazzo type indicated unless more stringent requirements are specified.

B. FloorScore Compliance: Terrazzo floors shall comply with requirements of FloorScore Standard.

2.2 MANUFACTURERS

A. Epoxy Resin Terrazzo Basis of Design Manufacturer: Key Resin Epoxy Terrazzo.

B. Substitutions: See Section 01 61 00 – Basic Product Requirements.

2.3 EPOXY MATRIX TERRAZZO

A. Floors (TZ-1 through TZ-4); epoxy matrix. Total Thickness: 3/8 inch. 1. Matrix Color: to match Architect sample

B. Colors/Formulas: 1. TZ-1; TZ-F-127-11 – Key Resin Epoxy – Weathered Gray – 50% Marble Aggregate #2 and 50%

White Glass #2. 2. TZ-2; TZ-F-125-11 – Key Resin Epoxy - Gray Button – 50% Marble Aggregate #2 and 50% White

Glass #2. 3. TZ-3: TZ-F-118-11 – Key Resin Epoxy – Cumberland – 50% Marble Aggregate #1 and 50%

White Glass 32. 4. TZ-4: TZ-F-134-11 – Key Resin Epoxy – ltra White – 100% White Glass #2

2.4 MATERIALS

A. Epoxy Matrix: Two component resin and epoxy hardener with mineral filler and color pigment, non-volatile, thermo-setting as required to match indicated custom mix and accepted sample.

B. Physical Properties without Aggregates: 1. Hardness: 60 to 85 per ASTM D 2240, Shore D. 2. Minimum Tensile Strength: 3000 psi (20.7 MPa) per ASTM D 638 for a 2-inch (51-mm) specimen

made using a "C" die per ASTM D 412. 3. Minimum Compressive Strength: 10,000 psi (6.9 MPa) per ASTM D 695, Specimen B cylinder. 4. Chemical Resistance: No deleterious effects by contaminants listed below after seven-day

immersion at room temperature per ASTM D 1308. a. Distilled water. b. Mineral water. c. Isopropanol. d. Ethanol. e. 0.025 percent detergent solution. f. 1.0 percent soap solution. g. 10 percent sodium hydroxide. h. 10 percent hydrochloric acid. i. 30 percent sulfuric acid. j. 5 percent acetic acid.

C. Physical Properties with Aggregates: For resin blended with Georgia white marble, ground, grouted, and cured per requirements in NTMA's "Terrazzo Specifications and Design Guide"; comply with the following: 1. Flammability: Self-extinguishing, maximum extent of burning 1/4 inch (6.35 mm) per ASTM D

635. 2. Thermal Coefficient of Linear Expansion: 0.0025 inch/inch per deg F (0.0025 mm/mm per 0.5556

deg C) for temperature range of minus 12 to plus 140 deg F (minus 24 to plus 60 deg C) per ASTM


D 696.

D. Aggregate Custom Formula Requirements: Comply with NTMA gradation standards for mix indicated and contain no deleterious or foreign matter. 1. Abrasion and Impact Resistance: Less than 40 percent loss per ASTM C 131. 2. 24-Hour Absorption Rate: Less than 0.75 percent. 3. Dust Content: Less than 1.0 percent by weight.

E. Finishing Grout: Resin based.

F. Aggregate: Crushed marble, size in accordance with NTMA Plate of standard gradation and uniform coloration.

2.5 PRECAST EPOXY-RESIN TERRAZZO

A. Precast Terrazzo Base: Cove Type. Comply with NTMA's written recommendations for fabricating precast epoxy terrazzo units in sizes and profiles indicated. Reinforce units as required by unit sizes, and thicknesses and as recommended by manufacturer. Finish exposed-to-view edges and reveals to match face finish. 1. Color, Pattern, and Finish: To exactly match one of the epoxy terrazzo types/finish as selected by

Architect.

2.6 ACCESSORIES

A. Divider and Control Strips: 1/16 inch thick zincexposed top strip, zinc concealed bottom strip with anchoring features.

B. Base Cap, Base Divider Strip, and Separator Strip: Match divider strips.

C. Cleaner: Neutralizing liquid type, pH of 7.

D. Subfloor Filler: Latex typeManufacturer's product recommended for substrate and use indicated.

E. Flexible Reinforcing Membrane: Manufacturer's resinous membrane for substrate-crack preparation and reflective-crack reduction. 1. Reinforcement: Fiberglass scrim.

F. Primer: Manufacturer's product recommended for substrate and use indicated

G. Anchoring Devices: 1. Strips: Provide mechanical anchoring devices or adhesives for strip materials as recommended by

manufacturer and required for secure attachment to substrate. 2. Precast Terrazzo: Provide mechanical anchoring devices as recommended by fabricator for proper

anchorage and support of units for conditions of installation and support.

H. Sealer: Slip- and stain-resistant, penetrating-type sealer that is chemically neutral; does not affect terrazzo color or physical properties; is recommended by sealer manufacturer; and complies with NTMA's "Terrazzo Specifications and Design Guide" for terrazzo type indicated. 1. Surface Friction: Not less than 0.6 according to ASTM D 2047. 2. Acid-Base Properties: With pH factor between 7 and 10. 3. Sealers shall have a VOC content of 200 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59,

Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work and are ready to receive terrazzo.


B. Verify that wall surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work, are dust-free, and are ready to receive terrazzo.

C. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are dust-free and free of substances that could impair bonding of materials to sub-floor surfaces.

D. Verify that concrete sub-floor surfaces are ready for terrazzo installation by testing for moisture emission rate and alkalinity; obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by terrazzo materials manufacturer.

E. Verify that required floor-mounted utilities are in correct location.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrate of foreign matter.

B. Apply slurry coat to substrate.Provide sound concrete surfaces free of laitance, glaze, efflorescence, curing compounds, form-release agents, dust, dirt, grease, oil, and other contaminants incompatible with terrazzo.

1. Shot-blast surfaces with an apparatus that abrades the concrete surface, contains the dispensed shot within the apparatus, and recirculates the shot by vacuum pickup.

2. Use patching and fill material to fill holes and depressions in substrates according to terrazzo manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Apply primer in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

D. Protect other work from water and dust generated by grinding operations. Control water and dust to comply with environmental protection regulations. 1. Erect and maintain temporary enclosures and other suitable methods to limit water damage and dust

migration and to ensure adequate ambient temperatures and ventilation conditions during installation.

3.3 INSTALLATION - ACCESSORIES

A. Install divider and control joint strips straight and level to locations indicated on shop drwaings.

B. Install recessed floor mat frames.

C. Install base and border divider and control joint strips to match floor pattern.

D. Install terminating cap strip at top of base; attach securely to wall substrate.

3.4 EPOXY-RESIN TERRAZZO INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NTMA's written recommendations for terrazzo and accessory installation.

B. Place, rough grind, grout, cure grout, fine grind, and finish terrazzo according to manufacturer's written instructions and NTMA's "Terrazzo Specifications and Design Guide."

C. Installation Tolerance: Limit variation in terrazzo surface from level to 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6.4 mm in 3 m); noncumulative.

D. Ensure that matrix components and fluids from grinding operations do not stain terrazzo by reacting with divider and control-joint strips.

E. Delay fine grinding until heavy trade work is complete and construction traffic through area is restricted.

F. Flexible Reinforcing Membrane: 1. Prepare and prefill substrate cracks with membrane material. 2. Install membrane according to manufacturer's written instructions and NTMA's "Terrazzo

Specifications and Design Guide where indicated to receive membrane.to produce full substrate


coverage in areas to receive terrazzo. 3. Reinforce membrane with fiberglass scrim. 4. Prepare membrane according to manufacturer's written instructions before applying substrate

primer.

3.5 PRECAST TERRAZZO INSTALLATION

A. Install precast terrazzo units using method recommended by NTMA and manufacturer unless otherwise indicated.

B. Do not install units that are chipped, cracked, discolored, or not properly finished.

C. Seal joints between units with joint sealant, unless otherwise indicated.

3.6 CURING

A. Cure terrazzo topping by sheet polyethylene curing method. according to manufacturer's written instructions and NTMA's "Terrazzo Specifications and Design Guide.

B. Close area to allow undisturbed curing.

3.7 FINISHING

A. Finish terrazzo to NTMA requirements.

B. Produce terrazzo finish surface to match approved mockup, with 70 percent chip exposed.

C. Grind terrazzo surfaces with power disc machine; sequence with coarse to fine grit abrasive, using a wet method.

D. Apply patch mix to match mortar over ground surface to fill honeycomb exposed during grinding.

E. Remove patch coat by grinding, using a fine grit abrasive.

F. Hand grind base and cove similarly.

3.8 TOLERANCES

A. Maximum Variation from Flat Surface: 1/8 inch in 10 feet.

B. Maximum Variation from Level (Except Surfaces Sloping to Drain): 1/8 inch.

3.9 CLEANING

A. Scrub and clean terrazzo surfaces with cleaner in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Let dry.

B. Immediately after terrazzo has dried, apply sealer in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

C. Seal and polish surfaces, in accordance with NTMA's written recommendations. Apply sealer in accordance with manufacturer's published recommendations.

3.10 PROTECTION

A. Do not permit construction traffic over finished terrazzo surfaces.

END OF SECTION

Broward County Courthouse WALL COVERINGS August 15October 21, 2011 09 72 00 - 1 BID SETAddendum #6

SECTION 09 72 00 - WALL COVERINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Wall covering.Custom digital imaging wallcovering.


A. Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating: Preparation and priming of substrate surfaces.

B. Section 06 10 00 – Rough Carpentry.


A. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2010.

B. ASTM F 793 - Standard Classification of Wallcovering by Use Characteristics; 2007.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide data on wall covering and adhesive.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate wall elevations with seaming layout.

D. Samples: Submit two samples of wall covering, full width in size, not less than 36 inches long, from the dye lot used for the work. 1. Submit digital image and secquencing plans for approvalsample with specified treatments applied. 2. Submit full scale sample portion of the final image showing 100% resolution on the specified

substrateMark top and face of material. 3. Show complete pattern repeat.

E. Test Reports: Indicate verification of flame and smoke ratings, when tested by UL.

F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and perimeter conditions requiring special attention.

G. Schedule of wall coverings using the same room designations indicated on the drawings.

H. Certificates signed by the manufacturers of wall coverings certifying that their products comply with specified requirements.

GI. Maintenance Data: Submit data on cleaning, touch-up, and repair of covered surfaces.

HJ. LEED Submittal: Documentation of recycled content and location of manufacture. 1. Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.1: For adhesives, documentation including printed statement of VOC

content. 2. Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.2: For paints and coatings, documentation including printed

statement of VOC content.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of products specified in this section with minimum three years of documented experience.

B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of work specified in this section with minimum five years of experience.

1.6 MOCK-UP

A. Provide panel, three panel drops wide, full height, illustrating installed wall covering and joint seaming technique for each form of construction and finish required to verify selections and to demonstrate


aesthetic effects as well as qualities of materials and execution.

B. Locate where directed.

C. Obtain approval of the Architect before start of final installation of work.

D. Mock-up may remain as part of the Work.


A. Inspect roll materials at arrival on site, to verify acceptabilityFollow manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Protect packaged adhesive from temperature cycling and cold temperatures.

C. Do not store roll goods on end.


A. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature ranges required by the adhesive or wall covering product manufacturer.

B. Maintain these conditions 24 hours before, during, and after installation of adhesive and wall covering.

C. Provide lighting level of 80 ft candles measured mid-height at substrate surfaces.

D. Provide continuous ventilation during installation and for not less than the time recommended by the wall covering manufacturer for full drying or curing.

E. Installer must inspect and accept substrate and environmental conditions prior to installation.

1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. See Section 01 61 00 – Basic Product Requirements, for additional provisions.

B. Provide full size units equal to 5 percent of amount of each type installed.

C. Package and label each roll by manufacturer, color and pattern, and destination room number.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURER

A. Basis of Design Manufacturer: Maharam: www.maharam.com.

B. Acceptable Alternate: 1. Eykon Wallcoverings: www.eykon.com. 2. Designtex: www.designtex.com.Genesys Wall Covering: www.terrapointe.com. 3. Maharam: www.maharam.com. 4. MDC Wallcoverings: www.mdcwall.com. 5. Wolf-Gordon: www.wolfgordon.com. 6. Substitutions: See Section 01 61 00 – Basic Product Requirements.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Requirements for All Wall CoveringsCustom Digital Wallcovering WC-1: 1. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread/Smoke developed index of 25/50, maximum, when

tested in accordance with ASTM E 84, Tunnel Test Class A, NFPA 255 Class A..

B. Wall Covering: Class A, ASTM E 84, Type II vinyl coated fabric roll stock, conforming to the following: 1. Total Weight: 1221-24 oz./linear yard.. 2. Roll Width: 54 42 inches. 3. Characteristics: Anti-microbial, stain and mildew resistant.Content: 48% cellulose, 35% latex, 17%

nylon. 4. Flame Rating: Class "A" in accordance with ASTM E84.Print Technology: UV resistant pigment

http://www.designtex.com/�


inks. 5. Color: As selected by Architect. 6. Pattern: As selected by Architect. 7. Finish: Washable. 8. Lightfastness: 40+ hours. 9. Traffic: Moderate traffic – appropriate for all installations, excluding corridors. 10. Warranty: 3 years.

C. Custom Digital Wallcoverings (DWC-1): 1. Basis of Design Manufacturer:

a. Eykon Digital Printing. b. Substitutions: See Section 01 61 00 – Basic Product Requirements.

2. Digital wallcoverings shall be printed on 52”/54” vinyl wallcovering substrate using UV piezo drop on demand technology or Ecosol with environmentally friendly ink systems. Printing will be produced in CMYK or RGB. Images will be dried and fully cure prior to shipping.

D. Custom Digital Wallcoverings (DWC-2): 1. Basis of Design Manufacturer:

a. Maharam. b. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

2. Digital wallcoverings shall be printed on 52”/54” vinyl wallcovering substrate using UV piezo drop on demand technology or Ecosol with environmentally friendly ink systems. Printing will be produced in CMYK or RGB. Images will be dried and fully cure prior to shipping.

CE. Adhesive: Type recommended by wall covering manufacturer to suit application to substrate.

DF. Substrate Filler: As recommended by adhesive and wall covering manufacturers; compatible with substrate.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Material shall be mounted on MDF panel substrate as indicated on the drawings.

B. Verify that substrate surfaces are prime painted and ready to receive work, and conform to requirements of the wall covering manufacturer.

BC. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply wall coverings if moisture content of substrate exceeds level recommended by wall covering manufacturer.

DC. Verify flatness tolerance of surfaces does not vary more than 1/8 16 inch in 10 feet nor vary at a rate greater than 1/16 inch/ft.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Fill cracks in substrate and smooth irregularities with filler; sand smoothFollow manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Wash impervious surfaces with tetra-sodium phosphate, rinse and neutralize; wipe dry.

C. Surface Appurtenances: Remove or mask electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings prior to preparing surfaces or finishing.

D. Surfaces: Correct defects and clean surfaces that affect work of this section. Remove existing coatings that exhibit loose surface defects.

E. Marks: Seal with shellac those that may bleed through surface finishes.

F. Apply one coat of primer sealer to substrate surfaces. Allow to dry. Lightly sand smooth.


G. Vacuum clean surfaces free of loose particles.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Apply adhesive and wall covering in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Apply adhesive to wall surface immediately prior to application of wall covering. Let contact adhesive set tack free.

C. Use wall covering in roll number sequence.

D. Razor trim edges on flat work table. Do not razor cut on gypsum board surfaces.

E. Apply wall covering smooth, without wrinkles, gaps or overlaps per manufacturer’s instructions. Eliminate air pockets and ensure full bond to substrate surface. Butt edges tightly.

F. Horizontal seams are not acceptable.

G. Do not seam within 2 inches of internal corners or within 6 inches of external corners.

H. Install wall covering before installation of bases and items attached to or spaced slightly from wall surface.

I. Do not install wall covering more than 1/4 inch below top of resilient base.

J. Cover spaces above and below windows, above doors, in pattern sequence from roll.

K. Where wall covering tucks into reveals, or metal wallboard or plaster stops, apply with contact adhesive within 6 inches of wall covering termination. Ensure full contact bond.

L. Remove excess adhesive while wet from seam before proceeding to next wall covering sheet. Wipe clean with dry cloth.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean wall coverings of excess adhesive, dust, dirt, and other contaminants.

B. Reinstall wall plates and accessories removed prior to work of this section.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Do not permit construction activities at or near finished wall covering areas.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 09 75 13 - STONE PANELING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes anchored stone paneling for the following interior applications:

1. Wall paneling.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 03 30 00 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for installing concrete inserts for anchoring stone paneling.

2. Section 04 20 00 "Unit Masonry" for installing masonry inserts for anchoring stone paneling. 3. Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants" for sealing expansion joints in stone paneling.

1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each variety of stone, stone accessory, and manufactured product.

B. LEED Submittals:

1. Product Certificates for Credit MR 5: For products and materials required to comply with requirements for regional materials, certificates indicating location of material manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest, or recovery for each raw material. Include statement indicating distance to Project, cost for each regional material, and fraction by weight that is considered regional.

2. Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.1: For sealants, documentation including printed statement of VOC content.

C. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for stone paneling system, including dimensions and profiles of stone units.

1. Show locations and details of joints both within stone paneling system and between stone paneling system and other finish materials.

2. Show locations and details of anchors, including locations of supporting construction. 3. Show direction of veining, grain, or other directional pattern. 4. Include large-scale shaded drawings of decorative surfaces.

D. Samples for Initial Selection: For joint materials involving color selection.

E. Samples for Verification:

1. For each stone type indicated, in sets of Samples not less than 12 inches square. Include five or more Samples in each set and show the full range of variations in appearance characteristics in completed Work.

2. For each color of grout and sealant required.

F. Delegated-Design Submittal: For stone paneling assembly.

G. Qualification Data: For Installer. Broward County Courthouse October 21, 2011 Addendum #6

STONE PANELING 09 75 13 - 1

H. Material Test Reports:

1. Stone Test Reports: For each stone variety proposed for use on Project, by a qualified testing agency, indicating compliance with required physical properties, other than abrasion resistance, according to referenced ASTM standards. Base reports on testing done within previous three years.

2. Sealant Compatibility and Adhesion Test Report: From sealant manufacturer indicating that sealants will not stain or damage stone. Include interpretation of test results and recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion.

I. Maintenance Data: For stone paneling to include in maintenance manuals. Include product data for stone-care products used or recommended by Installer and names, addresses, and telephone numbers of local sources for products.


A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate stone paneling similar to that required for this Project, and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing stone paneling similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has a record of successful in-service performance.

C. Mockups: Build mockups to demonstrate aesthetic effects and to set quality standards for fabrication and installation.

1. Build mockup of typical wall area as shown on Drawings. 2. Build mockups for the following kinds of stone paneling:

a. Typical stone wall paneling, not less than 72 inches long by 96 inches high. b. Grouting or pointing of joints.

3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.

4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

1.6 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING

A. Preconstruction Sealant Adhesion and Compatibility Testing: Submit to joint-sealant manufacturers, for compatibility and adhesion testing according to sealant manufacturer's standard testing methods and Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants," Samples of materials that will contact or affect joint sealants.


A. Store and handle stone and related materials to prevent deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, corrosion, breaking, chipping, and other causes.

1. Lift stone with wide-belt slings; do not use wire rope or ropes that might cause staining. Move stone, if required, using dollies with cushioned wood supports.

2. Store stone on wood A-frames or pallets with nonstaining, waterproof covers. Arrange to distribute weight evenly and to prevent damage to stone. Ventilate under covers to prevent condensation.

B. Mark stone units, on surface that will be concealed after installation, with designations used on Shop Drawings to identify individual stone units. Orient markings on vertical panels so that they are right side up when units are installed.

Broward County Courthouse October 21, 2011 Addendum #6


C. Deliver sealants to Project site in original unopened containers labeled with manufacturer's name, product name and designation, color, expiration period, pot life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials.

D. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp.


A. Maintain air and material temperatures to comply with requirements of installation material manufacturers, but not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) during installation and for seven days after completion.

B. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions of construction to receive stone paneling by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

1.9 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of inserts that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry and similar items to be used by stone paneling Installer for anchoring and supporting stone paneling. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing such items and deliver to Project site in time for installation.

B. Time delivery and installation of stone paneling to avoid extended on-site storage and to coordinate with work adjacent to stone paneling.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations for Stone: Obtain stone, regardless of finish, from a single quarry with resources to provide materials of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties.

1. For stone types that include same list of varieties and sources, provide same variety from same source for each.

2. Make quarried blocks available for examination by Architect. 3. Make stone slabs available for examination by Architect.

a. Architect will select aesthetically acceptable slabs and will indicate aesthetically unacceptable portions of slabs.

b. Segregate slabs selected for use on Project and mark backs indicating approval. c. Mark and photograph aesthetically unacceptable portions of slabs as directed by Architect.


A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 01 40 00 "Quality Requirements," to design stone paneling system.

B. General: Design stone anchors and anchoring systems according to ASTM C 1242.

2.3 QUARTZ-BASED STONE PANELS

A. Quartz Wall Panel Type QTZ-1, QTZ-2, QTZ-3, QTZ-4:

1. Basis of Design Products: As indicated in the Interior Finish Schedule included on the drawings. 2. Shape and Size: As indicated on the drawings.

B. Material Standard: Comply with ASTM C 616, Classification III Quartzite.



C. Regional Materials: Quartz-based stone shall be fabricated within 500 miles of Project site from stone that has been extracted within 500 miles of Project site.

D. Finish: As indicated.

E. Match Architect's samples for color, finish, and other stone characteristics relating to aesthetic effects.

2.4 SETTING MATERIALS

A. Molding Plaster: ASTM C 59/C 59M.

B. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or Type II.

1. Low-Alkali Cement: Not more than 0.60 percent total alkali when tested according to ASTM C 114.

C. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.

D. Aggregate: ASTM C 144.

E. Water: Potable.

2.5 GROUT

A. Grout Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

B. Sand-Portland Cement Grout: ANSI A108.10, composed of white or gray cement and white or colored aggregate to produce required color.

C. Standard Cement Grout: ANSI A118.6, packaged.

1. Grout Type: Unsanded.

D. Polymer-Modified Tile Grout: ANSI A118.7, packaged.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. Bostik, Inc. b. C-Cure. c. Custom Building Products. d. DAP Inc. e. Jamo Inc. f. Laticrete International, Inc. g. MAPEI Corporation. h. Mer-Krete Systems; ParexLahabra, Inc. i. Prospec; Bonsal American; a division of Oldcastle Architectural Products Group. j. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc. k. Summitville Tiles, Inc. l. TEC, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc.; an H. B. Fuller company.

2. Polymer Type: Acrylic resin or styrene-butadiene rubber in liquid-latex form for addition to packaged dry-grout mix.

3. Grout Type: Unsanded.

E. Water-Cleanable Epoxy Grout: ANSI A118.3, packaged, chemical-resistant, water-cleanable, tile-setting and -grouting epoxy.


a. Boiardi Products; a QEP company. b. Bostik, Inc. c. C-Cure.



http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=6735&mf=04&mf=95&src=wd&mf=04&src=wd

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?uid=123456835347&mf=04&src=wd
















d. Custom Building Products. e. Jamo Inc. f. Laticrete International, Inc. g. MAPEI Corporation. h. Mer-Krete Systems; ParexLahabra, Inc. i. Prospec; Bonsal American; a division of Oldcastle Architectural Products Group. j. Summitville Tiles, Inc. k. TEC, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc.; an H. B. Fuller company.

2.6 SEALANTS

A. Joint Sealants: Manufacturer's standard sealants of characteristics indicated below that comply with applicable requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" and will not stain the stone they are applied to.

1. Mildew-Resistant Joint Sealant: Mildew resistant, single component, nonsag, neutral curing, silicone.

2. VOC Content: 250 g/L.

B. Sealant for Filling Kerfs: Single-component, nonsag, urethane sealant; Class 25, Use T (traffic), and Use M (masonry) that complies with applicable requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" and that does not stain stone.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. BASF Building Systems; Sonolastic NP. b. BASF Building Systems; Sonolastic Ultra. c. Sika Corporation; Sikaflex - 1a. d. Tremco Incorporated; Vulkem 116.

2. VOC Content: 250 g/L.

2.7 STONE ANCHORS AND ATTACHMENTS

A. Fabricate anchors from stainless steel, ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 304.

1. Fasteners for Stainless-Steel Anchors: Annealed stainless-steel bolts, nuts, and washers; ASTM F 593 (ASTM F 738M) for bolts and ASTM F 594 (ASTM F 836M) for nuts, Alloy Group 1 (A1).

B. Fabricate dowels from stainless steel, ASTM A 276, Type 304.

C. Wire Tiebacks: No. 9 AWG copper or copper-alloy or 0.120-inch diameter, stainless-steel wire.

2.8 STONE ACCESSORIES

A. Temporary Setting Shims: Rigid plastic shims, nonstaining to stone, sized to suit joint thickness.

B. Setting Shims for Direct-Mount Anchoring Systems: Strips of resilient plastic or neoprene, nonstaining to stone, of thickness needed to prevent point loading of stone on anchors and of depths to suit anchors without intruding into required depths of pointing materials.

C. Cleaner: Stone cleaner specifically formulated for stone types, finishes, and applications indicated, as recommended by stone producer. Do not use cleaning compounds containing acids, caustics, harsh fillers, or abrasives.

D. Stone Sealer: Colorless, stain-resistant sealer that does not affect color or physical properties of stone surfaces, as recommended by stone producer for application indicated.


















a. Bostik, Inc. b. Custom Building Products. c. Hillyard, Inc. d. HMK Stone Care; ACI International. e. Miracle Sealants Company. f. Stone Care International. g. Summitville Tiles, Inc.

2.9 STONE FABRICATION, GENERAL

A. Select stone for intended use to prevent fabricated units from containing cracks, seams, and starts that could impair structural integrity or function.

1. Repairs that are characteristic of the varieties specified are acceptable provided they do not impair structural integrity or function and are not aesthetically unpleasing, as judged by Architect.

B. Fabricate stone paneling in sizes and shapes required to comply with requirements indicated.

C. Cut stone to produce pieces of thickness, size, and shape indicated and to comply with fabrication and construction tolerances recommended by applicable stone association.

1. Where items are installed with adhesive or where stone edges are visible in the finished work, make items uniform in thickness and of identical thickness for each type of item; gage back of stone if necessary.

2. Clean sawed backs of stones to remove rust stains and iron particles. 3. Dress joints straight and at right angle to face unless otherwise indicated. 4. Cut and drill sinkages and holes in stone for anchors, supports, and lifting devices as indicated or

needed to set stone securely in place; shape beds to fit supports. 5. Provide openings, reveals, and similar features as needed to accommodate adjacent work.

D. Finish exposed faces and edges of stone to comply with requirements indicated for finish of each stone type required and to match approved Samples and mockups.

E. Carefully inspect finished stone units at fabrication plant for compliance with requirements for appearance, material, and fabrication. Replace defective units.

1. Grade and mark stone for overall uniform appearance when assembled in place. Natural variations in appearance are acceptable if installed stone units match range of colors and other appearance characteristics represented in approved Samples and mockups.

2.10 STONE WALL PANELING

A. Arrange panels in shop or other suitable space in proposed orientation and sequence for examination by Architect. Mark units with temporary sequence numbers to indicate position in proposed layout.

1. Lay out one elevation at a time if approved by Architect. 2. Notify Architect seven days in advance of date and time when layout will be available for

viewing. 3. Provide lighting of similar type and level as that of final installation for viewing layout unless

otherwise approved by Architect. 4. Rearrange panels as directed by Architect until layout is approved. 5. Do not trim nonmodular-size units to less than modular size until after Architect's approval of

layout, unless otherwise approved by Architect. 6. Mark backs of units and Shop Drawings with sequence numbers based on approved layout. Mark

backs of units to indicate orientation of units in completed Work.

B. Nominal Thickness: As indicated on the drawings.










C. Control depth of stone to maintain minimum clearances of 3/4 inch between backs of panels and structural members, fireproofing if any, backup walls, and other work behind stone. Do not back check stone less than 1 inch thick.

D. Cut stone to produce uniform joints 1/8 inch wide and in locations indicated.

E. Quirk-miter corners unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate for anchorage in top and bottom bed joints of corner units.

F. Pattern Arrangement: Fabricate and arrange panels with veining and other natural markings to comply with the following requirements: 1. Arrange panels with veining horizontal. 2. Arrange panels with veining vertical. 3. Arrange panels with veining as indicated on Drawings. 4. Arrange panels in blend pattern. 5. Book match units, single-course height. 6. Book match units, both vertically and horizontally. 7. Book match units in each course. No matching is required between successive courses. 8. Slip match units, single-course height. 9. Slip match units, both vertically and horizontally. 10. Slip match units in each course. No matching is required between successive courses.

2.11 MIXES

A. Spotting Mortar: White Portland Cement.

B. Mortar, General: Comply with referenced standards and with manufacturers' written instructions for mix proportions, mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other procedures needed to produce mortar of uniform quality and with optimum performance characteristics.

1. Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures unless otherwise indicated. Do not use calcium chloride.

2. Combine and thoroughly mix cementitious materials, water, and aggregates in a mechanical batch mixer unless otherwise indicated. Discard mortar when it has reached initial set.

C. Setting Mortar: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification.

1. Type: N. 2. Mix Proportions: 1 part portland cement and 2-1/2 to 4 parts lime with aggregate ratio of 2-1/4 to

3 times the volume of cement and lime.

D. Grout: Comply with mixing requirements of referenced ANSI standards and with manufacturer's written instructions.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine surfaces to receive stone paneling and conditions under which stone paneling will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of stone paneling.

B. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of stone paneling.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.



3.2 SETTING STONE, GENERAL

A. Before setting stone, clean surfaces that are dirty or stained by removing soil, stains, and foreign materials. Clean stone by thoroughly scrubbing with fiber brushes and then drenching with clear water. Use only mild cleaning compounds that contain no caustic or harsh materials or abrasives.

B. Do necessary field cutting as stone is set. Use power saws with diamond blades to cut stone. Cut lines straight and true, with edges eased slightly to prevent snipping.

C. Contiguous Work: Provide reveals and openings as required to accommodate contiguous work.

D. Set stone to comply with requirements indicated. Install anchors, supports, fasteners, and other attachments indicated or necessary to secure stone in place. Shim and adjust anchors, supports, and accessories to set stone accurately in locations indicated, with edges and faces aligned according to established relationships and indicated tolerances.

E. Erect stone units level, plumb, and true with uniform joint widths. Use temporary shims to maintain joint width.

F. Provide expansion, control, and pressure-relieving joints of widths and at locations indicated.

1. Sealing of expansion and other joints is specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants." 2. Keep expansion joints free of plaster, mortar, grout, and other rigid materials.

3.3 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES

A. Variation from Plumb: For vertical lines and surfaces, do not exceed 1/8 inch in 96 inches, 1/4 inch maximum.

B. Variation from Level: For lintels, sills, chair rails, horizontal bands, horizontal grooves, and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, 3/8 inch maximum.

C. Variation of Linear Building Line: For position shown in plan and related portion of walls and partitions, do not exceed 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, 3/8 inch maximum.

D. Variation in Cross-Sectional Dimensions: For thickness of walls from dimensions indicated, do not exceed plus or minus 1/8 inch.

E. Variation in Joint Width: Do not vary from average joint width more than plus or minus 1/16 inch or one-fourth of nominal joint width, whichever is less.

F. Variation in Plane between Adjacent Stone Units (Lipping): Do not exceed 1/32-inch difference between planes of adjacent units.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF STONE PANELING

A. Set units firmly against setting spots. Locate setting spots at anchors and spaced not more than 18 inches apart across back of unit, but provide no fewer than one setting spot per 2 sq. ft. unless otherwise indicated.

1. Moisture Exposure: Use portland cement mortar for setting spots where stone is applied to inside face of exterior walls and where indicated.

B. Set units on direct-mount anchoring system with anchors securely attached to stone and to backup surfaces. Comply with anchoring recommendations in ASTM C 1242.

1. Provide compressible filler in ends of dowel holes and bottoms of kerfs to prevent end bearing of dowels and anchor tabs on stone. Fill remainder of anchor holes and kerfs with sealant for filling kerfs.

2. Set stone supported on clips or continuous angles on resilient setting shims. Use material of thickness required to maintain uniform joint widths and to prevent point loading of stone on anchors. Hold shims back from face of stone a distance at least equal to width of joint.





C. Minimum Anchors: Provide a minimum of four anchors per panel up to 12 sq. ft. in face area, plus a minimum of two additional anchors for each additional 8 sq. ft.

D. Grout joints after setting stone.

E. Fill joints with sealant after setting and grouting stone.

3.5 GROUTING JOINTS

A. Grout stone to comply with ANSI A108.10.

1. Use unsanded grout mixture for joints 1/8 inch and narrower.

B. Remove temporary shims before grouting.

C. Tool joints uniformly and smoothly with plastic tool.

3.6 JOINT-SEALANT INSTALLATION

A. Prepare joints and apply sealants of type and at locations indicated to comply with applicable requirements in Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants." Remove temporary shims before applying sealants.

3.7 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean stone paneling as work progresses. Remove adhesive, grout, mortar, and sealant smears immediately.

B. Remove and replace stone paneling of the following description:

1. Broken, chipped, stained, or otherwise damaged stone. Stone may be repaired if methods and results are approved by Architect.

2. Defective stone paneling. 3. Defective joints, including misaligned joints. 4. Stone paneling and joints not matching approved Samples and mockups. 5. Stone paneling not complying with other requirements indicated.

C. Replace in a manner that results in stone paneling that matches approved Samples and mockups, complies with other requirements, and shows no evidence of replacement.

D. Clean stone paneling no fewer than six days after completion of grouting and pointing, using clean water and soft rags or stiff-bristle fiber brushes. Do not use wire brushes, acid-type cleaning agents, cleaning compounds with caustic or harsh fillers, or other materials or methods that could damage stone.

E. Sealer Application: Apply stone sealer to comply with stone producer's and sealer manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations.

3.8 PROTECTION

A. Protect stone surfaces, edges, and corners from construction damage. Use securely fastened untreated wood, plywood, or heavy cardboard to prevent damage.

B. Before inspection for Substantial Completion, remove protective coverings and clean surfaces.

END OF SECTION 09 75 13

Broward County Courthouse VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS August 15October 21, 2011 10 11 01 - 1 BID SETAddendum #6

SECTION 10 11 01 - VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. TackboardsBulletin Boards.


A. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Blocking and supports.

B. Section 09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Concealed supports in metal stud walls.


A. ANSI A135.4 - American National Standard for Basic Hardboard; 2004.

B. ASTM C 1396/C 1396M - Standard Specification for Gypsum Board; 2009a.

C. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2010.

D. ASTM F 793 - Standard Classification of Wall Covering by Use Characteristics; 2007.

E. PS 1 - Structural Plywood; 2007.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's data on tackboard, trim, and accessories.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate wall elevations, dimensions, joint locations, special anchor details.

D. Samples: Submit two samples 2 by 2 inch in size illustrating materials and finish, color and texture of tackboard.

E. Test Reports: Show conformance to specified surface burning characteristics requirements.

F. Manufacturer's printed installation instructions.

G. Maintenance Data: Include data on regular cleaning, stain removal.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.

1.6 WARRANTY


B. Provide five year warranty for tackboard to include warranty against discoloration due to cleaing, crazing or cracking and staining.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis of Design Manufatcurer: 1. Forbo: www.forbo.com.

B. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. MooreCo, Inc\Best-Rite: www.moorecoinc.com.


2. Claridge Products and Equipment, Inc: www.claridgeproducts.com. 3. Polyvision Corporation (Nelson Adams): www.polyvision.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 61 00 – Basic Product Requirements.

2.2 VISUAL DISPLAYBULLETIN BOARDS BB1 & BB2

A. TackboardsBulletin Boards: Linoleum resilientCork wall covering tackable surface laminated to hardboard backing in aluminum frame. 1. Cork Thickness: 1/4 inch. 2. Surface Material: Homogeneous tackable surface material made of primary natural materials

consisting of linseed oil, cork, rosin binders and dry pigments mixed and calendared onto a natural jute backing with Forbo L 910W Adhesive.Linoleum .

3. Color: As indicated on drawings. 4. Backing: Hardboard, 1/4 inch thick, laminated to tack surface. 5. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread index of 25, maximum, and smoke developed index

of 450, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. 6. Size: As indicated on drawings. 7. Frame: Extruded aluminum, with concealed fasteners. 8. Frame Profile: As indicated on drawings 9. Frame Finish: Anodized, natural.

2.3 MATERIALS

A. Linoleum resilient tackable surface. Linoleum shall have bacteriostatic properties.

B. Aluminum Frames: Extruded aluminum frames and trim with satin anodize finish and accessories

C. Hardboard for Cores: AHA A135.4, Class 1 - Tempered, S2S (smooth two sides).

D. Adhesives: Type used by manufacturer.

2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. Aluminum Trim: Extruded aluminum trim with satin anodize finish and accessories as indicated.

B. Temporary Protective Cover: Sheet polyethylene, 8 mil thick.

C. Mounting Brackets: Concealed.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.

B. Verify that internal wall blocking is ready to receive work and positioning dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install boards in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install with bottom of perimeter frame at 30 inches above finished floor.

BC. Secure units level and plumb.

CD. Butt Joints: Install with tight hairline joints.

3.3 CLEANING

A. Clean board surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.


B. Cover with protective cover, taped to frame.

C. Remove temporary protective cover at date of Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION

Broward County Courthouse Accordion Folding Partitions October 21, 2011 102226.13 - 1 Addendum No. 6

SECTION 10 22 26.13 - ACCORDION FOLDING PARTITIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Electrically operated, fire-rated accordion folding partitions.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 09 Section "Gypsum Board "for fire-rated construction above ceiling at track. 2. Division 26 Sections for electrical service and connections for motor operators, controls, and limit

switches; and for system disconnect switches.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. NIC: Noise Isolation Class.

B. NRC: Noise Reduction Coefficient.

C. NVLAP: National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program.

D. STC: Sound Transmission Class.


A. Fire Resistance: Provide fire-rated accordion folding partition assemblies with fire-resistance ratings indicated.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

2. Indicate storage and operating clearances. Indicate location and installation requirements for hardware and track, blocking, and direction of travel.

3. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved:

1. Suspended ceiling components. 2. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile. 3. Items penetrating finished ceiling, including the following:

a. Lighting fixtures. b. Air outlets and inlets. c. Speakers. d. Sprinklers.


e. Access panels.

D. Setting Drawings: For embedded items and cutouts required in other work, including support-beam punching template.

E. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of finish, covering, or facing indicated.

1. Include similar Samples of accessories involving color selection.

F. Samples for Verification: For each type of finish, covering, or facing indicated, prepared on Sample of size indicated below.

1. Fabric: Full width by not less than 36-inch- (914-mm-) long section of fabric from dye lot to be used for the Work, with specified treatments applied. Show complete pattern repeat.

2. Facing Material: Manufacturer's standard-size unit, not less than 3 inches (75 mm) square. 3. Edge Material: Not less than full width by 3 inches (75 mm) long. 4. Hardware: Manufacturer's standard exposed door-operating device.

G. LEED Submittals:

1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.4: For composite wood products, documentation indicating that product contains no urea formaldehyde.

2. Certificates for Credit MR 7: Chain-of-custody certificates certifying that accordion folding partitions comply with forest certification requirements. Include evidence that manufacturer is certified for chain of custody by an FSC-accredited certification body.

a. Include statement indicating costs for each certified wood product.

H. Product Certificates: For each type of accordion folding partition, signed by product manufacturer.

I. Material Certificates: For each fabric dye lot, signed by manufacturers.

J. Qualification Data: For Installer.

K. Field quality-control test reports.

L. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for each accordion folding partition.

M. Maintenance Data: For accordion folding partitions to include in maintenance manuals.

1. Finish facings and finishes for exposed trim and accessories. Include precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to finishes and performance.

2. Seals, hardware, track, carriers, and other operating components. 3. For electric operator.

N. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is certified for chain of custody by an FSC-accredited certification body.

B. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer.

C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency or an NVLAP-accredited laboratory. NVLAP-accredited laboratories must document accreditation, based on a "Certificate of Accreditation" and a "Scope of Accreditation" listing the test methods specified.

D. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide accordion folding partitions with the following fire-test-response characteristics as determined by testing identical products by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction:


1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84.

a. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. b. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.

2. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Comply with NFPA 80, based on testing according to UL 10B. 3. Oversize Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: For units exceeding sizes of tested assemblies, provide

certification or label certification by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that doors comply with standard construction requirements for tested and labeled fire-rated door assemblies except for size.

4. Fire Growth Contribution: Textile wall coverings complying with acceptance criteria in UBC Standard 8-2.

E. Forest Certification: Fabricate products with wood, wood veneers, and wood-based panel products produced from wood obtained from forests certified by an FSC-accredited certification body to comply with FSC STD-01-001, "FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship."

F. Low-Emitting Materials: Provide accordion folding partitions made with adhesives and composite wood products that do not contain urea-formaldehyde resins.

G. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

H. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination."


A. Protectively package and sequence accordion folding partitions in order for installation. Clearly mark packages with numbering system used on Shop Drawings. Do not use permanent markings on partitions.


A. Field Measurements: Verify accordion folding partition openings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of accordion folding partitions that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Faulty operation of accordion folding partitions. b. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal wear.

2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion with service agreement.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Hufcor. 2. Modernfold, Inc.


3. Panelfold Inc. 4. Won-Door Corporation

2.2 FIRE-RATED ACCORDION FOLDING PARTITIONS

A. Construction: Provide fire-rated, hinged-section, accordion folding steel panels supporting acoustical core and decorative vinyl-clad facing/cover, supported by overhead suspension system, designed for horizontal extension and retraction, and reinforced for hardware attachment. Fabricate partitions rigid; level; plumb; aligned, with tight joints and uniform appearance; and free of deformation and surface and finish irregularities.

1. Fire Rating: 1-1/2 hour. 2. Dimensions: Fabricate accordion folding partitions, from manufacturer's standard sizes, to form

an assembled system of dimensions indicated on Drawings and verified by field measurements.

B. Trim: Manufacturer's standard trim with decorative, protective finish.

C. Tiebacks: As required to maintain accordion folding partitions in stacked position.

2.3 SEALS AND POSTS

A. General: Provide types of acoustical seals and posts indicated that produce accordion folding partitions complying with acoustical performance requirements and the following:

B. Perimeter Seals and Closures: Provide manufacturer's standard vinyl, or neoprene, or woven silica vertical seals, horizontal top and bottom seals, and closures identical to products tested for fire rating indicated and forming an effective smoke and draft seal.

C. Posts and Jambs: Steel; formed with deep-nesting and interlocking interfaces and air-release vents and fabricated to ensure rigidity for accordion folding partition.

1. Lead Posts: For single partition, one post, latching at leading edge.

2.4 HARDWARE

A. Hardware: Manufacturer's standard manually operated pulls and latches as required to operate accordion folding partitions and as follows; with decorative, protective finish:

1. Lock: Key-operated lock cylinder.

2.5 FINISH FACING

A. General: Provide enamel finish facings that comply with indicated fire-test-response characteristics; factory attached or applied to accordion folding partitions.

1. Color/Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.6 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS

A. Suspension Tracks: Steel or aluminum [mounted directly to overhead structure with adjustable steel hanger rods for overhead support, designed for type of operation, size, and weight of accordion folding partition indicated. Size track to support partition operation and storage without damage to suspension system, accordion folding partitions, or adjacent construction. Limit track deflection, independent of structural support, to no more than 80 percent of bottom clearance. Provide a continuous system of track sections and accessories to accommodate configuration and layout indicated for partition operation and storage.


1. Track: Recessed parallel tracks. a. Head Closure Trim and Track Channel Pocket: For protecting overhead surfaces and

enclosing overhead track opening; with factory-applied, decorative, protective finish.

B. Carriers: Trolley system as required for size and weight of partition and for easy, quiet operation; with manufacturer's standard ball-bearing carriers at lead post and manufacturer's standard ball-bearing carriers at intermediate panel supports.

1. Wheels: Steel.

C. Track Switches and Accessories: As required for type of operation, storage, track configuration, and layout indicated for accordion folding partition and compatible with partition assembly specified. Fabricate track switches from steel or aluminum.

1. Pivot Switch: Allowing partition to change direction of travel.

D. Steel Finish: Factory-applied enamel, corrosion-resistant, protective coating, unless otherwise indicated.

2.7 ELECTRIC OPERATORS

A. General: Provide factory-assembled electric operation system of size and capacity recommended and provided by accordion folding partition manufacturer for partition specified; with electric motor and factory-prewired motor controls, speed reducer, chain drive, remote-control stations, control devices, and accessories required for proper operation. Include wiring from motor control to motor. Coordinate operator wiring requirements and electrical characteristics with building electrical system.

B. Comply with NFPA 70.

C. Motor Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected loads at designated speeds, within installed environment, with indicated operating sequence, and without exceeding nameplate rating or considering service factor. Comply with NEMA MG 1, and the following:

1. Voltage: 120 V. 2. Horsepower: Manufacturer's standard 3. Enclosure: Manufacturer's standard. 4. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 105 deg F (40 deg C) and at altitude of 3300

feet (1005 m) above sea level. 5. Service Factor: 1.15 for open dripproof motors; 1.0 for totally enclosed motors.

6. Phase: One

D. Control Equipment: Complying with NEMA ICS 1, NEMA ICS 2, and NEMA ICS 6.

1. Remote-Control Station: Manufacturer's standard control station labeled "Open," "Close," and "Stop." Provide two keys per station.

2. Limit Switches: Adjustable switches, interlocked with motor controls and set to automatically stop accordion folding partition at fully extended and fully stacked positions.

3. Emergency Release Mechanism: Quick disconnect-release of electric-motor drive system, permitting manual operation in event of operating failure.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine flooring, structural support, and opening, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of accordion folding partitions.


1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with accordion folding partition manufacturer's written installation instructions.

B. Install accordion folding partitions and accessories after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust accordion folding partitions to operate smoothly, without warping or binding. Lubricate hardware, electric operator, and other moving parts.

1. Fire-Rated Accordion Folding Partitions: Verify that operations are functional and comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean soiled surfaces of accordion folding partitions, to remove dust, loose fibers, fingerprints, adhesives, and other foreign materials according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.5 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain accordion folding partitions. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training."

END OF SECTION 10 22 26.13

SECTION 11 12 00 - PARKING CONTROL EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Automatic barrier gates. 2. Vehicle detectors. 3. Entry terminal ticket dispensers. 4. Exit terminals. 5. Parking facility management software.

1.2 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product data.

B. Shop Drawings: For parking control equipment.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 2. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method

of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 3. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Field quality-control reports.

D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For parking control equipment to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

E. Software and Firmware Operational Documentation:

1. Device address list. 2. Printout of software application and graphic screens.


A. Installer Qualifications: An authorized representative who is trained and approved by manufacturer.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain parking control equipment from single source from single manufacturer.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 AUTOMATIC BARRIER GATES

A. General: Provide parking control device consisting of operator and controller housed in a weathertight, tamper-resistant cabinet enclosure with gate arm. Device shall be activated by a signal from access or revenue control device. Fabricate unit with gate-arm height in down position of not more than 35 inches above pavement.



PARKING CONTROL EQUIPMENT11 12 00 - 1

a. Amano McGann. b. Amtel Security System Inc. c. Automatic Systems; a subsidiary of The IER Group. d. Canadian Parking Equipment Ltd./American Parking Equipment Inc. e. Cubic Transportation Systems, Inc. f. Delta Scientific Corp. g. DoorKing, Inc. h. Engineered Parking Systems, Inc. i. Federal APD, Inc. j. LiftMaster; The Chamberlain Group, Inc. k. Magnetic Autocontrol Group. l. Operator Specialty Co., Inc.; Linear LLC group member. m. Parking Products Inc. n. Parking Systems, Inc. o. PTC Industries. p. WPS Parking Systems.

B. Standards: ASTM F 2200 for barrier gates and gate operators that are listed and labeled according to UL 325 by a qualified testing agency.

C. Controller: Factory-sealed, solid-state, plug-in type, with galvanized-steel box for wiring connections.

1. Type: Communicating.

a. Real-time communication of lane counts, status messages, and execute commands. b. Monitor illegal entries and exits, tailgates, tickets, monthlies, and backouts. c. Status messages for gate up too long, backouts, ticket in chute, and gate-arm rebound. d. Communication commands for resetting loops, turning "Full" signs on/off, raising and

lowering gate arm, and disabling ticket dispensers and card readers.

2. Physical Characteristics:

a. On-off power supply switch. b. Automatic-manual switch. c. Differential counter. d. Communication port. e. Internal resettable counters. f. Thermal-overload protection with manual reset. g. Plug-in connectors for two vehicle loop detectors. h. Thermostatically controlled heater with on/off/auto switch. i. Switch to test motor and limit switches. j. Emergency manual disconnect. k. Battery backup.

l. Single, 115-V ac grounded power receptacle.

3. Operational Characteristics:

a. Able to store successive inputs and sequentially processing each one. b. Automatic instant-reversing obstacle detector mechanism that stops downward motion of

gate arm if arm contacts or nears an object and that immediately returns arm to upward position. Include a zero- to 60-second, variable-time reset device.

c. Directional arming logic. d. Broken gate-arm monitoring. e. Programmable automatic timer. f. Diagnostic mode for on-site testing, with LEDs for inputs and outputs. g. Automatic and continuous testing of inputs and outputs. h. Reversible arm capability for right- or left-handed operation.

D. Cabinets: Fabricated from sheet metal with seams welded and ground smooth; approximately 15 inches square by 40 inches tall. Provide single, gasketed access door for each cabinet with flush-mounted locks.



http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?uid=123456797674&mf=04&&mf=04&src=wd
















Furnish two keys for each lock, all locks keyed alike. Fabricate cabinet with internal reinforcing and four mounting holes accessible only from inside cabinet.

1. Material: Not less than 0.097-inch thick, galvanized steel sheet or 0.125-inch thick aluminum sheet.

a. Finish cabinet, interior and exterior, with manufacturer's standard yellow baked-enamel or powder-coat finish.

E. Straight Gate Arm: Fiberglass, PVC, or polycarbonate, with painted finish and black diagonal stripes on traffic-side face. Provide mounting flange with breakaway feature to ensure a clean break if arm is struck by vehicle.

1. Length: 10 feet.

F. Folding Gate Arm: Two pieces of 1-by-4-inch nominal size pine or redwood joined together with metal side brackets; with painted finish and black diagonal stripes on traffic-side face. Provide mounting flange with breakaway feature to ensure a clean break if arm is struck by vehicle.

1. Length: 10 feet.

G. Operator: UL labeled and listed, Class I. 1/3 hp; 60-Hz, single-phase, instant-reversing, continuous-duty motor for operating gate arm. Transmit power to gate-arm drive shaft through the speed reducer to harmonic-acting crank and connecting rod. Fabricate crank, rod, and drive shaft of galvanized solid bar steel. Provide an operable cam for adjusting arm travel.

1. Opening Time: Three seconds. 2. Inherently adjustable, torque limiting clutch for safety.

H. Characteristics:

1. Audible alarm that activates as part of a safety device system. 2. Additional obstruction detector; noncontact photoelectric. 3. Barrier-arm warning safety signs on both sides of unit to limit traffic to vehicular traffic. 4. Low-voltage red warning lights that illuminate when gate is in down position. 5. Low-voltage light on cabinet top that flashes or changes from red to green when barrier gate is

operating. 6. Manually operated crank for emergency operation. 7. Gate-arm tip support with electromagnetic lock.

2.2 VEHICLE DETECTORS

A. General: Provide detection devices that sense presence or transit of vehicles and emit signals activating gate-arm operators.


a. Amano McGann. b. Amtel Security System Inc. c. Delta Scientific Corp. d. Engineered Parking Systems, Inc. e. Federal APD, Inc. f. Magnetic Autocontrol Group. g. Operator Specialty Co., Inc.; Linear LLC group member. h. Parking Systems, Inc. i. PTC Industries.

B. Vehicle Loop Detector System: Self-tuning electronic presence detector with adjustable detection patterns, adjustable sensitivity and frequency settings, and panel indicator light. Include automatic closing timer with adjustable time delay before closing, timer cut-off switch, designed to hold gate arm open until traffic clears. Provide number of loops consisting of multiple strands of wire, number of turns,












loop size, and method of placement at location indicated on Drawings, as recommended in writing by detection system manufacturer for saw-cut installation.

1. Field-Assembled Loop: Wire, in size indicated for field assembly. 2. Operation:

a. Recognize vehicles within 6 inches of each other on standard-sized loop. b. Recognize vehicle direction by detecting vehicle moving from one loop to another. c. Generate reverse count if vehicle backs up after generating directional count in forward

direction. d. Continuous diagnostic monitoring for intermittently operating and failed loops. e. Crosstalk test between adjacent loops.

C. Active Infrared Vehicle Detector: Retroreflective-type presence detector with adjustable detection zone pattern and sensitivity, designed to detect the presence or transit of vehicle in gate-arm pathway by interrupting infrared beam in zone pattern and to emit signal activating gate-arm operator. Include automatic closing timer with adjustable time delay before closing, timer cut-off switch and vehicle presence detector designed to hold gate arm open until traffic clears.

2.3 ENTRY TERMINAL TICKET DISPENSERS

A. General: Provide entry terminal ticket dispensers, consisting of ticket-printing and -issuing mechanisms, ticket magazines, printers, and controllers housed in cabinet enclosures.


a. Amano McGann. b. Amtel Security System Inc. c. Canadian Parking Equipment Ltd./American Parking Equipment Inc. d. Cubic Transportation Systems, Inc. e. Engineered Parking Systems, Inc. f. Federal APD, Inc. g. Magnetic Autocontrol Group. h. Parking Products Inc. i. Parking Systems, Inc. j. PTC Industries. k. WPS Parking Systems. l. Zeag USA Inc.

B. Physical Characteristics:

1. Time and date display. 2. Time Indicator: 24-hour cycle with A.M. and P.M. clock mechanism. 3. Voice annunciation. 4. Tickets: Magnetic-stripe type. 5. Removable ticket tray with capacity of 5000 fan-folded tickets. 6. Operation: Standalone. 7. Battery backup for clock and RAM memory. 8. Communication port. 9. Thermostatically controlled heater with on/off/auto switch. 10. Access and/or Credit card acceptance with activation slot and "Insert Ticket/Card" message. 11. License plate recognition. 12. Multiple ticket option for valet parking. 13. Intercom.

C. Operational Characteristics:















1. Activation by button with "Push for Ticket" message, vehicle detector and card reader. On activation, unit automatically records entry time and date on ticket, sounds buzzer, and dispenses ticket.

2. Automatic ticket validation. 3. Programmable ticket numbering. 4. Low-ticket alarm. 5. Out-of-ticket alarm. 6. Ticket jam detection. 7. Test ticket printing.

D. Cabinets: Fabricated from sheet metal with seams welded and ground smooth, approximately 15 inches square by 40 inches tall; consisting of base and top components. Provide single, gasketed access door for each base component with flush-mounted locks. Furnish two keys for each lock, all locks keyed alike. Fabricate cabinet with internal reinforcing and four mounting holes accessible only from inside cabinet. Fabricate top component so it can be unlocked and opened for ticket loading and maintenance. Include flush-mounted lock in rear of top, keyed the same as base component lock.


a. Finish cabinet, interior and exterior, with manufacturer's standard yellow baked-enamel or powder coat finish.

E. Ticket-Dispensing Mechanisms: Removable assembly, with self-sharpening ticket cutter and plug-in controller.

2.4 EXIT TERMINALS

A. General: Provide exit terminals consisting of ticket collectors, magnetic-stripe ticket readers, digital displays or LEDs, printers, and controllers housed in cabinet enclosures. Provide "Please Insert Ticket" sign on side of cabinet visible to driver.


a. Amano McGann. b. Amtel Security System Inc. c. Canadian Parking Equipment Ltd./American Parking Equipment Inc. d. Cubic Transportation Systems, Inc. e. Engineered Parking Systems, Inc. f. Federal APD, Inc. g. Magnetic Autocontrol Group. h. Parking Products Inc. i. Parking Systems, Inc. j. PTC Industries. k. WPS Parking Systems. l. Zeag USA Inc.

B. Physical Characteristics:

1. Battery backup for clock and RAM memory. 2. Thermostatically controlled heater with on/off/auto switch. 3. Communication port. 4. Intercom.

C. Operational Characteristics:

1. Standalone. 2. Card Acceptance: Access and/or credit card acceptance with activation slot and "Insert

Ticket/Card" message.















3. Ticket Acceptance: Inserting exit ticket into exit ticket reader results in one of the following actions:

a. Valid Exit Ticket: Exit ticket reader captures ticket and automatically sends signal to raise barrier gate.

b. Invalid Exit Ticket: Exit ticket reader rejects ticket and displays "Pay Cashier First" message.

c. Exit Ticket with Elapsed Grace Time: Exit ticket reader rejects ticket and displays "Return to Cashier" message.

4. Activation by card reader. 5. Print receipts on demand. 6. Voice annunciation. 7. Programmable facility code. 8. Programmable grace period. 9. Programmable display. 10. Programmable timer for closing barrier gate. 11. Reports for events and exception events. 12. Built-in service diagnostics.

D. Cabinets: Fabricated from sheet metal with seams welded and ground smooth; approximately 15 inches square by 40 inches tall. Provide single, gasketed access door for each cabinet with flush-mounted locks. Furnish two keys for each lock, all locks keyed alike. Fabricate cabinet with internal reinforcing and four mounting holes accessible only from inside cabinet.


a. Finish cabinet, interior and exterior, with manufacturer's standard yellow baked-enamel or powder coat finish.

2.5 PARKING FACILITY MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE

A. General: Manufacturer's standard software that is compatible with security-access control system and that provides automatic facility monitoring, supervision, and remote control of parking control equipment from one or more locations.


a. Amano McGann. b. Amtel Security System Inc. c. Automatic Systems; a subsidiary of The IER Group. d. Canadian Parking Equipment Ltd./American Parking Equipment Inc. e. Cubic Transportation Systems, Inc. f. Federal APD, Inc. g. Magnetic Autocontrol Group. h. Parking Products Inc. i. Parking Systems, Inc. j. WPS Parking Systems. k. Zeag USA Inc.

B. Operation:

1. Collect data for revenue and activity reporting. 2. Collect data for access and space control. 3. Track tickets. 4. Programmable parking control equipment.
















PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install parking control equipment as required for complete and integrated installation.

1. Rough-in electrical connections.

B. Automatic Barrier Gates: Anchor cabinets to concrete bases with anchor bolts or expansion anchors, and mount barrier gate arms.

1. Install barrier gates according to UL 325.

C. Vehicle Loop Detectors: Cut grooves in pavement and bury and seal wire loop at locations indicated on Drawings according to manufacturer's written instructions. Connect to parking control equipment operated by detector.

D. Entry Terminal Ticket Dispensers and Exit Terminals: Attach cabinets to concrete bases with anchor bolts or expansion anchors.

1. Connect equipment to remote computer. 2. Load ticket dispenser with supply of tickets.

E. Fee Computers: Install computers at locations indicated, including connecting to peripheral equipment and remote computers.


A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

C. Perform the following tests and inspections:

1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.

2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation.

3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

D. Parking control equipment will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.3 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain parking control equipment.

END OF SECTION

Broward County Courthouse COUNTERTOPS August 15, 2011 September 13October 21, 2011 12 36 00 - 1 BID SET Addendum #16

SECTION 12 36 00 - COUNTERTOPS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Countertops for architectural cabinetwork.


A. Section 06 41 00 - Architectural Wood Casework.

B. Section 22 40 00 - Plumbing Fixtures: Sinks.

C. Section 01 81 13.13 - Sustainable Design Requirements


A. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2010.

B. NEMA LD 3 - High-Pressure Decorative Laminates; 2005.

C. PS 1 - Structural Plywood; 2007.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Specimen warranty.

C. LEED Submittals: 1. Product Data for Credit MR 4: For products having recycled content, documentation indicating


2. Certificates for Credit MR 7: Chain-of-custody certificates indicating that wood products comply with forest certification requirements. Include documentation that manufacturer is certified for chain of custody by an FSC-accredited certification body. Include statement indicating cost for each certified wood product.

3. Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.4: For adhesives and composite wood products, documentation indicating that product contains no urea formaldehyde.

4. Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.1: For adhesives and sealants, documentation including printed statement of VOC content.

D. Shop Drawings: Prepared by Fabricator; complete details of materials and installation; combine with shop drawings of cabinets and casework specified in Section 06 41 00..

E. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, color chips representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns.

F. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, minimum size 6 inches square, representing actual product, color, and patterns.

G. Test Reports: Chemical resistance testing, showing compliance with specified requirements.

H. Qualification Data from Fabricator/Installer.

I. Installation Instructions: Manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations.


J. Maintenance Data: Manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for maintenance and repair of countertop surfaces.


A. Fabricator Qualifications: Same fabricator as for casework/cabinets on which tops are to be installed, except for stone countertops.

B. Fabricator Qualifications for Stone Countertops: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate stone countertops similar to that indicated for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance.

C. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products. 1. Make stone slabs available for Architect to examine for appearance characteristics.

D. Fire Test Response Characteristics: Provide original fire test reports to ensure compliance with the following requirements: 1. Burn Rate: ASTM D635, Class CC1, for a nominal thickness of 1.5 mm. 2. Self-Ignition Temperature: ASTM D1929, greater than 650 degrees F. 3. Smoke Density: ASTM D2848, less than 78%. 4. Flammability Classification: ASTM E-84, smoke less than 450; flame spread less than 75.

E. Mockup: Build mockup of each type of countertop to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Build mockup of typical countertop as shown on Drawings. 2. Approved mockup may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial

Completion.


A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.

B. Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent-based materials, in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Before installing Countertops, permit materials to reach room temperature.

D. Store stone on wood A-frames or pallets with nonstaining separators and nonstaining, waterproof covers. Ventilate under covers to prevent condensation.


A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.

B. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions of countertops by field measurements before countertop fabrication and indicate measurements on shop drawings

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Solid Surfacing Countertops: Manufacturer's standard form agreeing to repair or replace units that fail in material or workmanship within the specified warranty period.

B. Warranty Period: 1 year after the date of Substantial Completion.

C. The warranty shall not deprive the Owner of other rights or remedies the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents, and is in addition to and runs concurrent with other warranties made by the Contractor under the requirements of the Contract Documents.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 COUNTERTOP ASSEMBLIES

A. Plastic Laminate Countertops: High pressure decorative laminate sheet bonded to substrate. 1. Laminate Sheet, Unless Otherwise Indicated: NEMA LD 3 Grade HGS, 0.048 inch nominal

thickness. a. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread 25, maximum; smoke developed 450,

maximum; when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. b. Wear Resistance: In addition to specified grade, comply with NEMA LD 3 High Wear Grade

requirements for wear resistance. c. Surface Color and Pattern: As indicated in Interior Finish Schedule included on the drawings.

2. Exposed Edge Treatment: Square, substrate built up to minimum 1-1/4 inch thick; covered with matching laminate.

3. Back and End Splashes: Same material, same construction. 4. Fabricate in accordance with AWS Premium Grade for installation in wood casework.cabinetwork,

and custom grade for installation in plastic laminate cabinetwork.

B. Stone Countertops: Stone slabs bonded to substrate. 1. Stone: Natural Stone without cracks, voids, or pin holes. 2. Variety and Source: As indicated in Interior Finish Schedule included on the drawings. 3. Stone Thickness: 3/4 inch, minimum. 4. Surface Finish: Honed, non-glare. 5. Exposed Edge Treatment: As indicated.

BC. Quartz Agglomerate Countertops: 1. Configuration: Provide countertops with the following front and backsplash style:

a. Front: As indicated. b. Backsplash: Straight, slightly eased at corner, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Countertops: 3/4-inch-thick, quartz agglomerate with front edge built up with same material. 3. Backsplashes: Thickness as indicated1/2-inch- thick, quartz agglomerate. 4. Fabrication: Fabricate tops and backsplashes in one piece with shop-applied edges and backsplashes

unless otherwise indicated. Comply with quartz agglomerate manufacturer's written instructions for adhesives, sealers, fabrication, and finishing. a. Fabricate with loose backsplashes for field assembly.

2.2 ACCESSORY MATERIALS

A. Certified Wood Materials: Fabricate countertops with wood and wood-based products produced from wood obtained from forests certified by an FSC-accredited certification body to comply with FSC STD-01-001, "FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship."

B. Plywood for Supporting Substrate: PS 1 Exterior Grade, A-C veneer grade, minimum 5-ply; minimum 3/4 inch thick; join lengths using metal splines.

C. Adhesives: Chemical resistant waterproof adhesive as recommended by manufacturer of materials being joined, not containing urea formaldehyde.

D. Joint Sealant: Mildew-resistant silicone sealant, Color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range..

2.3 ADHESIVES, GROUT, SEALANTS, AND STONE ACCESSORIES

A. General: Use only adhesives formulated for stone and ceramic tile and recommended by their manufacturer for the application indicated.

B. Water-Cleanable Epoxy Adhesive: ANSI A118.3, with a VOC content of 65 g/L or less when calculated


according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. Bonsal, W. R. Company. b. Bonstone Materials Corporation. c. C-Cure. d. Custom Building Products. e. Laticrete International, Inc. f. MAPEI Corp. g. Summitville Tiles, Inc.

C. Water-Cleanable Epoxy Grout: ANSI A118.3, chemical-resistant, water-cleanable, tile-setting and -grouting epoxy. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. Bioardi Products Company. b. W.R.Bonsal Company. c. Bostik Findlay Inc. d. C-Cure. e. Custom Building Products. f. Laticrete International, Inc. g. MAPEI Corp. h. Summitville Tiles, Inc. i. TEC Incorporated; H.. Fuller Company.

D. Sealant for Countertops: Manufacturer's standard sealant of characteristics indicated below that complies with applicable requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" and will not stain the stone it is applied to. 1. Single-component, neutral oracid-curing silicone sealant. 2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 3. Sealants shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59,

Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

E. Stone Joint Splines: Stainless-steel or brass washers approximately 1 inch (25 mm) in diameter and of thickness to fit snugly in saw-cut kerf in edge of stone units.

F. Stone Cleaner: Cleaner specifically formulated for stone types, finishes, and applications indicated, as recommended by stone producer and, if a sealer is specified, by sealer manufacturer. Do not use cleaning compounds containing acids, caustics, harsh fillers, or abrasives.

G. Stone Sealer: Colorless, stain-resistant sealer that does not affect color or physical properties of stone surfaces, as recommended by stone producer for application indicated.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate tops and splashes in the largest sections practicable, with top surface of joints flush.

B. Provide back/end splash wherever counter edge abuts vertical surface unless otherwise indicated.

C. Wall-Mounted Counters: Provide skirts, aprons, brackets, and braces as indicated on shop drawings, finished to match.

2.5 STONE COUNTERTOP FABRICATION

A. General: Comply with recommendations in MIA's "Dimension Stone - Design Manual."

B. Joints: Fabricate countertops without joints. Where joints are unavoidable, comply with the following:

C. Joints: Fabricate countertops in sections for joining in field, with joints at locations indicated on shop drawings and as follows:


1. Bonded Joints: 1/32 inch (0.8 mm) or less in width. 2. Grouted Joints: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) in width. 3. Sealant-Filled Joints: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) in width. 4. Splined Joints: Accurately cut kerfs in edges at joints for insertion of metal splines to maintain

alignment of surfaces at joints where indicated on shop drawings. Make width of cuts slightly more than thickness of splines to provide snug fit. Provide at least three splines in each joint.

D. Cutouts and Holes: 1. Undercounter Fixtures: Make cutouts for undercounter fixtures in shop using template or pattern

furnished by fixture manufacturer. Form cutouts to smooth, even curves. 2. Counter-Mounted Fixtures: Prepare countertops in shop for field cutting openings for counter-

mounted fixtures. Mark tops for cutouts and drill holes at corners of cutout locations. Make corner holes of largest radius practical.

3. Fittings: Drill countertops in shop for plumbing fittings, undercounter soap dispensers, and similar items.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.

B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.

C. Verify that wall surfaces have been finished and mechanical and electrical services and outlets are installed in proper locations.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.

B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install countertops to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8 feet.

B. Install countertops as recommended by the Fabricator's shop drawings and written instructions.

C. Securely attach countertops to cabinets using concealed fasteners. Make flat surfaces level; shim where required.

D. Utilize fasteners, adhesives, and bonding agents recommended by the manufacturer for type of installation indicated. Material that is chipped, warped, hazed or discolored as a result of installation or fabrication method will be rejected.

E. Seal joint between back/end splashes and vertical surfaces.

3.4 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES FOR STONE COUNTERTOPS

A. Variation from Plumb: For vertical lines and surfaces, do not exceed 1/16 inch in 48 inches (1.5 mm in 1200 mm).

B. Variation from Level: Do not exceed 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 mm), 1/4 inch (6 mm) maximum.

C. Variation in Joint Width: Do not vary joint thickness more than 1/4 of nominal joint width.


D. Variation in Plane at Joints (Lipping): Do not exceed 1/64-inch (0.4-mm) difference between planes of adjacent units.

E. Variation in Line of Edge at Joints (Lipping): Do not exceed 1/64-inch (0.4-mm) difference between edges of adjacent units, where edge line continues across joint.

3.5 INSTALLATION OF STONE COUNTERTOPS

A. General: Install countertops over plywood subtops with full spread of water-cleanable epoxy adhesive.

B. General: Install countertops by adhering to supports with water-cleanable epoxy adhesive.

C. Do not cut stone in field, unless otherwise indicated. If stone countertops or splashes require additional fabrication not specified to be performed at Project site, return to fabrication shop for adjustment.

D. Set stone to comply with requirements indicated on Drawings and Shop Drawings.

E. Bond joints with stone adhesive and draw tight as countertops are set. Mask areas of countertops adjacent to joints to prevent adhesive smears.

F. Space joints with 1/16-inch (1.5-mm) gap for filling with grout or sealant. Use temporary shims to ensure uniform spacing. 1. Install metal splines in kerfs in stone edges at joints where indicated. Fill kerfs with stone adhesive,

setting adhesive or sealant before inserting splines and remove excess immediately after adjoining units are drawn into position.

2. Clamp units to temporary bracing, supports, or each other to ensure that countertops are properly aligned and joints are of specified width.

G. Grout joints to comply with ANSI A108.10. Remove temporary shims before grouting. Tool grout uniformly and smoothly with plastic tool.

H. Apply sealant to joints and gaps specified for filling with sealant; comply with Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants. Remove temporary shims before applying sealant.

3.6 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean countertops as work progresses. Remove adhesive, grout, mortar, and sealant smears immediately.

B. Remove and replace stone countertops of the following description: 1. Broken, chipped, stained, or otherwise damaged stone. Stone may be repaired if methods and

results are approved by Architect. 2. Defective countertops. 3. Defective joints, including misaligned joints. 4. Interior stone countertops and joints not matching approved Samples and mockups. 5. Interior stone countertops not complying with other requirements indicated.

C. Replace in a manner that results in stone countertops matching approved Samples and mockups, complying with other requirements, and showing no evidence of replacement.

D. Clean stone countertops not less than six days after completion of installation.

E. Sealer Application: Apply stone sealer to comply with stone producer's and sealer manufacturer's written instructions.

3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean countertops surfaces thoroughly.

B. Protect installed products until completion of project.


C. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION

Broward County Courthouse OFFICE FURNITURE

October 21, 2011 12 51 00 – Appendix C.1

Addendum #6

B A S I S O F D E S I G N

ITEM TAG : BK1

TYPE : Bookcase

MANUFACTURER : Herman Miller

MODEL : Tu Filing and Storage

Acceptable Manufacturers: Allsteel Teknion

DESCRIPTION : Freestanding painted metal bookcase with 4 shelves.

DIMENSIONS :

Overall Depth : 15”

Overall Width : 36”

Overall Height : 64”

FINISHES : All finishes are Price Category 1. Metal Paint : TBS



Addendum #6


ITEM TAG : BK2

TYPE : Bookcase


MODEL : Tu Filing and Storage


DESCRIPTION : Freestanding painted metal lateral file with 3 drawers with an add-on overfile, keyed alike, painted metal top with square edge, counterweight, side to side filing rail.


DIMENSIONS :

Overall Depth : 19 3/8”


Overall Height : 65 ¼”

FINISHES : All finishes are Price Category 1. Metal Paint : TBS



Addendum #6


ITEM TAG : BK3

TYPE : Bookcase - Wood

MANUFACTURER : Geiger

MODEL : Tablet Casegoods

Acceptable Manufacturers: Gunlocke Knoll

DESCRIPTION : Freestanding Open Bookcase with three (3) -1” thick adjustable shelves and one fixed shelf, with 1-1/2” wood top.

DIMENSIONS :

Overall Depth : 15”-16”



FINISHES : All finishes are Price Category 1. Wood : TBS


October 21, 2011 12 51 00 – Appendix I

Addendum #6


ITEM TAG : BS1

TYPE : Bench Seating


MODEL : Platform Bench

Acceptable Manufacturers: Agati – Roland Series Steelcase -Tava DESCRIPTION Solid maple wood bench with slatted, clear-coat maple top and metal base

with leveling glides.

DIMENSIONS :



Overall Depth : 18-1/2”

FINISHES : Finish Price Category 1 Base: TBS Seat: TBS

Broward County Courthouse October 21, 2011 Machine-Room-Less Traction Elevators Addendum #6 14 21 56 - 1

SECTION 14 21 56 – MACHINE-ROOM-LESS TRACTION ELEVATORS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED

A. Four (4) traction elevators as follows: 1. Machine-room-less traction elevators. Cars 1-2 Parking Garage 2. Machine-room-less traction elevators. Cars 3-4 East Courthouse Building

B. All engineering, equipment, labor, and permits required to satisfactorily complete elevator installation required by Contract Documents.

C. Preventive maintenance as described herein.

D. Additional equipment or finishes furnished under other sections, installed under this section: 1. Building announcement speaker(s) 2. CCTV system 3. Card reader security system 4. Car interior finishes

1.2 RELATED WORK PROVIDED UNDER OTHER SECTIONS

A. Hoistway and Pit: 1. Clear, plumb, substantially flush hoistway with variations not to exceed 1" at any point. 2. Divider beams between adjacent elevators at each floor, pit, and overhead. Supports at each

floor for car and counterweight guide rail fastening including supports for car guide rail fastening above top landing. Intermediate car guide rail support when floor heights exceed 14'-0" Intermediate counterweight guide rail supports where floor heights exceed 16'-0". Building supports not to deflect in excess of 1/8" under normal conditions.

3. Continuous vertical car and counterweight guide rail support between floors shown on Contract documents full height of hoistway.

4. Installation of guide rail bracket supports in concrete. Inserts or embeds, if used, will be furnished under this Section.

5. Hoist machine supports including two (2) additional horizontal supports above the top terminal landing on the machine side of the hoistway. Locate as required for selected Contractors’ equipment.

6. Wall blockouts and fire rated closure for control and signal fixture boxes which penetrate walls.

7. Cutting and patching walls and floors. 8. Concrete wall pockets and/or structural steel beams for support of hoist machine, rope

sheaves, and dead-end hitch beams. Support deflection shall not exceed 1/1666 of span under static load. Concrete or structural steel machine hold down means for hoist machine mounted offset from hoistway or below bottom landing.

9. Erect front hoistway wall after elevator entrances are installed. 10. Grout floor up to hoistway sills and around hoistway entrances. 11. Lockable, self-closing, fire-rated pit door. 12. Pit access ladder for each elevator. Retractable ladder if provided shall include an electrical

contact conforming to ASME A17.1, Rule 2.2.2.4.2.7. 13. Structural support at pit floor for buffer impact loads, guide rail loads. 14. Waterproof pit. Indirect waste drain or sump with flush grate and pump. Sump pump/drain

capacity minimum 3000 gallons per hour, per elevator. 15. Protect open hoistways and entrances during construction per OSHA Regulations.


16. Protect car enclosure, hoistway entrance assemblies, and special metal finishes from damage. 17. Hoistway smoke relief venting. 18. Hoistway pressurization for smoke control. 19. Hoist machine ventilation, heating, and/or cooling. Maintain minimum temperature of 55°F,

maximum 90°F at the location of the hoist machine. 20. Seal fireproofing to prevent flaking.

B. Control Room and Machinery Spaces: 1. Enclosure with access. 2. Self-closing and locking access door. 3. Ventilation and heating. Maintain minimum temperature of 55° F, maximum 90° F.

Maintain maximum 80% relative humidity, non-condensing. 4. Paint walls and ceiling. 5. Class “ABC” fire extinguisher in each elevator controller space. 6. Seal fireproofing to prevent flaking. 7. Self-closing and locking governor access door and access means.

C. Electrical Service, Conductors, and Devices: 1. Lighting and GFCI convenience outlets in pit, controller space, and overhead machinery

spaces. Provide one additional non-GFCI convenience outlet in pit for sump pump. 2. Three-phase mainline copper power feeder with true earthen grounding to terminals of each

elevator controller in the controller space with protected lockable “open” disconnecting means.

3. Single-phase copper power feeder to each elevator controller for car lighting and exhaust blower with individual protected lockable “open” disconnecting means located in the controller space.

4. Emergency telephone line to designated elevator control panel in elevator controller space. 5. Fire alarm initiating devices in each elevator lobby for each group of elevators or single

elevator and each controller space to initiate firefighters’ return feature. Device at top of hoistway if sprinklered. Provide alarm initiating signal wiring from hoistway or controller space connection point to elevator controller terminals. Device in machine room and at top of hoistway to provide signal for general alarm and discrete signal for Phase II firefighters’ operation.

6. Temporary power and illumination to install, test, and adjust elevator equipment. 7. Conduit from the closest hoistway of each elevator group or single elevator to the firefighters’

control room and/or main control console. Coordinate size, number, and location of conduits with Elevator Contractor.

D. Standby Power Provision: 1. Standby power of normal voltage characteristics via normal electrical feeders to run one

elevator at a time in each elevator group at full-contract car speed and capacity. 2. Conductor from auxiliary form “C” dry contacts, located in the standby power transfer switch

to a designated elevator control panel in each elevator group. Provide a time delay of 30 - 45 seconds for pre-transfer signal in either direction.

3. Standby single-phase power to group controller, and each elevator controller for car lighting, exhaust blower, emergency signaling device,

4. Means for absorbing regenerated power during an overhauling load condition per NEC 620.91. Elevator(s) will employ IGBT drive, presenting a non-linear active load.

5. Standby power to machine room, pit, and overhead machinery space lighting. 6. Standby power to hoist machine and control room ventilation or air conditioning. 7. Standby power to emergency communications device(s).


1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Terms used are defined in the latest edition of the Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators, ASME A17.1.

B. Reference to a device or a part of the equipment applies to the number of devices or parts required to complete the installation.

C. Provisions of this specification are applicable to all elevators unless identified otherwise.


A. Approved Contractors: Alternate Contractors must receive approval of Architect and/or Consultant at least 14 calendar days prior to bid date. 1. Gearless Elevator(s): KONE, Otis, Schindler, Thyssen 2. Car Enclosure: Eklund’s Inc., Gunderlin, Ltd., Hauenstein & Burmeister, KONE, Otis,

Schindler, Tyler. 3. Hoistway Entrance: Hauenstein & Burmeister, KONE, Otis, Schindler, Tyler.

B. Compliance with Regulatory Agencies: Comply with most stringent applicable provisions of following codes, laws, and/or authorities, including revisions and changes in effect: 1. Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators, ASME A17.1 2. Guide for Inspection of Elevators, Escalators, and Moving Walks, ASME A17.2 3. Elevator and Escalator Electrical Equipment, ASME A17.5 4. National Electrical Code, NFPA 70 5. Americans with Disabilities Act, ADA 6. Local Fire Authority 7. Requirements of UBC and all other Codes, Ordinances and Laws applicable within the

governing jurisdiction 8. Life Safety Code, NFPA 101Uniform Federal Accessibility Standard, UFAS

C. Warranty: 1. Material and workmanship of installation shall comply in every respect with Contract

Documents. Correct defective material or workmanship which develops within one year from date of final acceptance of all work to satisfaction of Architect, Purchaser and Consultant at no additional cost, unless due to ordinary wear and tear, or improper use or care by Purchaser. Perform maintenance in accordance with terms and conditions indicated in the Preventive Maintenance Agreement.

2. Defective is defined to include, but not limited to: operation or control system failures, car performance below required minimum, excessive wear, unusual deterioration, or aging of materials or finishes, unsafe conditions, the need for excessive maintenance, abnormal noise, or vibration, and similar unsatisfactory conditions.

3. Make modifications, requirements, adjustments, and improvements to meet performance requirements in Parts 2 and 3.

1.5 DOCUMENT VERIFICATION

A. In order to discover and resolve conflicts or lack of definition which might create problems, Contractor must review Contract Documents for compatibility with its product prior to submittal of quotation. Purchaser will not pay for change to structural, mechanical, electrical, or other systems required to accommodate Contractor’s equipment.


1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Within 60 calendar days after award of contract and before beginning equipment fabrication submit shop drawings and required materials for review as outlined in Division I. Allow 30 calendar days for response to initial submittal. 1. Scaled or Fully Dimensioned Layout: Plan of pit, hoistway, and control room indicating

equipment arrangement, elevation section of hoistway, details of car enclosures, hoistway entrances, and car/hall signal fixtures.

2. Design Information: Indicate equipment lists, reactions, and design information on layouts. 3. Power Confirmation Information: Include motor horsepower, code letter, starting current,

full-load running current, and demand factor. 4. Fixtures: Cuts, samples, or shop drawings. 5. Finish Material: Submit 3" x 12" samples of actual finished material for Architect review of

color, pattern, and texture. Compliance with other requirements is the exclusive responsibility of the Contractor. Include, if requested, signal fixtures, lights, graphics, Braille plates, and details of mounting provisions.

6. Written Maintenance Control Program (MCP) specifically designed for the equipment included under this contract. Include any unique or product specific procedures or methods required to inspect or test the equipment. In addition, identify weekly, bi-weekly, monthly, quarterly, and annual maintenance procedures, including statutory and other required equipment tests.

B. Acknowledge and/or respond to review comments within 14 calendar days of return. Promptly incorporate required changes due to inaccurate data or incomplete definition so that delivery and installation schedules are not affected. Contractor’s revision response time is not justification for equipment delivery or installation delay.

1.7 PERMIT, TEST AND INSPECTION

A. Obtain and pay for permit, license, and inspection fee necessary to complete installation.

B. Perform test required by Governing Authority in accordance with procedure described in ASME A17.2 Guide for Inspection of Elevators, Escalators, and Moving Walks in the presence of Authorized Representative.

C. Supply personnel and equipment for test and final review by Consultant as required in Part 3.

1.8 MAINTENANCE

A. Interim: 1. When one or more elevators are near completion and ready for service, the General

Contractor may accept elevators for interim use and place in service prior to substantial completion of project.

2. During this period General Contractor may pay a mutually agreed upon monthly amount per elevator for preventive maintenance. Indicate amount per unit per month with quotation.

3. Temporary acceptance form must be acceptable to General Contractor and signed prior to use. 4. General Contractor must provide or pay for temporary hoistway and car enclosures; protect

installed equipment and finishes; pay for and return elevators to elevator sub-contractor for all cleaning, repairs, and replacement of materials necessary to restore elevator to “as-new” condition prior to final acceptance.

B. Warranty Maintenance: 1. Provide preventive maintenance and 24-hour emergency callback service for one year

commencing on date of final acceptance by Purchaser. Systematically examine, adjust, clean,


and lubricate all equipment. Repair or replace defective parts using parts produced by the Contractor of installed equipment. Maintain elevator control room, hoistway, and pit in clean condition.

2. Use competent personnel, acceptable to the Purchaser, supervised and employed by Contractor.

3. The warranty maintenance period specified in Item 1 above shall be extended one (1) month for each three (3) month period in which equipment related failures average more than .25 per unit per month.

4. Purchaser retains the option to delete cost of warranty maintenance from new equipment contract and remit twelve (12) equal installments directly to Contractor during period in which maintenance is being performed.

C. Preventive Maintenance: 1. Quote monthly cost for five year Preventive Maintenance Agreement commencing upon

completion of warranty maintenance. 2. Use competent personnel, acceptable to the Purchaser, employed and supervised by

Contractor.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SUMMARY

Number: Cars 1-2: Judge’s Parking Garage Elevators Cars 3-4: East Courthouse Building Elevators

Capacity: 3500#

Class Loading: Passenger

Contract Speed: 350 F.P.M.

Roping: 1:1 or 2:1

Machine: Gearless

Machine Location: Hoistway

Operational Control: Remote Control Microprocessor-Based System

Motor Control: AC Variable Voltage Variable Frequency Microprocessor-Based With Digital Closed-Loop Feedback

Power Characteristics: 480 Volts, 3 Phase, 60 Hertz

Stops/Openings/Floors Served: Cars 1-2: 1 – 6, Front Cars 3-4: 1 – 6, Front

Travel: Car 1-2: 55'-0" Car 3-4: 59'-6"


Platform Size: 7'-0" Wide X 6'-2" Deep

Minimum Clear Inside Car: 6'-8" Wide X 5'-5" Deep

Entrance Size: 3'-6" Wide X 7'-0" High

Entrance Type: Side Opening, Single Speed, Power

Door Operation: High Speed, Heavy-Duty, Door Operator, Minimum Opening Speed 2-1/2 F.P.S.

Door Protection: Infrared, Full Screen Device with Differential Timing, Nudging and Interrupted Beam Time

Safety: Flexible Guide Clamp-Type B, Car and Counterweight where occupied space below.

Guide Rails: Planed Steel Tees

Buffers: Oil

Compensation: Manufacturers Standard

Car Enclosure: See detailed cab finishes in Architectural drawings

Signal Fixtures: LED Illumination Vandal Resistant Assembly

Hall and Car Pushbutton Stations: One Hall Pushbutton Riser each Single Car Operating Panel each

Vandal Resistant Car and Hall Pushbuttons

Car Position Indicators: Digital with Car Direction Arrows in each Car Operating Panel

Security Control Panel

Firefighters’ Control Panel

Remote Command Center

Hall Lanterns: At All Floors with Volume Adjustable Electronic Chime or Tone. Sound Twice for Down Direction, Vandal Resistant Assembly

Hall Car Position Indicator: Digital Type with Car Direction

Communication System: Intercom with Distress Signal


Fixture Submittal: Submit Brochure Depicting Contractor’s Proposed Designs with Bid

Additional Features: Car and Counterweight Roller Guides

Car Top Inspection Station

Firefighters’ Service, Phase I And II, including Alternate Floor Return

Standby Power Transfer (Automatic to Main Floor) with Manual Override in Firefighters’ Control Panel

Accessibility and Emergency Medical Services Signage

Stationary Car Return Panels Arranged for Surface Applied Car Operating Panels

Hoistway Access Switches Top and Bottom Floors

Hoistway Door Unlocking Device All Floors

Platform Isolation

Load-Weighing Device

Anti-Nuisance Feature

Independent Service Feature

Attendant Operation with Complete Remote Control from Sheriff’s Command Center

Card Reader Provisions All Cars with security interface in machine rooms

CCTV Provisions, All Cars

Security Control Panel and Remote Wiring

Firefighters’ Control Panel and Remote Wiring

Remote Command Panel and Wiring

Machine, Power Conversion Unit, and Controller Sound Isolation

Tamper Resistant Fasteners for All Fastenings Exposed To The Public


One Year Warranty Maintenance with 24-Hour Call-Back Service

Sill Support Angles

Emergency Paging Speaker Installation

Signage Engraving Filled with Black Paint or Approved Etching Process

No Visible Company Name or Logo

Wiring Diagrams, Operating Instructions, and Parts Ordering Information

System Diagnostic Means and Instructions

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Steel: 1. Sheet Steel (Furniture Steel for Exposed Work): Stretcher-leveled, cold-rolled, commercial

quality carbon steel, complying with ASTM A366, matte finish. 2. Sheet Steel (for Unexposed Work): Hot-rolled, commercial quality carbon steel, pickled and

oiled, complying with ASTM A568 and A569. 3. Structural Steel Shapes and Plates: ASTM A36.

B. Stainless Steel: Type 302 or 304 complying with ASTM A167, with standard tempers and hardness required for fabrication, strength and durability. Apply mechanical finish on fabricated work in the locations shown or specified, Federal Standard and NAAMM nomenclature, with texture and reflectivity required to match Architect’s sample. Protect with adhesive paper covering. 1. No. 4: Directional polish (satin finish). Graining directions as shown or, if not shown, in

longest dimension.

C. Aluminum: Extrusions per ASTM B221; sheet and plate per ASTM B209.

D. Plastic Laminate: ASTM E84 Class A and NEMA LD3.1, Fire-Rated Grade (GP-50), Type 7, 0.050" ±.005" thick, color and texture as follows: 1. Exposed Surfaces: Color and texture selected by Architect. 2. Concealed Surfaces: Contractor’s standard color and finish.

E. Fire-Retardant Treated Particle Board Panels: Minimum 3/4" thick backup for natural finished wood and plastic laminate veneered panels, edged and faced as shown, provided with suitable anti-warp backing; meet ASTM E84 Class “I” rating with a flame-spread rating of 25 or less, registered with Local Authorities for elevator finish materials.

F. Natural Finish Wood Veneer: Standard thickness, 1/40" thoroughly dried conforming to ASME/HPMA HP-1983, Premium Grade. Place veneer, tapeless spliced with grain running in direction shown, belt and polish sanded, book-matched. Species and finish designated and approved by Architect.

G. Paint: Clean exposed metal parts and assemblies of oil, grease, scale, and other foreign matter and factory paint one shop coat of standard rust-resistant primer. After erection, provide one finish coat of industrial enamel paint. Galvanized metal need not be painted.


H. Prime Finish: Clean all metal surfaces receiving a baked enamel paint finish of oil, grease, and scale. Apply one coat of rust-resistant primer followed by a filler coat over uneven surfaces. Sand smooth and apply final coat of primer.

I. Baked Enamel Finish: Prime finish per above. Unless specified “prime finish” only, apply and bake three (3) additional coats of enamel in the selected solid color.

J. Flooring: Refer to flooring section by others

2.3 CAR AND GROUP PERFORMANCE

A. Car Speed: ± 3% of contract speed under any loading condition.

B. Car Capacity: Safely lower, stop and hold 125% of rated load.

C. Car Stopping Zone: ±1/4" under any loading condition.

D. Door Opening Time: Seconds from start of opening to fully open: 1. Car(s) 1-4: 1.8 seconds.

E. Door Closing Time: Seconds from start of closing to fully closed: 1. Car(s) 1-4: 2.5 seconds.

F. Car Floor-to-Floor Performance Time: Seconds from start of doors closing until doors are 3/4 open (1/2 open for side opening doors) and car level and stopped at next successive floor under any loading condition or travel direction: 1. Car(s) 1-4: 10.3 seconds.

G. Car Ride Quality: 1. Horizontal and vertical acceleration within car during all riding and door operating conditions.

Not more than 20 mg peak to peak (adjacent peaks) in the 1 - 10 Hz range. 2. Acceleration and Deceleration: Smooth constant and not less than 3 feet/second² with an

initial ramp between 0.5 and 0.75 second. 3. Sustained Jerk: Not more than 6 feet/second³. 4. Measurement Standards: Measure and evaluate ride quality consistent with ISO 18738, using

low pass cutoff frequency of 10 Hz and A95 peak-to-peak average calculations.

H. Noise and Vibration Control 1. Airborne Noise: Measured noise level of elevator equipment and its operation shall not

exceed 60 dBA inside car under any condition including door operation and car ventilation exhaust blower on its highest speed. Limit noise level in the machine room relating to elevator equipment and its operation to no more than 80 dBA. All dBA readings to be taken 3'-0" off the floor and 3'-0" from the equipment using the “A” weighted scale.

2. Vibration Control: All elevator equipment provided under this contract, including power unit, controller, oil supply lines, and their support shall be mechanically isolated from the building structure and electrically isolated from the building power supply and to each other to minimize the possibility of objectionable noise and vibrations being transmitted to occupied areas of the building.

2.4 OPERATION

A. Duplex Selective Collective Microprocessor Based (Car(s) 1-2 and 3-4):


1. Operate car without attendant from pushbuttons in car and located at each floor. When car is available, automatically start car, and dispatch it to floor corresponding to registered car or hall call. Once car starts, respond to registered calls in direction of travel and in the order the floors are reached.

2. Do not reverse car direction until all car calls have been answered, or until all hall calls ahead of car and corresponding to the direction of car travel have been answered.

3. Slow car and stop automatically at floors corresponding to registered calls, in the order in which they are approached in either direction of travel. As slowdown is initiated for a hall call, automatically cancel hall call. Cancel car calls in the same manner. Hold car at arrival floor an adjustable time interval to allow passenger transfer.

4. Answer calls corresponding to direction in which car is traveling unless call in the opposite direction is highest (or lowest) call registered.

5. Illuminate appropriate pushbutton to indicate call registration. Extinguish light when call is answered.

B. Other Items: 1. Load Weighing: Provide means for weighing car passenger load. Control system to provide

dispatching at main floor in advance of normal intervals when car fills to capacity. Provide hall call by-pass when the car is filled to preset percentage of rated capacity and traveling in down direction. Field adjustment range: 10% to 100%.

2. Anti-Nuisance Feature: If car loading relative to weight in car is not commensurate with number of registered car calls, cancel car calls. Systems employing either load weighing or door protective device for activation of this feature are acceptable.

3. Independent Service: Provide controls for operation of each car from its pushbuttons only. Close doors by constant pressure on desired destination floor button or door close button. Open doors automatically upon arrival at selected floor.

4. Car-to-Lobby Feature: Provide means within the car-to-lobby feature for automatic return to the first floor. Return car nonstop after answering pre-registered car calls, and park with doors open for an adjustable time period of 60 - 90 seconds. Upon expiration of time period, car shall automatically revert to normal operation and close its doors until assigned as next car or until the car is placed on manual control via in-car attendant or out-of-service switch.

C. Firefighters’ Service: Provide equipment and operation in accordance with code requirements.

D. Automatic Car Stopping Zone: Stop car within 1/4" above or below the landing sill. Maintain stopping zone regardless of load in car, direction of travel, distance between landings, hoist rope slippage, or stretch.

E. Remote Monitoring and Diagnostics: Equip each controller with standard ports, interface boards, and drivers to accept maintenance, data logging, fault finding diagnostic, and monitoring computers, keyboards, modems, and programming tools. The system shall be capable of driving remote color CRT monitor(s) that continually scan and display the status of each car and call.

F. Motion Control: Microprocessor based AC, variable-voltage, variable frequency with digitally encoded closed-loop velocity feedback suitable for operation specified and capable of providing smooth, comfortable car acceleration, retardation, and dynamic braking. Limit the difference in car speed between full load and no load to not more than ±3% of the contract speed.

G. Door Operation: Automatically open doors when car arrives at main floor. At expiration of normal dwell time, close doors.

H. Standby Lighting and Alarm: Car mounted battery unit with solid-state charger to operate alarm bell and car emergency lighting. Battery to be rechargeable with minimum 5-year life expectancy.


Include required transformer. Provide constant pressure test button in service compartment of car operating panel.

I. Standby Power Operation: Upon loss of normal power, adequate standby power will be supplied via building electrical feeders to simultaneously start and run one car in each group and single cars at contract car speed and capacity. 1. Automatically return one car at a time, in each group and single car(s), nonstop to designated

floor, open doors for approximately 3.0 seconds, close doors, and park car. During return operation, car and hall call pushbuttons shall be rendered inoperative. As each car parks, system shall immediately select the next car until all cars in a group have returned to the designated floor. If a car fails to start or return within 30 seconds, system shall automatically select the next car in the group to automatically return.

2. When all cars in a group have returned to the designated floor, one car in each group shall be designated for automatic operation. When a service demand exists for 30 seconds and designated car fails to start, next available car in the group shall be automatically selected for operation. a. Switch(es) shall be labeled “STANDBY POWER OVERRIDE” with positions marked

“AUTO” and appropriate car numbers controlled by each respective switch. b. Switch shall override automatic return and automatic selection functions, and cause the

manually selected car to operate. Manual selection shall cause car to start and proceed to designated floor and open and close its doors before standby power is manually transferred to next selected car.

c. Provide “STANDBY POWER” indicator lights, one per car, in firefighters’ control panel and security control panel. Indicator light illuminates when corresponding car is selected, automatically or manually, to operate on standby power.

3. Successive Starting: When normal power is restored or there has been a power interruption, individual cars in each bank shall restart at five second intervals.

J. Security System: Provide means to limit access to each building floor for Car(s) 12-13-14 as follows: 1. Individual floor lockout means in main car operating panel and security control panel to

prevent registration of car calls to any selected secure floor. 2. Arrange system so that independent service and/or attendant operation overrides security

system. 3. Arrange system so that firefighters’ service overrides security system. 4. Actuate hall lantern each time car arrives at main lobby during secure mode operation. 5. Provide warning light and signal in lobby indicator panel to indicate an attempt to register

unauthorized destinations or to open car doors when car is moving or parked at a secured floor. Provide reset switch or button to cancel warning light and signal.

6. Arrange system to accept a minimum 3-digit code, entered on car pushbuttons or separate 10-digit pad, to bypass security system and allow registration of car call. Include system capability to set separate, easily changed codes, for each floor or group of floors.

K. Card/Proximity Reader Security System: Provide provisions inside Car(s) 12-13-14 for reader unit. Mount reader unit as directed by Architect and cross connect from car pushbuttons to control module in control room. Reader control unit, mounting brackets, wiring materials, logic circuits, etc., by Security Subcontractor. Elevator control systems shall facilitate system tracking of persons accessing secure floors via printout by passenger I.D. number, floor accessed, and time of entry.

2.5 CONTROL ROOM EQUIPMENT

A. Arrange equipment in spaces shown on drawings.


B. Solid State Power Conversion and Regulation Unit: Provide solid-state, alternating current, variable voltage, variable frequency (ACV3F), I.G.B.T converter/inverter drives. 1. Design unit to limit current, suppress noise, and prevent transient voltage feedback into

building power supply. Provide internal heat sink cooing fans for the power drive portion of the converter panels. Conform to IEEE standards 519-1992 for line harmonics and switching noise.

2. Isolate unit to minimize noise and vibration transmission. Provide isolation transformers, filter networks, and choke inductors.

3. Suppress solid-state converter noises, radio frequency interference, and eliminate regenerative transients induced into the mainline feeders or the building standby power generator.

4. Supplemental direct-current power for the operation of hoist machine brake, door operator, dispatch processor, signal fixtures, etc., from separate static power supply.

5. ACV3F Drives for gearless elevators shall be regenerative and utilize IGBT converter/inverter and dynamic braking during overhauling condition.

C. Encoder: Direct drive, solid-state, digital type. Update car position at each floor and automatically restore after power loss.

D. Controller: UL/CSA labeled. 1. Compartment: Securely mount all assemblies, power supplies, chassis switches, relays, etc.,

on a substantial, self-supporting steel frame. Completely enclose equipment with covers. Provide means to prevent overheating.

2. Relay Design: Magnet operated with contacts of design and material to insure maximum conductivity, long life, and reliable operation without overheating or excessive wear. Provide wiping action and means to prevent sticking due to fusion. Contacts carrying high inductive currents shall be provided with arc deflectors or suppressors.

3. Microprocessor-Related Hardware a. Provide built-in noise suppression devices which provide a high level of noise

immunity on all solid-state hardware and devices. b. Provide power supplies with noise suppression devices. c. Isolate inputs from external devices (such as pushbuttons) with opto-isolation modules. d. Design control circuits with one leg of power supply grounded. e. Safety circuits shall not be affected by accidental grounding of any part of the system. f. System shall automatically restart when power is restored. g. System memory shall be retained in the event of power failure or disturbance. h. Equipment shall be provided with Electro Magnetic Interference (EMI) shielding

within FCC guidelines. 4. Wiring: CSA labeled copper for factory wiring. Neatly route all wiring interconnections and

securely attach wiring connections to studs or terminals. 5. Permanently mark components (relays, fuses, PC boards, etc.) with symbols shown on wiring

diagrams. 6. Monitoring System Interface: Provide controller with serial data link through RJ45 Ethernet

connection and install all devices necessary to monitor items outlined in Section 2.13. Elevator contractor responsible to connect monitoring system interface to control room monitoring compartment and LAN. Wiring from the LAN to the control room monitoring compartment by others.

7. Provide controller or machine mounted auxiliary, lockable “open” disconnect if mainline disconnect is not in sight of controller and/or machine.

E. Sleeves and Guards: Provide 2" steel angle guards around cable or duct slots through floor slabs and/or walls. Provide rope and smoke guards for sheaves, cables, and cable slots in control room. Noise/Vibration Isolation: All elevator equipment including their supports and fastenings to building, shall be mechanically and electrically isolated from the building structure and main line


power feeders to minimize objectionable noise and vibration transmission to car, building structure, or adjacent occupied areas of building.

2.6 HOISTWAY EQUIPMENT

A. Gearless Traction Hoist Machine: 1. AC induction or P.M.S.M. ACV3F gearless traction type motor with brake, drive sheave, and

deflector sheave mounted in proper alignment on a common, isolated machine support frame at the top of the hoistway or mounted on the back of the guide rail at the top landing.

2. Provide hoist machine mounted direct drive, digital, closed-loop velocity encoder. 3. Provide structural imbeds and deflector supporting steel beams and fastenings to mount

machine sheaves (if required) to building structure. Provide minimum 16 gauge easily removable sound insulated sheet metal closures in hoistway wall opening around machine.

4. Provide ladders and platforms with handrails and toeboards for overhead machine and/or sheave access within the bounds of the control room as required.

B. Machine and Equipment Support Beams: 1. Provide structural steel frame required for direct support of and attachment to building

structure of hoist machine, deflector sheaves, overhead sheaves, governor, and hoist rope dead-end hitch assemblies.

2. Provide bearing plates, anchors, shelf angles, blocking, embedment, etc., for support and fastening of machine support frame or equipment to the building structure.

3. Isolate machine and/or machine support frame to prevent noise and vibration transmission to building structure.

4. Provide hold-down bolts for offset hoist machines located beside or under hoistway where concrete hold-down pad is provided.

C. Governor: Centrifugal-type, car and counterweight driven with pull-through jaws and bi-directional shutdown switches. Provide required bracketing and supports for attachment to guide rail or machine support frame.

D. Emergency Brake: Provide means to prevent ascending car over-speed and unintended car movement per code.

E. Guide Rails: Planed steel T-sections for car and counterweight of suitable size and weight for the application, including brackets for attachment to building structure. No additional structural points of rail attachment, other than those shown on the Contract Documents, will be provided.

F. Buffers, Car and Counterweight: Spring type with blocking and support channels. Sheaves: Machined grooves and sealed bearings. Provide mounting means to machine support frame and car and counterweight structural members.

G. Counterweight: Steel frame with metal filler weights.

H. Counterweight Guide Shoes: Spring dampened roller guide shoes.

I. Governor Rope and Encoder Tape Tensioning Sheaves: Mount sheaves and support frame on pit floor or guide rail. Provide frame with guides or pivot point to enable free vertical movement and proper tension of rope and tape.

J. Hoist and Governor Ropes: 1. 8 x 19 or 8 x 25 Seale construction, traction steel type. Fasten with staggered length,

adjustable, spring isolated wedge type shackles. 2. Flat, polyurethane coated reinforced steel belts.


3. Governor rope to suit Contractor’s specification.

K. Compensation: Contractor’s standard application. Pit mounted guide assembly shall provide quiet, effective restraint without excessive wear of components. Inhibit rubbing or chafing against hoistway or equipment within hoistway or pit. Application must meet performance/noise level requirement of specification.

L. Terminal Stopping: Provide normal and final devices.

M. Electrical Wiring and Wiring Connections: 1. Conductors and Connections: Copper throughout with individual wires coded and

connections on identified studs or terminal blocks. Use no splices or similar connections in wiring except at terminal blocks, control compartments, or junction boxes. Provide 10% spare conductors throughout. Run spare wires from car connection points to individual elevator controllers in the control room. Provide 8 pair of spare shielded communication wires in addition to those required to connect specified items. Tag spares in control room.

2. Conduit: Painted or galvanized steel conduit, EMT, or duct. Conduit size, 1/2" minimum. Flexible heavy-duty service cord may be used between fixed car wiring and car door switches for door protective devices.

3. Traveling Cables: Flame and moisture-resistant outer cover. Prevent traveling cable from rubbing or chafing against hoistway or equipment within hoistway. Provide five (5) pair of shielded wires and two (2) RG-6/U type coaxial cables for card reader. Provide two (2) RG-6/U coaxial CCTV cables within traveling cable from car controller to car top, plus 3'-0" excess loop at both ends. Provide two (2) pair 14 gauge wire for CCTV power.

4. Auxiliary Wiring: Connect fire alarm initiating devices, emergency two-way communication system, paging speaker, CCTV, digital video display, card reader, intercom, and announcement speaker and/or background music in each car controller in control room.

N. Entrance Equipment: 1. Door Hangers: Two-point hanger roller with neoprene roller surface and suspension with

eccentric upthrust roller adjustment. 2. Door Tracks: Bar or formed, cold-drawn removable steel tracks with smooth roller contact

surface. 3. Door Interlocks: Operable without retiring cam. Paint interlock box flat black. 4. Door Closers: Spring, spirator, or jamb/strut mounted counterweight type. Design and adjust

to insure smooth, quiet mechanical close of doors. 5. Hoistway Door Unlocking Device: Provide unlocking device with escutcheon in door panel

at all floors, with finish to match adjacent surface. 6. Hoistway Access Switches: Mount in wall at top and bottom floor(s). Provide switch with

faceplate.

O. Floor Numbers: Stencil paint 4" high floor designations in contrasting color on inside face of hoistway doors or hoistway fascia in location visible from within car.

2.7 HOISTWAY ENTRANCES

A. Complete entrances bearing fire labels from a nationally recognized testing laboratory approved within the governing jurisdiction.

B. Frames: 14 gauge hollow metal at all floors. Provide Arabic floor designation/Braille plates, centered at 60" above finished floor, on both side jambs of all entrances. Provide plates at main egress landing with “Star” designation. Braille indications shall be below Arabic floor designation. Provide cast floor designation/Braille plates as manufactured by SCS, Vision Mark, or Entrada.


C. Door Panels: Minimum 18 gauge steel, sandwich construction without binder angles. . Provide a minimum of two (2) gibs per panel, one at leading and one at trailing edge with gibs in the sill groove entire length of door travel. Construct door panels with interlocking, stiffening ribs.

D. Sight Guards: Minimum 16 gauge, same material and finish as hoistway entrance door panels. Construct without sharp edges.

E. Sills: Extruded aluminum

F. Sill Supports: Structural or formed steel designed to support door sill based upon car loading classification. Mount to eliminate need for grout under the sill, Fascia, Toe Guards and Hanger Covers: Minimum 16 gauge furniture steel with Contractor’s standard finish.

G. Struts and Headers: Provide for vertical support of entrances and related material. Provide door open bumpers on entrances equipped with vertical struts.

H. Finish of Frames and Doors: Provide final painting requirements to General Contractor where factory prime finish is specified.

Car(s) Floor Frames Door Panels

1-4 ALL Stainless Steel #4 Stainless Stell #4

2.8 CAR EQUIPMENT

A. Frame: Welded or bolted, rolled or formed steel channel construction to meet load classification specified.

B. Safety Device: Type “B,” flexible guide clamp.

C. Platform: Isolated type, constructed of steel, or steel and wood which is fireproofed on underside. Design and construct to accommodate load classification requirements. Provide Class “A” construction for passenger elevators

D. Platform Apron: Minimum 16 gauge steel, reinforced and braced to car platform

E. Guide Shoes: Roller type with three or more spring dampened, sound-deadening rollers per shoe. Maximum roller rotation speed, 350 r.p.m.

F. Finish Floor Covering: Provided under other sections.

G. Sills: One piece extrusion with extruded extension between car entrance columns to face of car front return. Extruded extension to match finish of sill. 1. Car(s) 1-4: aluminum

H. Doors: Provide as specified for hoistway entrance doors.

I. Door Hangers: Two-point hanger roller with neoprene roller surface and suspension with eccentric upthrust roller adjustment.


J. Door Track: Bar or formed, cold-drawn removable steel track with smooth roller contact surface.

K. Door Header: Construct of minimum 12 gauge steel, shape to provide stiffening flanges.

L. Door Electrical Contact: Prohibit car operation unless car door is closed.

M. Door Clutch: Heavy-duty clutch, linkage arms, drive blocks and pickup rollers or cams to provide positive, smooth, quiet door operation. Design clutch so car doors can be closed, while hoistway doors remain open.

N. Restricted Opening Device: Restrict opening of car door(s) outside unlocking zone.

O. Door Operator: Medium speed, heavy-duty closed loop door operator capable of opening doors at no less than 1-1/2 f.p.s. Accomplish reversal in no more than 2-1/2" of door movement. Provide solid-state door control with closed loop circuitry to constantly monitor and automatically adjust door operation based upon velocity, position, and motor current. Maintain consistent, smooth, and quiet door operation at all floors, regardless of door weight or varying air pressure.

P. Door Control Device: 1. Infrared Reopening Device: Black, fully enclosed device with full screen infrared matrix or

multiple beams extending vertically along leading edge of each door panel to minimum height of 7'-0" above finished floor. Device shall prevent doors from closing and reverse doors at normal opening speed if beams are obstructed while doors are closing, except during nudging operation. In event of device failure, provide for automatic shutdown of car at floor level with doors open a. Acceptable Infrared Reopening Device:

1) Cegard/MAX-154 by CEDES 2) Gatekeeper by Adams 3) Lambda II by Otis 4) Magic Edge by Tri-Tronics 5) Microlite by ThyssenKrupp 6) Microscan E by T.L. Jones 7) Pana40 Plus by Janus

b. Acceptable Infrared 3D Reopening Device: 1) Cegard/MAX-154 by CEDES 2) Gatekeeper by Adams 3) Lambda 3D by Otis 4) Microlite 3D by ThyssenKrupp 5) Pana40 Plus 3D by Janus

2. Nudging Operation: After beams of door control device are obstructed for a predetermined time interval (minimum 20.0 - 25.0 seconds), warning signal shall sound and doors shall attempt to close with a maximum of 2.5 foot pounds kinetic energy. Activation of the door open button shall override nudging operation and reopen doors.

3. Interrupted Beam Time: When beams are interrupted during initial door opening, hold door open a minimum of 3.0 seconds. When beams are interrupted after the initial 3.0 second hold open time, reduce time doors remain open to an adjustable time of approximately 1.0 - 1.5 seconds after beams are reestablished.

4. Differential Door Time: Provide separately adjustable timers to vary time that doors remain open after stopping in response to calls. a. Car Call: Hold open time adjustable between 3.0 and 5.0 seconds. b. Hall Call: Hold open time adjustable between 5.0 and 8.0 seconds. Use hall call time

when car responds to coincidental calls.


Q. Car Operating Panel: 1. One car operating panel with faceplate(s), consisting of a metal box containing vandal

resistant operating fixtures, mounted behind the car stationary front return panel(s). Faceplate shall be hinged and constructed of stainless steel, satin finish.

2. Suitably identify floor buttons, alarm button, door open button, door close button and emergency push-to-call button with SCS, Visionmark, or Entrada cast tactile symbols recessed flush mounted. Configure plates per local building code accessibility standards including Braille. Locate operating controls no higher than 48" above the car floor; no lower than 35" for emergency push-to-call button and alarm button.

3. Provide minimum 3/4" diameter raised or flush floor pushbuttons which illuminate to indicate call registration. Provide alarm button to ring bell located on car, and sound distress signal at control panel. Illuminate button when actuated.

4. Provide “door open” button to stop and reopen doors or hold doors in open position. 5. Provide “door close” button to activate door close cycle. Cycle shall not begin until normal

door dwell time for a car or hall call has expired, except firefighters’ operation. 6. Provide firefighters’ Phase II key switch with engraved instructions filled red. Include light

jewel, audible signal, and call cancel button. 7. Provide lockable service compartment with recessed flush door. Door material and finish

shall match car return panel or car operating panel faceplate. 8. Include the following controls in lockable service cabinet with function and operating

positions identified by permanent signage or engraved legend: a. Inspection switch. b. Light switch. c. Two-position exhaust blower d. Independent service switch. e. Constant pressure test button for battery pack emergency lighting. f. 120-volt, AC, GFCI protected electrical convenience outlet. g. Card reader override switch. h. Stop switch. i. Switch to select either floor voice annunciation, floor passing tone, or chime. j. Car lighting dimmer switch.

9. Provide black paint filled (except as noted), engraved, or approved etched signage as follows with approved size and font: a. Phase II firefighters’ operating instructions on main operating panel above

corresponding keyswitch filled red. b. Car number over main car operating panel. c. “Certificate of Inspection on File in Building Office on car operating panel. d. “No Smoking” on car operating panel. e. Car capacity in pounds on car operating panel

R. Car Top Control Station: Mount to provide safe access and utilization while standing in an upright position on car top.

S. Work Light and Duplex Plug Receptacle: GFCI protected outlet at top and bottom of car. Include on/off switch and lamp guard. Provide additional GFCI protected outlet on car top for installation of car CCTV digital video display.

T. Communication System: 1. “Push to Call,” two-way communication instrument in car with automatic dialing, tracking,

and recall features with shielded wiring to car controller in control room. Provide dialer with automatic rollover capability with minimum two numbers. Provide consolidator to allow multiple phones connected to one (1) line. a. “Push to Call” button or adjacent light jewel shall illuminate and flash when call is

acknowledged. Button shall match car operating panel pushbutton design. Provide


uppercase “PUSH TO CALL,” “HELP ON THE WAY” engraved signage adjacent to button.

b. Provide “Push to Call” button tactile symbol, engraved signage, and Braille adjacent to button mounted integral with car front return panel.

2. Provide two-way communication between car and control room if required.

2.9 CAR ENCLOSURE

A. Car Enclosure Passenger Elevator: Provide complete as detailed on Architectural drawings.

2.10 HALL CONTROL STATIONS

A. Pushbuttons: Provide One riser with flush mounted faceplates. Include pushbuttons for each direction of travel which illuminate to indicate call registration. Include approved engraved message and pictorial representation prohibiting use of elevator during fire or other emergency situation as part of faceplate. Pushbutton design shall match car operating panel pushbuttons. Provide vandal resistant pushbutton and light assemblies.

2.11 SIGNALS

A. Hall Lantern, All Car(s): Provide at each entrance to indicate travel direction of arriving car. Illuminate up or down LED lights and sound tone once for up and twice for down direction prior to car arrival at floor. Sound level shall be adjustable from 20 - 80 dBA measured at 5'-0" in front of hall control station and 3'-0" off floor. Illuminate light until the car doors start to close. Provide advanced hall lantern notification to comply with ADA hall call notification time. Lenses shall be minimum 2-1/2" in their smallest dimension.

B. Car Position Indicator: Alpha-numeric digital indicator containing floor designations and direction arrows a minimum of 1/2" high to indicate floor served and direction of car travel. Locate fixture in car front return panel above each car operating panel. When a car leaves or passes a floor, illuminate indication representing position of car in hoistway. Illuminate proper direction arrow to indicate direction of travel.

C. Hall Position Indicator, Car(s) 12-13-14: Alpha-numeric digital indicator containing floor designations and direction arrows a minimum of 1/2" high to indicate floor served and direction of car travel.

D. Faceplate Material and Finish: Stainless steel all fixtures.

E. Floor Passing Tone: Provide an audible tone of no less than 20 decibels and frequency of no higher than 1500 Hz, to sound as the car passes or stops at a floor served.

F. Voice Synthesizer: Provide electronic device with easily reprogrammable message and female voice to announce car direction, floor, emergency exiting instructions, etc.

2.12 CONTROL AND DISPLAY PANEL

A. Control Panel, Car(s) 1-2 and 3-4: Provide a control panel and color SVGA with the capability to activate, display, monitor, or control the following functions. 1. On/off means to place car in or out of service. When placed in “off” position, return car(s)

nonstop to designated floor and park with door(s) open for adjustable period of 1 to 3 minutes. At expiration of time, restore car to service.

2. Car operating on normal/standby power.


3. Car position and direction of travel. 4. Car calls. 5. Hall calls. 6. Operating mode. 7. Door status. 8. Delayed car. 9. Load weighing and by-pass. 10. Car to lobby feature. 11. Car in/out of service. 12. Secured floor control and code entry. 13. Alarm distress signal. 14. Card reader override. Individual car on/off provisions. 15. Fixtures and monitor shall be located as directed by Architect. Where applicable, identify all

indicators and manual switches with appropriate engraving. Provide wiring to control panel. Coordinate size and location with Building Console Supplier.

B. Firefighters’ Control Panel: Locate in building fire control room. Fixture faceplate, stainless steel satin finish, including the following features: 1. Car position and direction indicator (digital-readout or color SVGA display type). Identify

each position indicator with car number and group identification. 2. Indicator showing operating status of car. 3. Manual car standby power selection switch(es) and power status indicators. 4. Two-position firefighters’ emergency return switch(es) and indicators with engraved

instructions filled red.

Fixtures and monitor shall be located as directed by Architect. Where applicable, identify all indicators and manual switches with appropriate engraving. Provide wiring to control panel. Coordinate size and location with Building Console Supplier.

C. Firefighters’ Key Box: Flush-mounted box with lockable hinged cover. Engrave instructions for use on cover per Local Fire Authority requirements.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 SITE CONDITION INSPECTION

A. Prior to beginning installation of equipment examine hoistway and control room areas. Verify no irregularities exist which affect execution of work specified.

B. Do not proceed with installation until work in place conforms to project requirements.

3.2 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver material in Contractor’s original unopened protective packaging.

B. Store material in original protective packaging. Prevent soiling, physical damage, or moisture damage.

C. Protect equipment and exposed finishes from damage and stains during transportation, erection, and construction.


3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install all equipment in accordance with Contractor’s instructions, referenced codes, specification, and approved submittals.

B. Install control room equipment with clearances in accordance with referenced codes and specification.

C. Install all equipment so it may be easily removed for maintenance and repair.

D. Install all equipment for ease of maintenance.

E. Install all equipment to afford maximum accessibility, safety, and continuity of operation.

F. Remove oil, grease, scale, and other foreign matter from the following equipment and apply one coat of field-applied machinery enamel. 1. All exposed equipment and metal work installed as part of this work which does not have

architectural finish. 2. Control room equipment, hoistway equipment including guide rails, guide rail brackets, and

pit equipment. 3. Neatly touch up damaged factory-painted surfaces with original paint color. Protect machine-

finish surfaces against corrosion.


A. Work at jobsite will be checked during course of installation. Full cooperation with reviewing personnel is mandatory. Accomplish corrective work required prior to performing further installation.

B. Have Code Authority acceptance inspection performed and complete corrective work.

3.5 ADJUSTMENTS

A. Install rails plumb and align vertically with tolerance of 1/16" in 100'-0". Secure joints without gaps and file any irregularities to a smooth surface.

B. Static balance car to equalize pressure of guide shoes on guide rails.

C. Lubricate all equipment in accordance with Contractor’s instructions.

D. Adjust motors, power conversion units, brakes, controllers, leveling switches, limit switches, stopping switches, door operators, interlocks, and safety devices to achieve required performance levels.

3.6 CLEANUP

A. Keep work areas orderly and free from debris during progress of project. Remove packaging materials on a daily basis.

B. Remove all loose materials and filings resulting from work.

C. Clean control room equipment and floor.


D. Clean hoistways, car, car enclosure, entrances, operating, and signal fixtures.

3.7 ACCEPTANCE REVIEW AND TESTS

A. Review procedure shall apply for individual elevators, portions of groups of elevators, and completed groups of elevators accepted on an interim basis or elevators and groups of elevators completed, accepted, and placed into operation.

B. Contractor shall perform review and evaluation of all aspects of its work prior to requesting Consultant’s final review. Work shall be considered ready for Consultant’s final contract compliance review when all Contractor’s tests are complete and all elements of work or a designated portion thereof are in place and elevator or groups of elevators are deemed ready for service as intended.

C. Furnish labor, materials, and equipment necessary for Consultant’s review. Notify Consultant a minimum of five (5) working days in advance when ready for final review of elevator or group.

D. Consultants’ written list of observed deficiencies of materials, equipment, and operating systems will be submitted to Contractor for corrective action. Consultant’s review shall include as a minimum: 1. Workmanship and equipment compliance with Contract Documents. 2. Contract speed, capacity, floor-to-floor, and door performance comply with Contract

Documents. 3. Performance of following is satisfactory:

a. Starting, accelerating, running b. Decelerating, stopping accuracy c. Door operation and closing force d. Equipment noise levels e. Signal fixture utility f. Overall ride quality g. Performance of door control devices h. Operations of emergency two-way communication device i. Operations of firefighters’ service j. Operations of special security features and floor lock-off provisions k. Operations of remote monitoring devices

4. Test Results: a. In all test conditions obtain specified contract speed, performance times, stopping

accuracy without re-leveling, and ride quality to satisfaction of Purchaser and Consultant. Tests shall be conducted under both no load and full load condition.

b. Temperature rise in motor windings limited to 50° Celsius above ambient. A full-capacity one (1) hour running test, stopping at each floor for ten (10) seconds in up and down directions, may be required.

E. Performance Guarantee: Should Consultant’s review identify defects, poor workmanship, variance or noncompliance with requirements of specified codes and/or ordinances, or variance or noncompliance with the requirements of Contract Documents, Contractor shall complete corrective work in an expedient manner to satisfaction of Purchaser and Consultant at no cost as follows: 1. Replace equipment that does not meet code or Contract Document requirements. 2. Perform work and furnish labor, materials, and equipment necessary to meet specified

operation and performance. 3. Perform retesting required by Governing Code Authority, Purchaser, and Consultant.

F. A follow-up final contract compliance review shall be performed by Consultant after notification by Contractor that all deficiencies have been corrected. Provide Consultant with copies of the initial deficiency report marked to indicate items which Contractor considers complete.


3.8 PURCHASER’S INFORMATION

A. Provide three sets of neatly bound written information necessary for proper maintenance and adjustment of equipment within 30 days following final acceptance. Final retention will be withheld until data is received by Purchaser and reviewed by Consultant. Include the following as minimums: 1. Straight-line wiring diagrams of “as-installed” elevator circuits with index of location and

function of components. Provide one set reproducible master. Mount one set wiring diagrams on panels, racked, or similarly protected, in elevator control room. Provide remaining set rolled and in a protective drawing tube. Maintain all drawing sets with addition of all subsequent changes. These diagrams are Purchaser’s property.

2. Written Maintenance Control Program (MCP) specifically designed for the equipment included under this contract. Include any unique or product specific procedures or methods required to inspect or test the equipment. In addition, identify weekly, bi-weekly, monthly, quarterly, and annual maintenance procedures, including statutory and other required equipment tests.

3. Provide any necessary interface cards required for equipment maintenance, code mandated testing, and troubleshooting.

4. Lubrication instructions including recommended grade of lubricants. 5. Parts catalogs for all replaceable parts including ordering forms and instructions. 6. Four sets of keys for all switches and control features properly tagged and marked. 7. Diagnostic test devices together with all supporting information necessary for interpretation of

test data and troubleshooting of elevator system, and performance of routine safety tests. 8. The elevator installation shall be a design that can be maintained by any licensed elevator

maintenance company employing journeymen mechanics, without the need to purchase or lease additional diagnostic devices, special tools, or instructions from the original equipment Contractor. a. Provide on site capability to diagnose faults to the level of individual circuit boards

and individual discrete components for the solid state elevator controller. b. Provide a separate, detachable device, as required to the Purchaser as part of this

installation if the equipment for fault diagnosis is not completely self-contained within the controller. Such device shall be in possession of and become property of the Purchaser.

c. Installed equipment not meeting this requirement shall be removed and replaced with conforming equipment at no cost to the Purchaser.

9. Provide upgrades and/or revisions of software during the progress of the work, warranty period, and the term of the ongoing maintenance agreement between the Purchaser and Contractor.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 14 24 00 - HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED

A. Hydraulic elevator as follows: 1. Car S14 (Service)

B. All engineering, equipment, labor, and permits required to satisfactorily complete elevator installation required by Contract Documents.

C. Applicable conditions of General, Special, and Supplemental Conditions, and Division 1.

D. Preventive maintenance as described herein.

E. Additional equipment or finishes furnished under other sections, installed under this section: 1. Building announcement speaker(s) 2. In car Firefighters’ telephone jack(s) 3. Card reader security system

1.2 RELATED WORK PROVIDED UNDER OTHER SECTIONS

A. Hoistway and Pit: 1. Clear, plumb, substantially flush hoistway with variations not to exceed 1" at any point. 2. Bevel cants not less than 75° from the horizontal on any rear or side wall ledges and beams

that project or recess 4" or more into the hoistway. Not required on hoistway divider beams. 3. Divider beams between adjacent elevators at each floor, pit, and overhead. Supports at each

floor for car and counterweight guide rail fastening. Intermediate car guide rail support when floor heights exceed 14'-0" or as designated on contract drawings. Intermediate counterweight guide rail supports where floor heights exceed 16'-0". Building supports not to deflect in excess of 1/8" under normal conditions.

4. Installation of guide rail bracket supports in concrete. Inserts or embeds, if used, will be furnished under this Section.

5. Wall blockouts and fire rated closure for control and signal fixture boxes which penetrate walls.

6. Cutting and patching walls and floors. 7. Opening in hoistway wall or pit wall for hydraulic piping. Trench and backfill underground

piping. 8. Erect front hoistway wall after elevator entrances are installed. 9. Grout floor up to hoistway sills and around hoistway entrances. 10. Pit access ladder for each elevator. 11. Structural support at pit floor for buffer impact loads, guide rail loads, and cylinder loads. 12. Waterproof pit. Indirect waste drain or sump with flush grate and pump. 13. Protect open hoistways and entrances during construction per OSHA Regulations. 14. Protect car enclosure, hoistway entrance assemblies, and special metal finishes from damage. 15. Hoistway venting. 16. Hoistway pressurization. 17. Seal fireproofing to prevent flaking. 18. Structural steel channel frames, floor to building beam above and structural steel channel

header and steel angle sills for vertical bi-parting hoistway entrances.

October 21, 2011 Hydraulic Bridge Elevator Addendum #6 14 24 00 - 1


B. Machine Room and Machinery Spaces: 1. Enclosure with access. 2. Self-closing and locking access door. 3. Ventilation and heating. Maintain minimum temperature of 55° F, maximum 90° F.

Maintain maximum 80% relative humidity, non-condensing. 4. Paint walls and ceiling. 5. Class “ABC” fire extinguisher in each elevator machine room. 6. Seal fireproofing to prevent flaking. 7. Fire sprinklers where required.

C. Electrical Service, Conductors and Devices: 1. Lighting and GFCI convenience outlets in pit and machine room. Provide one additional non-

GFCI convenience outlet in pit for sump pump and oil return pump. 2. Three-phase mainline copper power feeder to terminals of each elevator controller in the

machine room with protected, lockable “open,” disconnecting means with auxiliary contacts to allow Elevator Contractor to electrically interlock battery power lowering unit.

3. Single-phase copper power feeder to each elevator controller for car lighting and exhaust blower with individual protected, lockable “open,” disconnecting means located in machine room.

4. Emergency telephone line to designated elevator control panel in elevator machine room. 5. Fire alarm initiating devices in each elevator lobby, for each group of elevators or single

elevator and each machine room to initiate firefighters’ return feature. Device at top of hoistway if sprinklered. Provide alarm initiating signal wiring from hoistway or machine room connection point to elevator controller terminals. Device in machine room and at top of hoistway to provide signal for general alarm and discrete signal for Phase II firefighters’ operation.

6. Temporary power and illumination to install, test, and adjust elevator equipment. 7. Firefighters’ telephone jack and announcement speaker in car with connection to individual

elevator control panels in elevator machine room and elevator control panel in firefighters’ control room.

8. Conduit from the closest hoistway of each elevator group or single elevator to the firefighters' control room and/or main control console. Coordinate size, number, and location of conduits with Elevator Contractor.

9. Means to automatically disconnect power to affected elevator pump unit and controller prior to activation of machine room fire sprinkler system, and/or hoistway fire sprinkler system. Manual shut-off means shall be located outside bounds of machine room.

10. When sprinklers are provided in the hoistway all electrical equipment, located less than 4'-0" above the pit floor shall be identified for use in wet locations.

11. Three-phase power feeder to each freight elevator power door controller in machine room with protected, lockable “open,” disconnecting means.

D. Standby Power Provision: 1. Standby power of normal voltage characteristics via normal electrical feeders to run one

elevator at a time in each single elevator unit at full-contract car speed and capacity. 2. Conductor from auxiliary form “C” dry contacts, located in the standby power transfer switch

to a designated elevator control panel in each single elevator unit. Provide a time delay of 30 - 45 seconds for pre-transfer signal in either direction.

3. Standby single-phase power to group controller, and each elevator controller for car lighting, exhaust blower, emergency signaling device.

4. Standby power to machine room ventilation or air conditioning. 5. Standby power to emergency communications device(s).



1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Terms used are defined in the latest edition of the Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators, ASME A17.1.

B. Reference to a device or a part of the equipment applies to the number of devices or parts required to complete the installation.

C. Provisions of this specification are applicable to all elevators unless identified otherwise.


A. Approved Providers: Alternate Providers must receive approval of Architect, Purchaser and/or Consultant at least 14 calendar days prior to bid date. 1. Hydraulic Elevator(s): CEMCOlift Elevator Systems, KONE, Minnesota Elevator, Otis,

Schindler, ThyssenKrupp. 2. Car Enclosure: Eklund's Inc., Gunderlin, Ltd., Hauenstein & Burmeister, KONE, Otis,

Schindler, ThyssenKrupp, Tyler. 3. Hoistway Entrance: Hauenstein & Burmeister, KONE, Otis, Schindler, ThyssenKrupp, Tyler.

B. Compliance with Regulatory Agencies: Comply with most stringent applicable provisions of following Codes, laws, and/or Authorities, including revisions and changes in effect; 1. Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators, ASME A17.1 2. Guide for Inspection of Elevators, Escalators, and Moving Walks, ASME A17.2 3. Elevator and Escalator Electrical Equipment, ASME A17.5 4. National Electrical Code, NFPA 70 5. Americans with Disabilities Act, ADA 6. Local Fire Authority 7. Requirements of SBC and all other Codes, Ordinances and Laws applicable within the

governing jurisdiction 8. Life Safety Code, NFPA 101 9. Uniform Federal Accessibility Standard, UFAS

C. Warranty: 1. Material and workmanship of installation shall comply in every respect with Contract

Documents. Correct defective material or workmanship which develops within one year from date of final acceptance of all work to satisfaction of Architect, Purchaser and Consultant at no additional cost, unless due to ordinary wear and tear, or improper use or care by Purchaser. Perform maintenance in accordance with terms and conditions indicated in the Preventive Maintenance Agreement.

2. Defective is defined to include, but not limited to; operation or control system failures, car performance below required minimum, excessive wear, unusual deterioration or aging of materials or finishes, unsafe conditions, the need for excessive maintenance, abnormal noise or vibration, and similar unsatisfactory conditions.

3. Make modifications, requirements, adjustments and improvements to meet performance requirements in Parts 2 and 3.

1.5 DOCUMENT VERIFICATION

In order to discover and resolve conflicts or lack of definition which might create problems, Provider must review Contract Documents for compatibility with its product prior to submittal of quotation. Purchaser will not pay for change to structural, mechanical, electrical, or other systems required to accommodate Provider’s equipment.



1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Within 60 calendar days after award of contract and before beginning equipment fabrication, submit shop drawings and required materials for review as outlined in Division I. Allow 30 calendar days for response to initial submittal. 1. Scaled or Fully Dimensioned Layout: Plan of pit, hoistway and machine room indicating

equipment arrangement, elevation section of hoistway, details of car enclosures, hoistway entrances, and car/hall signal fixtures.

2. Design Information: Indicate equipment lists, reactions, and design information on layouts. 3. Power Confirmation Information: Include motor horsepower, code letter, starting current,

full-load running current, and demand factor. 4. Fixtures: Cuts, samples, or shop drawings. 5. Finish Material: Submit 3" x 12" samples of actual finished material for Architect review of

color, pattern, and texture. Compliance with other requirements is the exclusive responsibility of the Provider. Include, if requested, signal fixtures, lights, graphics, Braille plates, and details of mounting provisions.

B. Acknowledge and/or respond to review comments within 14 calendar days of return. Promptly incorporate required changes due to inaccurate data or incomplete definition so that delivery and installation schedules are not affected. Provider’s revision response time is not justification for equipment delivery or installation delay.

1.7 PERMIT, TEST AND INSPECTION

A. Obtain and pay for permit, license, and inspection fee necessary to complete installation.

B. Perform test required by Governing Authority in accordance with procedure described in ASME A17.2 Guide for Inspection of Elevators, Escalators, and Moving Walks in the presence of Authorized Representative.

C. Supply personnel and equipment for test and final review by Consultant, as required in Part 3.

1.8 MAINTENANCE

A. Interim: 1. When one or more elevators are near completion and ready for service, the General

Contractor may accept elevators for interim use and place in service prior to substantial completion of project.

2. During this period General Contractor may pay a mutually agreed upon monthly amount per elevator for preventive maintenance. Indicate amount per unit per month with quotation.

3. Temporary acceptance form must be acceptable to General Contractor and signed prior to use. 4. General Contractor must provide or pay for temporary hoistway and car enclosures; protect

installed equipment and finishes; pay for and return elevators to elevator sub-contractor for all cleaning, repairs, and replacement of materials necessary to restore elevator to “as-new” condition prior to final acceptance.

B. Warranty Maintenance: 1. Provide preventive maintenance and 24-hour emergency callback service for one year

commencing on date of final acceptance by Purchaser. Systematically examine, adjust, clean, and lubricate all equipment. Repair or replace defective parts using parts produced by the Provider of installed equipment. Maintain elevator machine room, hoistway, and pit in clean condition.

2. Use competent personnel, acceptable to the Purchaser, supervised and employed by Provider.



3. The warranty maintenance period specified in Item 1 above shall be extended one (1) month for each three (3) month period in which equipment related failures average more than .25 per unit per month.

4. Purchaser retains the option to delete cost of warranty maintenance from new equipment contract and remit twelve (12) equal installments directly to Provider during period in which maintenance is being performed.

C. Preventive Maintenance: 1. Quote monthly cost for five year Preventive Maintenance Agreement commencing upon

completion of warranty maintenance. Submit quote based upon terms and conditions of the Preventive Maintenance Agreement, Section 14325. Base quotation on present labor and material cost. Price adjustment will be made at Agreement commencement date and thereafter as provided in Agreement.

2. Use competent personnel, acceptable to the Purchaser, employed and supervised by Provider.



PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SUMMARY

A. SERVICE ELEVATOR S14

NUMBER: BRIDGE ELEVATOR

CAPACITY: 3500 #

CLASS LOADING: PASSENGER CLASS A

CONTRACT SPEED: 125 FPM

MACHINE: HYDRAULIC PUMP

MACHINE LOCATION: SEE DRAWINGS

OPERATIONAL CONTROL: SELECTIVE COLLECTIVE MICROPROCESSOR BASED SYSTEM

MOTOR CONTROL: SINGLE SPEED AC WITH WYE DELTA START

POWER CHARACTERISTICS: 480 VOLTS, 3 PHASE, 60 HERTZ

STOPS 3 FRONT

OPENINGS: 3 FRONT

FLOORS SERVED: 3 FRONT

TRAVEL: 35’ – 0” ±

PLATFORM SIZE: 7’-0” WIDE X 6’-2” DEEP

MINIMUM CLEAR INSIDE CAR: 6’-8” WIDE X 5’-5” DEEP

ENTRANCE SIZE: 3’-6” WIDE X 7’-0” HIGH



ENTRANCE TYPE: SINGLE SPEED, CENTER OPENING

DOOR OPERATION: MEDIUM SPEED, HEAVY-DUTY DOOR OPERATOR, MINIMUM OPENING SPEED 1-1/2 F.P.S.

DOOR PROTECTION: INFRARED, FULL SCREEN DEVICE

HYDRAULIC TYPE: DUAL JACK HOLELESS

GUIDE RAILS: PLANED STEEL TEES

BUFFERS: SPRING

CAR ENCLOSURE: CAR CANOPY HEIGHT 10’-0”

MANUFACTURES STANDARD

SIGNAL FIXTURES: HALL AND CAR PUSHBUTTON STATIONS:

CAR POSITION INDICATORS: SINGLE HALL PUSHBUTTON RISER

IN CAR LANTERNS: SINGLE DIGITAL WITH CAR DIRECTION ARROWS

SELF-DIALING, VANDAL RESISTANT, PUSH TO CALL, TWO-WAY COMMUNICATION SYSTEM WITH RECALL, TRACKING AND VOICELESS COMMUNICATION

BOTH CAR ENTRANCE COLUMNS WITH VOLUME ADJUSTABLE ELECTRONIC CHIME OR TONE. SOUND TWICE FOR DOWN DIRECTION. VANDAL RESISTANT.

PHONE

ADDITIONAL FEATURES –

CAR ROLLER GUIDES

CAR TOP INSPECTION STATION STANDBY POWER TRANSFER (AUTOMATIC TO MAIN FLOOR) WITH MANUAL OVERRIDE IN FIREFIGHTERS’ CONTROL PANEL FIREFIGHTERS’ CONTROL PANEL AND REMOTE WIRING

FIREFIGHTERS’ SERVICE, PHASE I AND II, INCLUDING ALTERNATE FLOOR RETURN

BATTERY PACK STANDBY POWER PROVISION



STATIONARY CAR RETURN PANEL(S) ARRANGED FOR SURFACE APPLIED CAR OPERATING PANEL(S)

HOISTWAY DOOR UNLOCKING DEVICE ALL FLOORS

INDEPENDENT SERVICE FEATURE

CARD READER PROVISIONS ALL CARS

HYDRAULIC PUMP UNIT, AND CONTROLLER SOUND ISOLATION

TAMPER RESISTANT FASTENERS FOR ALL FASTENINGS EXPOSED TO THE PUBLIC

ONE YEAR WARRANTY MAINTENANCE WITH 24-HOUR CALL-BACK SERVICE

SILL SUPPORT ANGLES

FIREFIGHTERS’ TELEPHONE JACK

SIGNAGE ENGRAVING FILLED WITH BLACK PAINT OR APPROVED ETCHING PROCESS

NO VISIBLE COMPANY NAME OR LOGO

WIRING DIAGRAMS, OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS, AND PARTS ORDERING INFORMATION

SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC MEANS AND INSTRUCTIONS

NON-PROPRIETARY CONTROL SYSTEM AND DIAGNOSTICS PROVISIONS

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Steel: 1. Sheet Steel (Furniture Steel for Exposed Work): Stretcher-leveled, cold-rolled, commercial

quality carbon steel, complying with ASTM A366, matte finish. 2. Sheet Steel (for Unexposed Work): Hot-rolled, commercial quality carbon steel, pickled and

oiled, complying with ASTM A568/A568M-03. 3. Structural Steel Shapes and Plates: ASTM A36.



B. Stainless Steel: Type 302 or 304 complying with ASTM A240, with standard tempers and hardness required for fabrication, strength and durability. Apply mechanical finish on fabricated work in the locations shown or specified, (Federal Standard and NAAMM nomenclature), with texture and reflectivity required to match Architect’s sample. Protect with adhesive paper covering. 1. Satin: Directional polish finish (US32D)). Graining directions as shown or, if not shown, in

vertical dimension. 2. Mirror: Reflective polish finish (US32) with no visible graining. 3. Textured5WL as manufactured by Rigidized Metals or Windsor pattern 5-SM as

manufactured by Rimex Metals or approved equal with .050 inches mean pattern depth with bright directional polish (satin finish).

4. Burnished: Non-directional, random abrasion pattern.

C. Aluminum: Extrusions per ASTM B221; sheet and plate per ASTM B209.

D. Plastic Laminate: ASTM E84 Class A and NEMA LD3.1, Fire-Rated Grade (GP-50), Type 7, 0.050" ±.005" thick, color and texture as follows; 1. Exposed Surfaces: Color and texture selected by Architect. 2. Concealed Surfaces: Provider’s standard color and finish.

E. Fire-Retardant Treated Particle Board Panels: Minimum 3/4" thick backup for natural finished wood and plastic laminate veneered panels, edged and faced as shown, provided with suitable anti-warp backing; meet ASTM E84 Class “I” rating with a flame-spread rating of 25 or less, registered with Local Authorities for elevator finish materials.

F. Natural Finish Wood Veneer: Standard thickness, 1/40" thoroughly dried conforming to ASME/HPMA HP-1983, Premium Grade. Place veneer, tapeless spliced with grain running in direction shown, belt and polish sanded, book-matched. Species and finish designated and approved by Architect.

G. Paint: Clean exposed metal parts and assemblies of oil, grease, scale, and other foreign matter and factory paint one shop coat of standard rust-resistant primer. After erection, provide one finish coat of industrial enamel paint. Galvanized metal need not be painted.

H. Prime Finish: Clean all metal surfaces receiving a baked enamel paint finish of oil, grease, and scale. Apply one coat of rust-resistant primer followed by a filler coat over uneven surfaces. Sand smooth and apply final coat of primer.

I. Baked Enamel Finish: Prime finish per above. Unless specified “prime finish” only, apply and bake three (3) additional coats of enamel in the selected solid color.

2.3 CAR PERFORMANCE

A. Car Speed: ± 10% of contract speed under any loading condition.

B. Car Capacity: Safely lower, stop and hold 125% of rated load.

C. Car Stopping Zone: ±1/4" under any loading condition.

D. Door Opening Time: Seconds from start of opening to fully open; 1. Car BRIDGE: 1.8 seconds.

E. Door Closing Time: Seconds from start of closing to fully closed; 1. Car BRIDGE: 2.5 seconds.



F. Car Floor-to-Floor Performance Time: Seconds from start of doors closing until doors are 3/4 open (1/2 open for side opening doors) and car level and stopped at next successive floor under any loading condition or travel direction; 1. Car BRIDGE: 13.0 seconds.

G. Pressure: Fluid system components shall be designed and factory tested for 500 p.s.i. Maximum operating pressure shall be 400 p.s.i.

H. Car Ride Quality: 1. Horizontal acceleration within car during all riding and door operating conditions. Not more

than 20 mg peak to peak (adjacent peaks) in the 1 - 10 Hz range. 2. Acceleration and Deceleration: Smooth constant and not more than 3 feet/second² with an

initial ramp between 0.5 and 0.75 second. 3. Sustained Jerk: Not more than 8 feet/second³.

I. Noise and Vibration Control: 1. Airborne Noise: Measured noise level of elevator equipment during operation shall not

exceed 50 dBA in elevator lobbies and 60 dBA inside car under any condition including door operation and car ventilation exhaust blower on its highest speed.

2. Vibration Control: All elevator equipment provided under this contract, including power unit, controller, oil supply lines and their support shall be mechanically isolated from the building structure and electrically isolated from the building power supply and to each other to minimize the possibility of objectionable noise and vibrations being transmitted to occupied areas of the building.

3. Limit noise level in the machine room relating to elevator equipment and its operation to no more than 80 dBA.

4. All dBA readings to be taken three (3) feet off the floor and three (3) feet from the equipment using the “A” weighted scale.

2.4 OPERATION

A. Selective Collective Microprocessor Based (Car BRIDGE): Operate car without attendant from pushbuttons in car and located at each floor. When car is available, automatically start car and dispatch it to floor corresponding to registered car or hall call. Once car starts, respond to registered calls in direction of travel and in the order the floors are reached.

Do not reverse car direction until all car calls have been answered, or until all hall calls ahead of car and corresponding to the direction of car travel have been answered.

Slow car and stop automatically at floors corresponding to registered calls, in the order in which they are approached in either direction of travel. As slowdown is initiated for a hall call, automatically cancel hall call. Cancel car calls in the same manner. Hold car at arrival floor an adjustable time interval to allow passenger transfer.

Answer calls corresponding to direction in which car is traveling unless call in the opposite direction is highest (or lowest) call registered.

Illuminate appropriate pushbutton to indicate call registration. Extinguish light when call is answered.

B. Other Items: 1. Low Oil Control: In the event oil level is insufficient for travel to the top floor, provide

controls to return elevator to the main level and park until oil is added.



2. Independent Service: Provide controls for operation of each car from its pushbuttons only. Close doors by constant pressure on desired destination floor button or door close button. Open doors automatically upon arrival at selected floor.

3. Car-to-Lobby Feature: Provide the means for automatic return to the lowest level floor. Return car nonstop after answering pre-registered car calls, and park with doors open for an adjustable time period of 60 - 90 seconds. Upon expiration of time period, car shall automatically revert to normal operation and close its doors until assigned as next car or until the car is placed on manual control via in-car attendant or out-of-service switch.

C. Firefighters’ Service: Provide equipment and operation in accordance with Code requirements.

D. Automatic Car Stopping Zone: Stop car within 1/4" above or below the landing sill. Maintain stopping zone regardless of load in car, direction of travel, distance between landings.

E. Remote Monitoring and Diagnostics: Equip each controller with standard ports, interface boards, and drivers to accept maintenance, data logging, fault finding diagnostic, and monitoring computers, keyboards, modems, and programming tools. The system shall be capable of driving remote color CRT monitor(s) that continually scan and display the status of each car and call.

F. Motion Control: AC type with unit valve suitable for operation specified and capable of providing smooth, comfortable car acceleration and retardation. Limit the difference in car speed between full load and no load to not more than ±10% of the contract speed in either direction of travel.

G. Selective Leveling: Provide means to limit elevator car speed when traveling between adjacent floors.

H. Door Operation: Automatically open doors when car arrives at main floor. At expiration of normal dwell time, close doors. Reopen doors when car is designated for loading.

I. Power Door Operation: Open door and gate automatically when car arrives at a floor. Control door and gate closing by using constant-pressure buttons on car or at each floor. Provide passenger sequence operation. Provide reversing safety edge device on car gate. Provide automatic door and gate closing feature with warning buzzer.

J. Standby Lighting and Alarm: Car mounted battery unit with solid-state charger to operate alarm bell and car emergency lighting. Battery to be rechargeable with minimum 5-year life expectancy. Include required transformer. Provide constant pressure test button in service compartment of car operating panel.

K. Standby Power Operation: Upon loss of normal power, adequate standby power will be supplied via building electrical feeders to simultaneously start and run one car in each group and single cars at contract car speed and capacity. 1. Automatically return one car at a time, in each group and single car(s), nonstop to designated

floor, open doors for approximately 3.0 seconds, close doors and park car. During return operation, car and hall call pushbuttons shall be rendered inoperative. As each car parks, system shall immediately select the next car until all cars in a group have returned to the designated floor. If a car fails to start or return within 30 seconds, system shall automatically select the next car in the group to automatically return.

2. When all cars in a group have returned to the designated floor, one car in each group shall be designated for automatic operation. When a service demand exists for 30 seconds and designated car fails to start, next available car in the group shall be automatically selected for operation. a. Switch(es) shall be labeled “STANDBY POWER OVERRIDE” with positions marked

“AUTO” and appropriate car numbers controlled by each respective switch. Key shall



be keyed same as key utilized for firefighters' Phase I and II key switch. Key shall be removable in “AUTO” position only.

b. Switch shall override automatic return and automatic selection functions, and cause the manually selected car to operate. Manual selection shall cause car to start and proceed to designated floor and open and close its doors before standby power is manually transferred to next selected car.

c. Provide “STANDBY POWER” indicator lights (one per car) in firefighters’ control panel and security control panel. Indicator light illuminates when corresponding car is selected, automatically or manually, to operate on standby power.

3. Successive Starting: When normal power is restored or there has been a power interruption, individual cars in each bank shall restart at five second intervals.

2.5 MACHINE ROOM EQUIPMENT

A. Arrange equipment in spaces shown on drawings.

B. Pump Unit: Assembled unit consisting of positive displacement pump, induction motor, master-type control valves combining safety features, holding, direction, bypass, stopping, manual lowering functions, shut off valve, oil reservoir with protected vent opening, oil level gauge, outlet strainer, drip pan, muffler, all mounted on isolating pads. Enclose entire unit with removable sheet steel panels lined with sound-absorbing material. Design unit for 120 upstarts/hour.

C. Landing System: Solid-state, magnetic or optical type.

D. Controller: UL/CSA labeled. 1. Compartment: Securely mount all assemblies, power supplies, chassis switches, relays, etc.,

on a substantial, self-supporting steel frame. Completely enclose equipment with covers. Provide means to prevent overheating.

2. Relay Design: Magnet operated with contacts of design and material to insure maximum conductivity, long life and reliable operation without overheating or excessive wear. Provide wiping action and means to prevent sticking due to fusion. Contacts carrying high inductive currents shall be provided with arc deflectors or suppressors.

3. Microprocessor-Related Hardware: a. Provide built-in noise suppression devices which provide a high level of noise

immunity on all solid-state hardware and devices. b. Provide power supplies with noise suppression devices. c. Isolate inputs from external devices (such as pushbuttons) with opto-isolation modules. d. Design control circuits with one leg of power supply grounded. e. Safety circuits shall not be affected by accidental grounding of any part of the system. f. System shall automatically restart when power is restored. g. System memory shall be retained in the event of power failure or disturbance. h. Equipment shall be provided with Electro Magnetic Interference (EMI) shielding

within FCC guidelines. 4. Wiring: CSA labeled copper for factory wiring. Neatly route all wiring interconnections and

securely attach wiring connections to studs or terminals. 5. Permanently mark components (relays, fuses, PC boards, etc.) with symbols shown on wiring

diagrams. 6. Monitoring System Interface: Provide controller with serial data link through RJ45 Ethernet

connection and install all devices necessary to monitor items outlined in Section 2.13. Elevator contractor responsible to connect monitoring system interface to machine room monitoring compartment and LAN. Wiring from the LAN to the machine room monitoring compartment by others.

7. Provide controller or machine mounted auxiliary, lockable “open,” disconnect if mainline disconnect is not in sight of controller and/or machine.



E. Muffler: Provide in discharge oil line near pump unit. Design shall dampen and absorb pulsation and noise in the flow of hydraulic fluid.

F. Piping and Oil: Provide piping, connections and oil for the system. Buried piping shall be secondarily contained with watertight Schedule 40 PVC sleeves between elevator machine room and pit. A minimum of two sound isolation couplings shall be provided between the pump unit and oil line and the oil line and jack unit. Provide isolated pipe stands or hangers as required.

G. Noise/Vibration Isolation: All elevator equipment including their supports and fastenings to building, shall be mechanically and electrically isolated from the building structure and main line power feeders to minimize objectionable noise and vibration transmission to car, building structure, or adjacent occupied areas of building.

H. Sound Isolation: 1. Noise level relating to elevator equipment operation in machine room shall not exceed 80

dBA. 2. All dBA readings shall be taken three (3) feet off the floor and three (3) feet from equipment

using the "A" weighted scale.

2.6 HOISTWAY EQUIPMENT

A. Guide Rails: Planed steel T-sections for car of suitable size and weight for the application, including brackets for attachment to building structure. Provide rail backing to meet Code requirements. No additional structural points of rail attachment, other than those shown on the Contract Documents, will be provided.

B. Buffers: Spring type with blocking and support channels.

C. Hydraulic Jack Assembly: 1. Cylinder(s): Seamless steel pipe. Design head to receive unit-type packing and provide

means to collect oil at cylinder head and return automatically to oil reservoir. 2. Plunger(s): Polished seamless steel tubing or pipe. If plunger length exceeds 24 feet, provide

two or more sections not exceeding 16 feet in length, or coordinate installation of longer unit at the jobsite. Join sections by internal threaded couplings. Multiple section jack units shall be factory polished while assembled and marked for proper future reassembly. Isolate plunger from car frame(s).

3. Provide dual jack holeless application.

D. Jack Support and Fluid Shut-Off Valve(s): Provide steel pit channels to support jack assembly and transmit loads to building structure. Provide intermediate stabilizers as required. Provide manual on/off valve(s) in oil line(s) adjacent to pump unit and jack unit(s) in pit adjacent to jack unit(s).

E. Terminal Stopping: Provide normal and final devices.



F. Electrical Wiring and Wiring Connections-Provide NEMA waterproof throughout hoistway: 1. Conductors and Connections: Copper throughout with individual wires coded and

connections on identified studs or terminal blocks. Use no splices or similar connections in wiring except at terminal blocks, control compartments, or junction boxes. Provide 10% spare conductors throughout. Run spare wires from car connection points to individual elevator controllers in the machine room. Provide four pairs of spare shielded communication wires in addition to those required to connect specified items. Tag spares in machine room.

2. Conduit: Painted or galvanized steel conduit, EMT or duct. Conduit size, 1/2". Flexible heavy-duty service cord may be used between fixed car wiring and car door switches for door protective devices.

3. Traveling Cables: Flame and moisture-resistant outer cover. Prevent traveling cable from rubbing or chafing against hoistway or equipment within hoistway. Provide five (5) pair of shielded wires and two (2) RG-6/U type coaxial cables for card reader.

4. Auxiliary Wiring: Connect fire alarm initiating devices, emergency two-way communication system, firefighters’ phone jack, paging speaker, card reader, intercom, and announcement speaker and/or background music in each car controller in machine room.

G. Entrance Equipment: 1. Door Hangers: Two-point hanger roller with neoprene roller surface and suspension with

eccentric upthrust roller adjustment. 2. Door Tracks: Bar or formed, cold-drawn removable steel tracks with smooth roller contact

surface. 3. Door Interlocks: Operable without retiring cam. Paint interlock box flat black. 4. Door Closers: Spring, spirator or jamb/strut mounted counterweight type. Design and adjust

to insure smooth, quiet mechanical close of doors. 5. Hoistway Door Unlocking Device: Provide unlocking device with escutcheon in door panel

at all floors, with finish to match adjacent surface.

2.7 HOISTWAY ENTRANCES

A. Complete entrances bearing fire labels from a nationally recognized testing laboratory approved within the governing jurisdiction.

B. Frames: 14 gauge hollow metal at all floors. Bolted and lapped head to jamb assembly at all floors. Provide Arabic floor designation/Braille plates, centered at 60" above finished floor, on both side jambs of all entrances. Provide plates at main egress landing with “Star” designation. For designated emergency car, provide “Star of Life” designation plates at height of 78" – 84" above finished floor on both side jambs at all floors. Braille indications shall be below Arabic floor designation. Provide cast floor designation/Braille plates as manufactured by SCS, Vision Mark or Entrada.

C. Door Panels: 16 gauge steel, sandwich construction without binder angles. Provide leading edges of center-opening doors with rubber astragals. Provide a minimum of two (2) gibs per panel, one at leading and one at trailing edge with gibs in the sill groove entire length of door travel. Construct door panels with interlocking, stiffening ribs. Architectural metal cladding shall wrap around leading and trailing edge of panel and return a minimum of 1/2" on rear side of leading edge of panel.

D. Sight Guards: 14 gauge, same material and finish as hoistway entrance door panels. Construct without sharp edges.

E. Sills: Extruded aluminum.

F. Sill Supports: Structural or formed steel designed to support door sill based upon car loading classification. Mount to eliminate need for grout under the sill. Provide 5" x 5" x 1/2" (Service



Elevator) cold-rolled structural steel angle, extending full width of hoistway. Fasten to building structure at maximum 18" O.C.

G. Fascia, Toe Guards and Hanger Covers: 14 gauge furniture steel with black enamel.

H. Struts and Headers: Provide for vertical support of entrances and related material. Provide door open bumpers on entrances equipped with vertical struts.

I. Finish of Frames and Doors:

Car Floor Frames Door Panels

BRIDGE ALL Stainless Steel #4 Stainless Steel #4

2.8 CAR EQUIPMENT – PROVIDE EQUIPMENT SUITABLE FOR WEATHER EXPOSED ENVIRONMENT.

A. Frame: Welded or bolted, rolled or formed galvanized steel channel construction to meet load classification specified.

B. Platform: Isolated type, constructed of galvanized steel. Design and construct to accommodate load classification requirements. Provide Class “A” construction for passenger Bridge elevator.

C. Platform Apron: Minimum 14 gauge galvanized steel, reinforced and braced to car platform with Provider’s standard finish.

D. Guide Shoes: Roller type with three or more spring dampened, sound-deadening rollers per shoe. Maximum roller rotation speed, 350 rpm

E. Finish Floor Covering: Provided under other sections.

F. Sills: One piece extrusion with extruded extension between car entrance columns to face of car front return. Extruded extension to match finish of sill. 1. Car BRIDGE: aluminum

G. Doors: Provide as specified for hoistway entrance doors.

H. Door Hangers: Two-point hanger roller with neoprene roller surface and suspension with eccentric upthrust roller adjustment.

I. Door Track: Bar or formed, cold-drawn removable steel track with smooth roller contact surface.

J. Door Header: Construct of minimum 12 gauge galvanized steel, shape to provide stiffening flanges.

K. Door Electrical Contact: Prohibit car operation unless car door is closed.

L. Door Clutch: Heavy-duty clutch, linkage arms, drive blocks and pickup rollers or cams to provide positive, smooth, quiet door operation. Design clutch so car doors can be closed, while hoistway doors remain open.

M. Restricted Opening Device: Restrict opening of car door(s) outside unlocking zone.



N. Door Operator: Medium speed, heavy-duty, NEMA 4 waterproof door operator capable of opening doors at no less than 2-1/2 f.p.s.. Accomplish reversal in no more than 2-1/2" of door movement. Provide solid-state door control with closed loop circuitry to constantly monitor and automatically adjust door operation based upon velocity, position, and motor current. Maintain consistent, smooth and quiet door operation at all floors, regardless of door weight or varying air pressure.

Acceptable closed-loop door operators: 1. KONE AMD 2.0 ,AMD1.5 2. Otis AT 400, i Motion II (Optional) 3. Schindler QKS 14 Medium Duty 4. ThyssenKrupp HD91 StarTrac 5. G.A.L. MOVFR

O. Door Control Device - Weather proof: 1. Infrared Reopening Device: Black, fully enclosed device with full screen infrared matrix or

multiple beams extending vertically along leading edge of each door panel to minimum height of 7'-0" above finished floor. Provide additional beams full height of door panel(s). Device shall prevent doors from closing and reverse doors at normal opening speed if beams are obstructed while doors are closing, except during nudging operation. In event of device failure, provide for automatic shutdown of car at floor level with doors open a. Acceptable Infrared Reopening Device:

1) Cegard/MAX-154 by CEDES 2) Gatekeeper by Adams 3) Lambda II by Otis 4) Magic Edge by Tri-Tronics 5) Microlite by ThyssenKrupp 6) Microscan E by T.L. Jones 7) Pana40 Plus by Janus

P. Infrared Reopening Device - Weatherproof: Black, fully enclosed device with full screen infrared matrix or multiple beams extending vertically along edge of each car gate guide track to a minimum height of 7'-0" above finished floor. Obstruction of beams during gate closing shall cause immediate re-opening.

Q. Car Operating Panel: 1. One car operating panel(s) with faceplate(s), consisting of a metal box containing vandal

resistant operating fixtures, mounted behind the car stationary front return panel(s). Faceplate(s) shall be hinged and constructed of stainless steel, satin finish.

2. Suitably identify floor buttons, alarm button, door open button, door close button. Configure plates per local building code accessibility standards including Braille. Locate operating controls no higher than 48" above the car floor; no lower than 35" for emergency push-to-call button and alarm button.

3. Provide minimum 3/4" diameter raised floor pushbuttons which illuminate to indicate call registration.

4. Provide alarm button to ring bell located on car. Illuminate button when actuated. 5. Provide stainless steel vandal resistant red emergency stop switch or button at bottom of car

operating panel to interrupt car power supply. Maintain registered calls when feature is actuated and continue normal service after power is restored. Actuation of switch or button shall sound car alarm bell and illuminate alarm button. Arrange switch or button to sound main control panel distress signal when actuated. Mark device to indicate “push to run” and “pull to stop” positions.

6. Provide firefighters’ Phase II key switch with engraved instructions filled red. Include light jewel, buzzer, and call cancel button.



7. Provide lockable service compartment with recessed flush door. Door material and finish shall match car return panel or car operating panel faceplate.

8. Include the following controls in lockable service cabinet with function and operating positions identified by permanent signage or engraved legend: a. Inspection switch. b. Light switch. c. Independent service switch. d. Constant pressure test button for battery pack emergency lighting. e. 120-volt, AC, GFCI protected electrical convenience outlet. f. Card reader override switch. g. Stop switch. h. Switch to select either floor voice annunciation, floor passing tone, or chime.

9. Provide black paint filled (except as noted), engraved or approved etched signage as follows with approved size and font: a. Phase II firefighters’ operating instructions on main operating panel above

corresponding keyswitch filled red. b. Car number on main car operating panel. c. “No Smoking” on main car operating panel. d. Car capacity in pounds on main car operating panel.

R. Car Top Control Station: Mount to provide safe access and utilization while standing in an upright position on car top.

S. Work Light and Duplex Plug Receptacle: GFCI protected outlet at top and bottom of car. Include on/off switch and lamp guard.

T. Communication System: 1. Provide intercom system equivalent to Stentofon AlphaCom manufactured by Zenitel. 2. Firefighters’ telephone jack in car. 3. Provide two-way communication between car and machine room if required.

2.9 CAR ENCLOSURE

A. Car Enclosure Bridge Elevator: Provide complete as detailed on drawings and specified herein. Provide the following features. 1. Shell: Reinforced 14 gauge textured stainless steel formed panels as specified in Item 2.02.

Apply sound deadening mastic to exterior. 2. Canopy: Reinforced 12 gauge furniture steel formed panels with lockable hinged emergency

exit. Interior finish white reflective baked enamel. 3. Front Return Panels: Reinforced 14 gauge stainless steel, textured finish as specified in Item

2.02. 4. Entrance Columns and Transom: Reinforced 14 gauge, stainless steel, satin finish. 5. Car Door Panels: Reinforced minimum 16 gauge stainless steel textured finish as specified in

Item 2.02. Same construction as hoistway door panels. 6. Ventilation: Two-speed exhaust blower mounted to car canopy on isolating rubber grommets.

Provide with a diffusor and grille. Exhaust blower shall meet requirements of Item 2.03, I. 7. Lighting: Fluorescent fixture flush mounted in ceiling with protective diffusor and steel guard

over fixtures on car top.



2.10 HALL CONTROL STATIONS

A. Pushbuttons: Provide flush mounted riser adjacent to hoistway entrances. Include single call button and “in use” light which illuminates when hall call is registered. Pushbutton design shall match car operating panel pushbuttons.

2.11 SIGNALS

A. Car Direction Lantern: Provide flush-mounted car lantern in all car entrance columns. Illuminate up or down LED lights and sound electronic tone once for up and twice for down direction travel as doors open. Sound tone once for up direction and twice for down direction. Sound level shall be adjustable from 0 - 80 dBA measured at 5'-0" in front of hall control station and 3'-0" off floor. Provide adjustable car door dwell time to comply with ADA requirements relative to hall call notification time. Car direction lenses shall be arrow shaped with faceplates. Lenses shall be minimum 2-1/2" in their smallest dimension.

B. Car Position Indicator: Alpha-numeric digital indicator containing floor designations and direction arrows a minimum of 1/2" high to indicate floor served and direction of car travel. Locate fixture in car front return panel. When a car leaves or passes a floor, illuminate indication representing position of car in hoistway. Illuminate proper direction arrow to indicate direction of travel.

C. Faceplate Material and Finish: stainless steel all fixtures.

D. Floor Passing Tone: Provide an audible tone of no less than 20 decibels and frequency of no higher than 1500 Hz, to sound as the car passes or stops at a floor served.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 SITE CONDITION INSPECTION

A. Prior to beginning installation of equipment, examine hoistway and machine room areas. Verify that no irregularities exist which affect execution of work specified.

B. Do not proceed with installation until work in place conforms to project requirements.

3.2 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver material in Provider’s original, unopened protective packaging.

B. Store material in original protective packaging. Prevent soiling, physical damage, or moisture damage.

C. Protect equipment and exposed finishes from damage and stains during transportation, erection, and construction.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install all equipment in accordance with Provider’s instructions, referenced Codes, specification and approved submittals.

B. Install machine room equipment with clearances in accordance with referenced Codes and specification.



C. Install all equipment so it may be easily removed for maintenance and repair.

D. Install all equipment for ease of maintenance.

E. Install all equipment to afford maximum accessibility, safety, and continuity of operation.

F. Remove oil, grease, scale, and other foreign matter from the following equipment and apply one coat of field-applied machinery enamel. 1. All exposed equipment and metal work installed as part of this work which does not have

architectural finish. 2. Machine room equipment, hoistway equipment including guide rails, guide rail brackets, and

pit equipment. 3. Neatly touch up damaged factory-painted surfaces with original paint color. Protect machine-

finish surfaces against corrosion.


A. Work at jobsite will be checked during course of installation. Full cooperation with reviewing personnel is mandatory. Accomplish corrective work required prior to performing further installation.

B. Have Code Authority acceptance inspection performed and complete corrective work.

3.5 ADJUSTMENTS

A. Install hydraulic jack assembly and guide rails plumb and align vertically with tolerance of 1/16" in 100'-0". Secure guide rail joints without gaps and file any irregularities to a smooth surface.

B. Static balance car to equalize pressure of guide shoes on guide rails.

C. Lubricate all equipment in accordance with Provider’s instructions.

D. Adjust motors, valves, controllers, leveling switches, limit switches, stopping switches, door operators, interlocks, and safety devices to achieve required performance levels.

3.6 CLEANUP

A. Keep work areas orderly and free from debris during progress of project. Remove packaging materials on a daily basis.

B. Remove all loose materials and filings resulting from work.

C. Clean machine room equipment and floor.

D. Clean hoistways, car, car enclosure, entrances, operating and signal fixtures.

3.7 ACCEPTANCE REVIEW AND TESTS

A. Review procedure shall apply for individual elevators, portions of groups of elevators and completed groups of elevators accepted on an interim basis or elevators and groups of elevators completed, accepted, and placed into operation.



B. Provider shall perform review and evaluation of all aspects of its work prior to requesting Consultant's final review. Work shall be considered ready for Consultant's final contract compliance review when copies of Provider's test and review sheets are available for Consultant's review and all elements of work or a designated portion thereof are in place and elevator or groups of elevators are deemed ready for service as intended.

C. Furnish labor, materials, and equipment necessary for Consultant’s review. Notify Consultant a minimum of five (5) working days in advance when ready for final review of elevator or group.

D. Consultant’s written list of observed deficiencies of materials, equipment and operating systems will be submitted to Provider for corrective action. Consultant’s review shall include as a minimum: 1. Workmanship and equipment compliance with Contract Documents. 2. Contract speed, capacity, floor-to-floor, and door performance comply with Contract

Documents. 3. Performance of following is satisfactory:

a. Starting, accelerating, running b. Decelerating, stopping accuracy c. Door operation and closing force d. Equipment noise levels e. Signal fixture utility f. Overall ride quality g. Performance of door control devices h. Operations of emergency two-way communication device i. Operations of firefighters' service j. Operations of special security features and floor lock-off provisions k. Operations of remote monitoring devices l. Operations of elevator car air conditioner/heater

4. Test Results: a. In all test conditions, obtain specified contract speed, performance times, stopping

accuracy without re-leveling, and ride quality to satisfaction of Purchaser and Consultant. Tests shall be conducted under both no load and full load condition.

b. Temperature rise in motor windings limited to 50° Celsius above ambient. A full-capacity, one (1) hour running test, stopping at each floor for ten (10) seconds in up and down directions, may be required.

E. Performance Guarantee: Should Consultant’s review identify defects, poor workmanship, variance or noncompliance with requirements of specified Codes and/or ordinances, or variance or noncompliance with the requirements of Contract Documents, Provider shall complete corrective work in an expedient manner to satisfaction of Purchaser and Consultant at no cost as follows; 1. Replace equipment that does not meet Code or Contract Document requirements. 2. Perform work and furnish labor, materials, and equipment necessary to meet specified

operation and performance. 3. Perform retesting required by Governing Code Authority, Purchaser and Consultant.

F. A follow-up final contract compliance review shall be performed by Consultant after notification by Provider that all deficiencies have been corrected. Provide Consultant with copies of the initial deficiency report marked to indicate items which Provider considers complete. If additional reviews are required due to Provider’s gross non-compliance with initial and follow-up deficiency reports, consultant shall bill Provider at normal billing rates plus expenses, and Provider acknowledges it will pay for additional compliance reviews.



3.8 PURCHASER’S INFORMATION

A. Provide three sets of neatly bound written information necessary for proper maintenance and adjustment of equipment within 30 days following final acceptance. Final retention will be withheld until data is received by Purchaser and reviewed by Consultant. Include the following as minimums: 1. Straight-line wiring diagrams of “as-installed” elevator circuits, with index of location and

function of components. Provide one set reproducible master. Mount one set wiring diagrams on panels, racked, or similarly protected, in elevator machine room. Provide remaining set rolled and in a protective drawing tube. Maintain all drawing sets with addition of all subsequent changes. These diagrams are Purchaser’s property.

2. Lubrication instructions, including recommended grade of lubricants. 3. Parts catalogs for all replaceable parts including ordering forms and instructions. 4. Four sets of keys for all switches and control features properly tagged and marked. 5. Diagnostic equipment complete with access codes, adjusters manuals and set-up manuals for

adjustment, diagnosis and troubleshooting of elevator system, and performance of routine safety tests.

B. Non-Proprietary Equipment Design: Provide three sets of neatly bound written information necessary for proper maintenance and adjustment for equipment of within 30 days following final acceptance. Final retention will be withheld until data is received by Purchaser and reviewed by Consultant. Include the following as minimums; 1. Straight-line wiring diagrams of “as-installed” elevator circuits, with index of location and

function of components. Provide one set reproducible master. Mount one set wiring diagrams on panels, racked, or similarly protected, in elevator machine room. Provide remaining set rolled and in a protective drawing tube. Maintain all drawing sets with addition of all subsequent changes. These diagrams are Purchaser’s property. A legend sheet shall be furnished with each set of drawings to provide the following information; a. Name and symbol of each relay, switch, or other apparatus. b. Location on drawings, drawing sheet number and area, and location of all contacts. c. Location of apparatus, whether on controller or on car.

2. Printed instructions explaining all operating features. 3. Complete software documentation for all installed equipment. 4. Lubrication instructions, including recommended grade of lubricants. 5. Parts catalogs listing all replaceable parts including Provider’s identifying numbers and

ordering instructions. 6. Four sets of keys for all switches and control features properly tagged and marked. 7. Diagnostic test devices together with all supporting information necessary for interpretation of

test data and troubleshooting of elevator system, and performance of routine safety tests. 8. The elevator installation shall be a design that can be maintained by any licensed elevator

maintenance company employing journeymen mechanics, without the need to purchase or lease additional diagnostic devices, special tools, or instructions from the original equipment Provider. a. Provide on site capability to diagnose faults to the level of individual circuit boards

and individual discreet components for the solid state elevator controller. b. Provide a separate, detachable device, as required to the Purchaser as part of this

installation if the equipment for fault diagnosis is not completely self-contained within the controller. Such device shall be in possession of and become property of the Purchaser.

c. Installed equipment not meeting this requirement shall be removed and replaced with conforming equipment at no cost to the Purchaser.

9. Provide upgrades and/or revisions of software during the progress of the work, warranty period and the term of the ongoing maintenance agreement between the Purchaser and Provider.


Broward County Courthouse October 21, 2011 Hydraulic Bridge Elevator Addendum #6 14 24 00 - 22

END OF SECTION

Broward County Courthouse COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FACILITY MANAGEMENT

BID SET October 21, 2011 25 00 50 - 1

Addendum #3 Addendum #6

SECTION 25 00 50 – COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR BUILDING AUTOMATION AND

CONTROL SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. All work of this Division shall be coordinated and provided by a single Technology System

Contractor.

B. The work of this Division shall be coordinated with and interfaced with the associated work

of other trades. Reference the following Division Documents for details:

1. Division 01 – General Requirements

2. Division 08 – Openings

3. Division 11 – Equipment

4. Division 21 – Fire Suppression

5. Division 22 – Plumbing

6. Division 23 – Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning

7. Division 26 – Electrical

8. Division 28 – Security and Fire Alarm

9. Division 33 – Utilities

C. Technical Proposal

1. It is the intent of this specification to describe the performance requirements of

the BUILDING AUTOMATION AND CONTROL SYSTEM. Submit a

complete Technical Proposal with bid tender to the Prime Bidders. The

Technical Proposal shall be reviewed by the Owner within five days following

the bid. At minimum this submittal shall contain the following documentation

which shall become part of the Contract.

a. Executive Summary: Include highlights or salient information about the

technical proposal that summarizes why The County of Broward, Florida

would want to do business with your firm.

b. Refer to specification section 250200 “Broward County Facilities

Maintenance Division – Energy and Building Automation”.

D. The work of this Division shall be as required by the Specifications, Point Schedules and

Drawings.

E. If the BUILDING AUTOMATION AND CONTROL SYSTEM Contractor believes there

are conflicts or missing information in the project documents, the Contractor shall promptly

request clarification from the design team.

1.2 DEFINITIONS


BID SET October 21, 2011 25 00 50 - 2


A. BUILDING AUTOMATION AND CONTROL SYSTEM Contractor: A

manufacturer who manufactures the devices (ie: sensors, valves, controllers, network

devices) and installs the item(s) specified. Contractor shall be a solely owned branch

office of the nationally recognized company. The single Contractor to provide the

work of this Division. This Contractor shall be the primary manufacturer, installer,

commissioner and ongoing service provider for the work.

B. Analog: A continuously variable system or value not having discrete levels.

Typically exists within a defined range of limiting values.

C. Approval: The Contractor is responsible for obtaining approval, prior to commencing

any Work which would establish a financial obligation for the Owner, as well as for

any Work or aspect of the Work for which such prior approval has been specified.

D. Architect: The architect is “AECOM/Heery International/Cartaya”.

E. Facility Backbone: Facility Backbone is a network connecting different networks to

one another.

F. Binary: A two-state system where an “ON” condition is represented by one discrete

signal level and an “OFF” condition is represented by a second discrete signal level

each separated by a defined deadband. Typically used for on/off, open/close type

monitoring and control.

G. Conflicts: This term refers to any real or potential discrepancy between portions of

the Specification, which includes the entire project Specification, as well as all other

Contract Documents.

H. Control Sequence: An BACS pre-programmed arrangement of software algorithms,

logical computation, target values and limits as required to attain the defined

operational control objectives.

I. Demonstration: This process of verifying, by operation, movement or adjustment, of

an item or system by comparing the item or system performance against a standard or

standards as set forth in the specific requirements of the cited paragraph.

J. Direct Digital Control: The digital algorithms and pre-defined arrangements included

in the BACS software to provide direct closed-loop control for the designated

equipment and controlled variables. Inclusive of Proportional, Derivative and Integral

control algorithms together with target values, limits, logical functions, arithmetic

functions, constant values, timing considerations and the like.

K. Electrical Contractor: The company engaged by the Owner or it’s designated

representative to provide materials and services for Division 26 electrical work, as

defined and described in the Contract between the Electrical Contractor and the

Owner.

L. Building Automation and Control System (BACS): The total integrated system of

fully operational and functional elements, including equipment, software,


BID SET October 21, 2011 25 00 50 - 3


programming, and associated materials, to be provided by this Division and to be

interfaced to the associated work of other related trades.

M. Integration: The complete functional and operational interconnection and interfacing

of all work elements and nodes in compliance with all applicable codes, standards and

ordinances so as to provide a single coherent system as required by this Division.

N. Network: The total digital on-line real-time interconnected configuration of system

digital processing units, workstations, panels, sub-panels, controllers, devices and

associated elements individually known as network nodes. May exist as one or more

fully interfaced and integrated sub-networks, LAN, WAN or the like.

O. Furnish: The term “Furnish” and its derivatives when used in this Division shall mean

supply at the BUILDING AUTOMATION AND CONTROL SYSTEM Contractor’s

cost to the designated third party trade contractor for installation. BUILDING

AUTOMATION AND CONTROL SYSTEM Contractor shall connect furnished

items to the BACS, calibrate, test, commission, warrant and document.

P. Install: The term “Install” and its derivatives when used in this Division shall mean

receive at the jobsite and mount.

Q. Node: A digitally programmable entity existing on the BUILDING AUTOMATION

AND CONTROL SYSTEM network.

R. Or Equivalent: "Or equivalent," or words of similar intent, refers to systems or

equipment which are the products of a manufacturer, fabricator, or vendor which are

comparable or equal in quality and performance to the systems or equipment cited in

the Specification.

S. PC: IBM PC compatible Personal Computer

T. Product: This term means material, system, device or equipment.

U. Provide: The term “Provide” and its derivatives when used in this Division shall mean

to furnish, install in place, connect, calibrate, test, commission, warrant, document

and supply the associated required services ready for operation.

V. Software: The term “software” and its derivatives when used in these Division

documents shall mean all of programmed digital processor software, preprogrammed

firmware and project specific digital process programming and database entries and

definitions as generally understood in the BACS industry for real-time, on-line,

integrated BACS configurations.

W. Test: The systematic exercising of an item or system under specified conditions to

determine how the item or system compares to the performance specified for that item

or system or to a specified standard.

X. Wiring: The term “Wiring” and its derivatives when used in this Division shall mean

provide the wiring and terminations.


BID SET October 21, 2011 25 00 50 - 4


Y. Work: The material, equipment services, and labor required to construct and

complete the Project, as described in the Specifications and Drawings and as required

by the Contract Documents.

Z. The use of words in the singular in these Division documents shall not be considered

as limiting when other indications in these documents denote that more than one such

item is being referenced.

AA. Headings, paragraph numbers, titles, shading, bolding, underscores, clouds and other

symbolic interpretation aids included in the Division documents are for general

information only and are to assist in the reading and interpretation of these

Documents. They do not form a formal part of the Documents and may not be

consistent or complete in their use throughout the Documents.

BB. The following abbreviations and acronyms may be used in describing the work of this

Division:

ADC - Analog to Digital Converter

AFF - Above Finished Floor

AI - Analog Input

ANSI - American National Standards Institute

AO - Analog Output

ASC - Application Specific Controller

ASCII - American Standard Code for Information

Interchange

AWG - American Wire Gauge

BGP - Border Gateway Protocol

BICSI - Building Industry Consulting Service International

BRI - Basic Rate Interface, an ISDN interface

CAAM - Card Access and Alarm Monitoring

CAT-6 - Category 6 Copper Cable

CCTV - Closed Circuit Television

CMS - Cable Management System

CPP - Copper Patch Panel

CPU - Central Processing Unit

CR - Change Request

CRT - Cathode Ray Tube

CSU - Channel Service Unit

DAC - Digital to Analog Converter

DDC - Direct Digital Control

DI - Digital Input

DO - Digital Output

DSO - Carrier Service at 64 Kbps

DSU/CSU - Data Service Unit/Channel Service Unit

DS3 - Carrier Service equal to 28 T1s (44.736 Mbps)

DVR - Digital Video Recorder

EEPROM - Electronically Erasable Programmable Read Only

Memory


BID SET October 21, 2011 25 00 50 - 5


EIA - Electronic Industries Alliance

ELL - Electric Lock

ELS - Electric Strike

EMI - Electromagnetic Interference

EML - Electromagnetic Lock

FAS - Fire Alarm Detection and Annunciation System

FCC - Federal Communications Commission

FOPP - Fiber Optic Patch Panel

Ft - Feet (linear)

GbE - Gigabit Ethernet

Gbps - Gigabits per second

GBIC - Gigabit Interface Converter

GUI - Graphical User Interface

GWS - Guard Watchtour System

HOA - Hand-Off-Auto

ID - Identification

IEEE - Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers

I/O - Input / Output

INMS - Integrated Network Management System

IP - Internet Protocol

ISDN - Integrated Services Digital Network

ISR - OWNER Information Systems Department Server

Room

ITU International Telecommunications Union

Kbps - Kilobits per second

LAN - Local Area Network

lb - Pound

lbf - Pound-force

LCD - Liquid Crystal Display

LED - Light Emitting Diode

LF - Linear feet

LX/LH - GBIC interfaces for single mode fiber, long range

m - Meter

mm - Millimeter

µm - Micrometer or micron, a measure of optical

wavelength

MB - Mega-bytes

Mbps - Megabits per second

MCC - Motor Control Center

MDR - Main Distribution Room

MHz - Megahertz

MMF - Multimode Fiber

M/POP - Minimum Point of Presence, a carrier’s service entry

point into a facility

mpps - Millions of packets per second

N/A - Not applicable

NC - Normally Closed

NCF - Network Computer Facility


BID SET October 21, 2011 25 00 50 - 6


NEC - National Electric Code (NFPA 70)

NIC - Not In Contract

nm - Nanometer, a measure of optical wavelength

NO - Normally Open

NOC - Network Operations Center

OAT - Outdoor Air Temperature

OTDR - Optical Time Domain Reflectometer

PA - Port Adapter

PC - Personal Computer

PHID - Photo-Identification

PIN - Personal Identification Number

PRI - Primary Rate Interface, an ISDN interface

PSTN - Public Switched Telephone Network

PTZ - Pan-Tilt-Zoom

PZ - Power Zoom

QA - Quality Assurance

QC - Quality Control

QoS - Quality of Service

RAM - Random Access Memory

RAR - Remedial Action Request

REX - Request To Exit

RF - Radio Frequency

RFI - Radio Frequency Interference

RH - Relative Humidity

RJ-XX - Type of cable termination and port, e.g., RJ-45 for

CAT-6 cable

RMON - Remote Monitoring

ROM - Read Only Memory

RTD - Resistance Temperature Detector

SC - Type of connector used for optical fiber

SMF - Single Mode Fiber

SNMP - Simple Network Management Protocol

SONET - Synchronous Optical Network

SPDT - Single Pole Double Throw

SPST - Single Pole Single Throw

SVGA - Super Video Graphics Adapter

SX - GBIC interface for multi-mode fiber, short range

TBA - To Be Advised

TCP/IP - Transmission Control Protocol/Internet

Protocol

TDR - Time Domain Reflectometer

TIA - Telecommunications Industry Association

TR - Telecommunications Room

TTD - Thermistor Temperature Detector

T1 - Trunk Level 1, a digital transmission link with a total

signaling speed of 1.544 Mbps

UL - Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.

UPS - Uninterruptible Power System


BID SET October 21, 2011 25 00 50 - 7


UTP - Unshielded Twisted Pair, a form of copper cable

VAC - Volts, Alternating Current

VAV - Variable Air Volume

VCR - Video Cassette Recorder

VDC - Volts, Direct Current

VDU - Video Display Unit

VIS - Voice Intercom System

VLAN - Virtual Local Area Network

WAN - Wide Area Network

1.3 DESCRIPTION

A. The work of the single Technology BACS Contractor shall be as defined individually

and collectively in all Sections of this Division specifications together with the

associated Point Sheets and Drawings and associated interfacing work as referenced

in the related documents as listed in Part 1 of this Section.

B. The work shall consist of the provision of all labor, materials, tools, equipment,

software, software licenses, software configurations and database entries, interfaces,

wiring, tubing, installation, labeling, engineering, calibration, documentation, testing,

commissioning, training services, permits and licenses, transportation, shipping,

handling, administration, supervision, management, insurance, temporary protection,

cleaning, cutting and patching, warranties and items, even though these may not be

specifically mentioned in these Division documents which are required for the

complete, fully functional and commissioned system.

C. Provide a complete, neat and workmanlike installation. Use only manufacturer or

company employees who are skilled, experienced, trained, and familiar with the

specific equipment, software and configurations to be provided for this project.

D. The Technology Contractor shall be a recognized national manufacturer, installer and

service provider of Building Automation and Control System. Manufacturer's

Representatives, Wholesalers and organizations whose sole business is other than the

manufacture, installation and support of Building Automation and Control System

shall not be considered. Non-manufacturers BACS integrators shall have a minimum

of 15 years of experience with the manufacturer’s product line tto be considered

E. Manage and coordinate the BUILDING AUTOMATION AND CONTROL SYSTEM

work in a timely manner in consideration of the Project schedules. Coordinate

cooperatively with the associated work of other trades so as to assist the progress and

not impede or delay the work of associated trades.

F. The Owner reserves the right to purchase the materials and equipment specified in

this document, in whole or in part, and to require modification of pricing to include

installation only. This entitlement shall not obligate the Owner to purchase materials

or equipment.


BID SET October 21, 2011 25 00 50 - 8


G. The BUILDING AUTOMATION AND CONTROL SYSTEM as provided shall

incorporate, at minimum, the following integrated features, functions and services:

1. Information, alarm management and control functions.

2. Enterprise-level information and control functions.

3. Information management including monitoring, archiving, retrieval, and

reporting functions.

4. Diagnostic monitoring and reporting functions.

5. Remote monitoring.

6. Energy management.

7. HVAC monitoring and control

8. Indoor Air Quality monitoring and control.

9. Lighting Control System management.

10. Central Plant monitoring and supervisory management.

11. Power Monitoring and Control System management.

12. Emergency Generator monitoring

13. Fuel Tank monitoring interfaces.

14. Domestic Water monitoring


A. General

1. The Technology Contractor shall be a factory owned branch office that is regularly

engaged in the engineering, programming, installation and service of total integrated

Building Automation and Control Systems of similar size, scope and complexity.

2. The BUILDING AUTOMATION AND CONTROL SYSTEM Contractor shall have a

local company owned branch an office in Broward County, supplying complete

maintenance and support services on a 24 hour, 7-day-a-week basis.

3. The BUILDING AUTOMATION AND CONTROL SYSTEM Contractor shall be a

recognized national manufacturer, installer and service provider of BACS.

Distributors, manufacturer’s representatives and wholesalers will not be acceptable.

4. The Contractor shall be responsible for familiarizing each of its subcontractors with

all aspects of the Contract affecting each subcontractor respectively. The Contractor

shall be responsible for coordinating the Work of its subcontractors to prevent

interference and/or omissions of any kind.

5. As evidence and assurance of the contractor's ability to support the Owner's system

with service and parts, the contractor must have been in the BUILDING

AUTOMATION AND CONTROL SYSTEM business for at least the last ten (10)

years and have successfully completed total projects of at least 10 times the value of

this contract in each of the preceding five years.


BID SET October 21, 2011 25 00 50 - 9


6. The Technology contractor shall demonstrate its financial ability to complete the

project by including in the technical proposal, a letter from its surety company,

attached with a power of attorney, stating that it will execute a performance bond and

a labor and material bond in the penal sum of 150% of the bid amount upon an award

of a contract to the bidder. The surety company must be licensed to do business in the

state of which the project is being constructed and have a minimal AM Best rating of

A minus.

7. The Building Automation and Control System architecture shall consist of the

products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the production of Building

Automation and Control Systems, and shall be the manufacturer’s latest standard of

design at the time of contract award.

8. The BACS software shall be updated to the latest currently available revision at the

completion of the installation.

B. Quality Management Program

1. Provide a competent and experienced, full time on site, Project Manager employed by

the Technology Contractor. The Project Manager shall be supported as necessary by

other Contractor employees in order to provide professional management service for

the work. The Project Manger shall attend all scheduled Project Meetings and shall be

empowered to make technical, scheduling and related decisions on behalf of the

Technology Contractor. At minimum, the Project Manager shall:

a. Manage the scheduling of the work to ensure that adequate materials, labor and

other resources are available as needed.

b. Maintain the scheduling of the work and report monthly in writing to the

Architect on progress.

c. Manage the financial aspects of the Technology Contract.

d. Coordinate with the Site Supervisor and with the Architect and other trades as

necessary to maintain progress of the Contract.

1.5 REFERENCES

A. All work shall conform to the following Codes and Standards, as applicable:

1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Standards.

2. National Electric Code (NEC) and applicable local Electric Code.

3. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) listing and labels.

4. UL 217 Single and Multiple Station Smoke Detectors

5. UL 268 Smoke Detectors for Fire Protection Signaling Systems

6. UL 268A Smoke Detector for Duct Applications

7. UL 864 UOJZ Fire Protective Signaling Systems.

8. UL 864 UUKL Smoke Control.

9. UL 521 Heat Detectors.

10. UL 1480 Fire Alarm Signaling Devices.

11. UL 1971 Visual Fire Alarm Signaling Devices.

12. UL 916 Energy Management.

13. Factory Mutual (FM).

14. NFPA 70

15. NFPA 72

16. NFPA 101


BID SET October 21, 2011 25 00 50 - 10


17. American National Standards Institute (ANSI).

18. National Electric Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA).

19. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME).

20. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers

(ASHRAE).

21. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE).

22. American Standard Code for Information Interchange (ASCII).

23. Electronics Industries Association (EIA).

24. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA).

25. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).

26. Federal Communications Commission (FCC) including Part 15, Radio Frequency

Devices.

27. Americans Disability Act (ADA)

28. BICSI Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual (TDMM)

29. Code of Federal Regulations (CFR)

a. CFR 29 Part 1910.146 Permit-Required Confined Spaces Standard

b. CFR 47 Part 15 Radio Frequency Devices

c. CFR 47 Part 68 Connection of Terminal Equipment to the Telephone

Network

B. All work shall meet the approval of the Authorities Having Jurisdiction at the project

site.

BUILDING AUTOMATION AND CONTROL SYSTEM COORDINATION MATRIX

C. The demarcation of work and responsibilities between the BUILDING

AUTOMATION AND CONTROL SYSTEM Contractor and other related trades

shall be as outlined in the BUILDING AUTOMATION AND CONTROL SYSTEM

RESPONSIBILITY MATRIX herein

BUILDING AUTOMATION AND CONTROL SYSTEM RESPONSIBILITY MATRIX

WORK FURNISH INSTALL WIRE PATHWAYS PROVIDE

POWER

1 BUILDING

AUTOMATION AND

CONTROL SYSTEM

network computer

equipment, PC’s,

Fileservers, Workstations,

Printers, Network

equipment.

25

25

25

25

26

2 BACS software, firmware

and site specific

programming and database

entries.

25

25

N/A

N/A

N/A

3 Network Nodes 25 25 25 N/A 26

4 BACS low voltage wiring. 25 25 25 25 N/A


BID SET October 21, 2011 25 00 50 - 11


5 Line voltage wiring from

designated electrical panels

(by Div. 26) to BACS

equipment and nodes.

26 26 26 26 26

6 BACS power supplies,

signal conditioning, surge

protection and local

Uninterruptible Power

Supply Units.

25 25 25 N/A 26

7 BACS device piping such as

differential pressure

switches, pressure switches

and pressure sensors.

23 23 N/A N/A N/A

8 Variable Frequency Drives 2523 26 26 26 26

9 Manual valves and dampers. 23 23 N/A N/A N/A

10 Automatic control valves

with actuators

25 23 25 25 25

11 Automatic control dampers 25 23 N/A N/A N/A

12 Automatic control damper

actuators.

25 25 25 25 25

13 Combination fire/smoke

dampers with actuators, open

end switch and closed end

switch

25 23 25 low

voltage

26

25

26

25

14 VAV controllers, with

differential pressure sensor.

25 23 N/A N/A 26

15 VAV Box with Power

supplies / Transformers and

spring return actuators.

23 23 25 low

voltage

26

25

26

25

16 VAV Thermostats 25 25 25 26 25 N/A

17 Duct Smoke Detectors 28 23 28 26 28 28

18 Duct Smoke Detector remote

test station

28 28 28 26 28 N/A

19 BACS pipe insertion devices

such as thermowells, flow

measuring devices, and pipe

taps for pressure monitoring.

25 23 N/A N/A N/A

20 Not to be interpreted as part

of the BACS.

21 Fire suppression flow

switches and tamper

switches

23 23 28 28 N/A

22 Lighting Control Panel

Boards.

26 26 26 26 26

23 Lighting control contactors

in enclosure

26 26 26 26 26

24 Interior light level sensors 26 26 26 26 26


BID SET October 21, 2011 25 00 50 - 12


for ceiling installation

25 Interior lighting, local

dimming system

26 26 26 26 26

26 Do not have in project.

27 Line Voltage Wall Switches 26 26 26 26 26

28 Omitted.

29 Ceiling Mounted low voltage

occupancy sensors.

26 26 26 26 N/A

30 Omitted

31 BACS Control Interface

Node to support Lighting

Control

25 25 25 25 N/A

32 Omitted

33 BACS Interface Node to

support Power Monitoring

25 25 25 25 N/A

34 Omitted


support Emergency

Generators.

25 25 26 26 26

36 Omitted


Fuel Tank monitor.

25 25 22 22 26

38 Diesel Transfer Pump(s)

Monitor

25 25 25 25 26

39 Omitted.


support chillers.

25 25 25 25 26

41 Omitted


support Transfer Switch(s)

25 25 25 25 26

43 Domestic Water Flow to

BACS

22 22 22 22 26


support Domestic Water

Flow monitor

25 25 25 25 26

45 Totally separate.

46 Fireman’s Override Panel

Node with interfaces to Fire

Alarm and BACS

25 25 25 25 N/A

47 UL864 UUKL Smoke

Control Logic

25 25 N/A N/A N/A

48

49

50

1.6 SUBMITTALS


BID SET October 21, 2011 25 00 50 - 13


A. Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples

1. Prepare coordination drawings in accordance with Division 1, detailing major

elements, components, and systems of network equipment and materials in

relationship with other systems, installations, and building components.

2. The BUILDING AUTOMATION AND CONTROL SYSTEM Contractor shall

submit a list of all shop drawings with submittal dates within 30 days of

contract award. Within forty-five (45) days of receiving a Notice to Proceed, the

Contractor shall furnish the following in a single consolidated format:

a. The name of the person who will act as the Contractor’s official contact

with the Architect and Owner.

b. Permits. The Contractor shall obtain all required permits and provide

copies to the Architect and/or Owner.

c. Product Data: Complete manufacturer’s product literature for all

products to be used within the system(s), as well as any samples

requested by the Architect and/or the Owner.

3. Submit detailed installation drawings within 90 days of contract award.

4. Submittals shall be in defined packages. Each package shall be complete and

shall only reference itself and previously submitted packages. The packages

shall be as approved by the Architect and Engineer for scope.

5. Allow 15 working days for the review of each package by the Architect and

Engineer in the scheduling of the total BUILDING TECHNOLOGY work.

6. Each submittal shall have a cover sheet with the following information

provided: submittal ID number; date; project name, address, and title;

BUILDING TECHNOLOGY Contractor name, address and phone number;

BUILDING TECHNOLOGY Contractor project manager, and project engineer

names and phone numbers.

7. At a minimum, provide the following submittals:

a. Network architecture diagrams including all nodes and interconnections.

b. Schematics, sequences and flow diagrams.

c. Points list for each point in the BACS specification, including: Tag, Point

Type, System Name, Object Name, Expanded ID, Display Units,

Controller Type, Address, Cable Destination, Module Type, Terminal ID,

Panel, Slot Number, Reference Drawing, and Cable Number.

d. Shop drawings shall be to sufficient detail to allow the work to be built.

e. Graphic User Interface Screens: Include a sample of each GUI screen

type and associated menu penetrations to show hierarchy and functional

interrelationships.

f. Detailed Bill of Material list for each node, identifying: quantity, part

number, description, and optional features.

g. Control Valve Schedules. This spreadsheet type schedule shall include a

separate line for each valve and a column for each of the valve attributes,

including: Code Number, Configuration, Fail Position, Pipe Size, Valve

Size, Body Configuration, Close off Pressure, Capacity, Valve CV,

Calculated CV, Design Pressure, Actual Pressure, and Actuator Type.


BID SET October 21, 2011 25 00 50 - 14


h. Catalog product data sheets and manuals of all products used.

i. Training course outlines for each session.

8. Technology Contractor shall not order material or begin fabrication or field

installation until associated submittals are approved. Technology Contractor

shall be solely responsible for the removal and replacement of any item not

approved by submittal at contractors’ cost.

9. The Technology Contractor shall correct any errors or omissions noted in the

first review. The Technology Contractor shall revise the submittal and resubmit

for review. Any required third or subsequent review shall be at the cost of the

Technology Contractor. The Owner's reasonable costs for any third or

subsequent additional reviews, including the Consultants fees and direct

expenses, may be deducted by the Owner directly from the monies due to the

Technology Contractor under this Contract by way of a contract change.

10. Provide all drawings with Computer Aided Drafting (CAD).

1.7 RECORD DOCUMENTATION

A. All Drawings, Specifications and copies thereof furnished by Architect are and shall

remain the property of the Owner. They are to be used only with respect to this Project

and are not to be used on any other project. With the exception of one contract set for

each party to the Contract, such documents are to be returned or suitably accounted for

to the Architect at the completion of the Work. The Contractor admits that the

documents contain vital and sensitive information about the Owner's Project and

communications network, and warrants to take due and reasonable care to safeguard

this information during the course of the Project, including all documents lawfully

retained after the completion of the Project.

B. No systems, equipment or materials shall be ordered or purchased and no Work shall

be performed without Drawings and Specifications clearly marked to indicate that

appropriate reviews have been conducted by the Architect and/or their duly appointed

representatives. Such acceptance shall not relieve the Contractor of his obligations

herein. Such reviews by the Architect, and/or their representatives, shall only be for

general compliance with the Contract Documents and shall not be deemed an approval

or acceptance of correctness and accuracy of dimensions, details, and related

information. Such reviews shall not relieve the Contractor of his obligations under

this Contract.

1.8 WARRANTY/WARRANTY-MAINTENANCE

C. Refer to specification section 250200 “Broward County Facilities Maintenance

Division – Energy and Building Automation”.

PART 2 – PRODUCT (Not Applicable)

2.1 FIREFIGHTER’S SMOKE CONTROL PANEL

A. General


BID SET October 21, 2011 25 00 50 - 15


The Firefighter’s Smoke Control Panel is intended to be installed in conjunction with

heating-ventilating-air conditioning (HVAC) equipment to form a system for

controlling the flow of smoke in the building during a fire condition in accordance with

ANSI/NFPA 92A, "Standard for Smoke-Control Systems Utilizing Barriers and

Pressure Differences," and ANSI/NFPA 92B, "Standard for Smoke Management

Systems in Malls, Atria, and Large Spaces." It is intended to perform specific functions

related to a smoke-control system as described in the smoke-control system

engineering analysis and mechanical drawing plans of the contract documents.

Individual control capability shall be provided for equipment serving each smoke

control zone as far as stairway pressurization fans, smoke exhaust fans, supply fans,

return and exhaust fans, elevator shaft fans and other operating equipment. These

individual components shall be provided with status pilot-lamp type indicators in

accordance with applicable building code requirements and form a complex system to

be annunciated and controlled per zone.

The control panel shall be a graphic display with switches and indicators in accordance

with applicable building code requirements. The control panel shall be mountable as

either a flush or surface mounted enclosure.

B. Construction

The control panel shall be constructed with 0.125-inch aluminum substrate and a 7-

mil polyester film overlay. The polyester film overlay shall be protected by a non-

glare textured coating, which is non-yellowing, durable, and scratch resistant. LEDs,

resistors, diodes, etc. shall be mounted on printed circuit boards (PCBs). All wiring

to the PCBs shall be made on solder type terminal turrets. All switches shall be securely

mounted to the panel.

C. Graphic

1. Graphic Colors: The film overlay shall be a graphic as shown in the

architect’s plan with black lines and legends, and colored background

areas. The graphic shall be made of 7-mil photographic film, having all

accent colors applied to the backside of the film. Important areas such as

elevator shafts, stairwells, and main air ducts shall be highlighted for easy

identification. The panel supplier shall furnish a color chart with a minimum

of 22 accent colors for architect selection.

2. Graphic Surface: The working surface (polyester film) shall be bonded to the

aluminum substrate with an adhesive that has been proven not to delaminate

in similar applications. The adhesive shall achieve 100% bonding without any

creases, bumps, or blemishes in the working surface (face) of the graphic.

The working surface of the graphic shall be textured and non-glare.

Translucent areas shall be made in the overlay for backlighted indicators.

LEDs shall not protrude through the polyester film overlay. Backlit areas

shall be subdued until the LED is illuminated. The illumination of any

indicator shall be clearly visible from any viewing angle in front of the

working surface of the graphic.


BID SET October 21, 2011 25 00 50 - 16


D. Substrate

The aluminum substrate shall have holes for LEDs and switches. The substrate shall

have holes drilled and tapped for mounting the printed circuit boards. The aluminum

substrate shall have a clear irridited finish to prevent oxidation.

E. Indicators

The indicators shall be high intensity LEDs, T-1 3/4-in size, and rated for normal

operation at a current of 20mA. The LEDs shall have an operating life of a

minimum of 170,000 hours of continuous or pulsed operation. The LED lens body

shall be constructed of high impact plastic. All LEDs shall be mounted on .062” printed

circuit boards constructed of epoxy glass material, NEMA Type FR-4, Grade 10.

Resistors and diodes for current limiting and LED test shall also be mounted on the

printed circuit boards. Solder type, pressed in turrets shall be provided for electrical

connections to the LEDs. All field wiring shall terminate on modular screw clamp

type terminals or connectors located in the rear of the enclosure.

F. Switches

Rotary switches shall be used for specific panel operations unless other switch

types are specified. A key switch shall be used for panel enable operation when

specified. Switches shall be rated for the load served. A momentary pushbutton shall

be provided for simultaneous testing of all LEDS. All switch wiring shall be terminated

on modular screw clamp type terminal strips or connectors mounted in the rear of the

enclosure.

G. Enclosure

The enclosure shall be made from cold rolled steel and be assembled using all

welded and formed steel construction. The enclosure shall be primed and painted

with a baked enamel and have a textured finish. A security door with viewing window

may be supplied to prevent unauthorized operation of the control panel switches.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION PRACTICES

A. BUILDING TECHNOLOGY Wiring/Optical Fiber

1. All conduit, wiring, optical fiber, accessories and connections required for the

complete operational installation of the Building Automation and Control

System, as herein specified, shall be provided by the BUILDING


BID SET October 21, 2011 25 00 50 - 17


TECHNOLOGY Contractor unless specifically detailed on the Drawings to be

furnished or provided by another Division. BUILDING TECHNOLOGY

details are depicted on the drawings.

2. All wiring shall comply with all local and national electric codes.

3. All BUILDING TECHNOLOGY wiring and optical fiber materials and

installation methods shall comply with BUILDING TECHNOLOGY

manufacturer recommendations.

4. Wireless devices shall be applied to the greatest extent possible. Document the

location of all wireless devices, transmitting nodes and receivers.

5. The sizing type and provision of cable, and communications trunking shall be

the design responsibility of the BUILDING TECHNOLOGY Contractor. If

complications arise, however, due to the incorrect selection of cable,

communications trunking by the BUILDING TECHNOLOGY Contractor, the

Contractor shall be responsible for all costs incurred in replacing the selected

components.

6. Class 2 Wiring

a. All Class 2 (24VAC or less) wiring shall be installed in conduit unless

otherwise specified.

b. Conduit is not required for Class 2 wiring in concealed accessible

locations. Class 2 wiring not installed in conduit shall be supported every

5’ from the building structure utilizing metal hangers designed for this

application. Wiring shall be installed parallel to the building structural

lines. All wiring shall be installed in accordance with local code

requirements.

c. Class 2 signal wiring and 24VAC power can be run in the same conduit

or pathway. Wiring 120VAC and greater shall not share the same conduit

with Class 2 signal wiring.

B. BACS Line Voltage Power Source

1. 120-volt AC circuits used for the Building Automation and Control System

shall be taken from panelboards and circuit breakers provided by Division 26.

2. Circuits used for the BACS shall be dedicated to the BACS and shall not be

used for any other purposes.

3. DDC terminal unit controllers may share 120-volt AC power from electric

heater circuits if acceptable by the BACS manufacturer.

C. Penetrations

1. Fire-stopping shall be provided as outlined by the coordination matrix.

2. All openings in fire proofed or fire stopped components shall be closed by using

approved UL fire resistive sealant.

3. All wiring, cabling and/or optical fiber passing through penetrations, including

walls, shall be in conduit or enclosed raceway.


BID SET October 21, 2011 25 00 50 - 18


4. Penetrations of floor slabs shall be by core drilling. All penetrations shall be

plumb, true, and square.

5. No penetrations in structural elements shall be made before receipt of written

approval from the architect.

D. BUILDING TECHNOLOGY Identification Standards

1. Node Identification: All nodes shall be identified by a permanent label fastened

to the outside of the enclosure. Labels shall be suitable for the node location.

2. Cable shall be labeled at a minimum of every 18” with the BUILDING

AUTOMATION AND CONTROL SYSTEM manufacturer’s name and the

type of signal carried within the cable, i.e. Analog Input, Analog Output, Binary

Input, Binary Output, 24 VAC.

a. Buiding Automation System

Analog Input Cable Yellow

Analog Output Cable Tan

Binary Input Cable Orange

Binary Output Cable Violet

24 VAC Cable Gray with Black trace

General Purpose Cable Natural

Tier 1 Comm Cable Purple

3. Raceway Identification. All the covers to junction and pull boxes of the

BUILDING TECHNOLOGY raceways shall be painted with the appropriate

color by the company installing said pathway.

4. Wire Identification. All low and line voltage BUILDING TECHNOLOGY

wiring shall be identified by a number, as referenced to the associated shop

drawing and as-built drawing, at each end of the conductor or cable.

Identification number shall be permanently secured to the conductor or cable

and shall be a printed type label.

E. BUILDING TECHNOLOGY Node Installation

1. The BUILDING TECHNOLOGY nodes shall be located as indicated at an

elevation of not less than 2 feet from the bottom edge of the panel to the

finished floor. Each node shall be anchored per the manufacturer’s

recommendations.

2. The BUILDING TECHNOLOGY contractor shall be responsible for

coordinating node locations with other trades.

3. Provide proper access to all nodes as recommended by the manufacturer.

F. Input / Output Devices

1. All Input and Output devices shall be installed per the manufacturer

recommendation

2. Locate components of the BUILDING TECHNOLOGY in accessible local

control panels and equipment rooms wherever possible.


BID SET October 21, 2011 25 00 50 - 19


3.2 TRAINING

A. Refer to specification section 250200 “Broward County Facilities Maintenance


3.3 COMMISSIONING

A. Refer to specification section 250200 “Broward County Facilities Maintenance


3.4 BUILDING TECHNOLOGY SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS

A. BUILDING TECHNOLOGY Reports

1. Define custom reports required for this project. Examples: tenant billing,

chiller efficiency reports, alarm reports, run time summaries, additional details

to be determined. The contractor shall include an allowance of 80 hours for the

preparation of custom reports.

2. The contractor shall request permission from the architect to draw against the

80 hour allowance, prior to its use.

B. Graphic Displays

1. Provide a color graphic system flow diagram display for each system with all

points as indicated on the point list.

2. Provide a color graphic display for each floor in the facility. Indicate each

HVAC/Lighting zone and Smoke Control zone, color coded to indicate zone

values and status.

C. OWS Schedule

ID TYPE LOCATION FUNCTION NOTES

OWS1 Desktop

PC

EMS Office Penthouse,

Level 21

Integrated

BACS

Full desktop

functionality

required

Integrated BACS = HVAC Monitoring & Control, Lighting Control, Energy

Management, Utility Monitoring and Control, Power Monitoring &

Management, and General Monitoring & Control.

D. Printer Schedule

ID TYPE LOCATION FUNCTION NOTES

Printer 1 Laserjet

Printer

EMS Office

Penthouse, Level 21

Integrated

BACS

Report print

functionality

required

Printer 2 24-pin

tractor feed

EMS Office

Penthouse, Level 21

Alarm printer

END OF SECTION 250050

Broward County Courthouse ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM/MASS NOTIFICATION SYSTEM NEW TOWER August 15, 2011October 21, 2011 28 31 11 - 1 Bid SetAddendum #6

SECTION 28 31 11 - ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM/MASS NOTIFICATION SYSTEM - NEW TOWER

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Fire-alarm control unit. 2. Manual fire-alarm boxes. 3. System smoke detectors. 4. Heat detectors. 5. Notification appliances. 6. Firefighters' two-way telephone communication service. 7. Magnetic door holders. 8. Voice Command Centers. 9. Addressable interface device. 10. Digital alarm communicator transmitter. 11. System printer. 12. UPS

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. LED: Light-emitting diode.

B. NICET: National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies.

1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Noncoded addressable system, with automatic sensitivity control of certain smoke detectors and multiplexed signal transmission, dedicated to fire-alarm service only.

B. Distributed network of node locate throughout the facility.

1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: For fire-alarm system. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Comply with recommendations in the "Documentation" Section of the "Fundamentals of Fire

Alarm Systems" Chapter in NFPA 72. 2. Include voltage drop calculations for notification appliance circuits.


3. Include battery-size calculations. 4. Include performance parameters and installation details for each detector, verifying that each

detector is listed for complete range of air velocity, temperature, and humidity possible when air-handling system is operating.

5. Include plans, sections, and elevations of heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning ducts, drawn to scale and coordinating installation of duct smoke detectors and access to them. Show critical dimensions that relate to placement and support of sampling tubes, detector housing, and remote status and alarm indicators. Locate detectors according to manufacturer's written recommendations.

6. Include voice/alarm signaling-service equipment rack or console layout, grounding schematic, amplifier power calculation, and single-line connection diagram.

7. Include floor plans to indicate final outlet locations showing address of each addressable device. Show size and route of cable and conduits.

C. General Submittal Requirements: 1. Submittals shall be approved by authorities having jurisdiction prior to submitting them to

Building Construction Manager. 2. Shop Drawings shall be prepared by persons with the following qualifications:

a. Trained and certified by manufacturer in fire-alarm system design. b. NICET-certified fire-alarm technician, Level IV minimum. c. Licensed or certified by authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For smoke and heat detectors indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1. Drawings showing the location of each smoke and heat detector, ratings of each, and installation

details as needed to comply with listing conditions of the detector. 2. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting the spacing and sensitivity of detection,

complying with NFPA 72.

1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

B. Field quality-control reports.

1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire-alarm systems and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," deliver copies to authorities having jurisdiction and include the following: 1. Comply with the "Records" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in

NFPA 72. 2. Provide "Record of Completion Documents" according to NFPA 72 article "Permanent Records"

in the "Records" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter. 3. Record copy of site-specific software. 4. Provide "Maintenance, Inspection and Testing Records" according to NFPA 72 article of the same

name and include the following: a. Frequency of testing of installed components. b. Frequency of inspection of installed components. c. Requirements and recommendations related to results of maintenance. d. Manufacturer's user training manuals.

5. Manufacturer's required maintenance related to system warranty requirements.


6. Abbreviated operating instructions for mounting at fire-alarm control unit.

B. Software and Firmware Operational Documentation: 1. Software operating and upgrade manuals. 2. Program Software Backup: On magnetic media or compact disk, complete with data files. 3. Device address list. 4. Printout of software application and graphic screens.

1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Lamps for Remote Indicating Lamp Units: Quantity equal to 5 percent of amount installed, but

no fewer than 1 unit. 2. Lamps for Strobe Units: Quantity equal to 5 percent of amount installed, but no fewer than 1

unit. 3. Smoke Detectors, Fire Detectors: Quantity equal to 10 percent of amount of each type installed,

but no fewer than 1 unit of each type. 4. Detector Bases: Quantity equal to 2 percent of amount of each type installed, but no fewer than 1

unit of each type. 5. Keys and Tools: One extra set for access to locked and tamperproofed components. 6. Audible and Visual Notification Appliances: Quantity equal to 5 percent of amount of each type

installed, but no fewer than 1 unit of each type. of each type installed. 7. Fuses: Two of each type installed in the system.


A. Installer Qualifications: Personnel shall be trained and certified by manufacturer for installation of units required for this Project.

B. Installer Qualifications: Installation shall be by personnel certified by NICET as fire-alarm Level III technician.

C. Source Limitations for Fire-Alarm System and Components: Obtain fire-alarm system from single source from single manufacturer. Components shall be compatible with, and operate as, an extension of existing system.

D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

E. NFPA Certification: Obtain certification according to NFPA 72 by a UL-listed alarm company.

1.10 SOFTWARE SERVICE AGREEMENT

A. Comply with UL 864.

B. Technical Support: Beginning with Substantial Completion, provide software support for two years.

C. Upgrade Service: Update software to latest version at Project completion. Install and program software upgrades that become available within two years from date of Substantial Completion. Upgrading


software shall include operating system. Upgrade shall include new or revised licenses for use of software. 1. Provide 30 days' notice to Owner to allow scheduling and access to system and to allow Owner to

upgrade computer equipment if necessary.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following : 1. Amseco - a Potter brand; Potter Electric Signal Company. 2. Bosch Security Systems. 3. Commercial Products Group/CPG Life Safety Signals. 4. Federal Signal Corporation. 5. GE Infrastructure; a unit of General Electric Company. 6. Gentex Corporation. 7. Harrington Signal, Inc. 8. NOTIFIER; a Honeywell company. 9. Siemens Building Technologies, Inc.; Fire Safety Division. 10. Silent Knight; a Honeywell company. 11. SimplexGrinnell LP; a Tyco International company. 12. American Power Conversion (APC) 13. Lowell Manufacturing Company 14. Johnson Controls – Notifier OEM. 15. Protectowire

2.2 SYSTEMS OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION

A. Fire-alarm signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and systems: 1. Manual stations. 2. Heat detectors. 3. Flame detectors. 4. Smoke detectors. 5. Duct smoke detectors. 6. Verified automatic alarm operation of smoke detectors. 7. Automatic sprinkler system water flow. 8. Heat detectors in elevator shaft and pit. 9. Fire-extinguishing system operation.

10. 11.10. Aspirating Type Smoke Detectors

B. Fire-alarm signal shall initiate the following actions as noted below and shown in the fire alarm operation matrix located at the end of this specification: 1. Continuously operate alarm notification appliances 2. Activate pre-signal chime in control room. If alarm is not cleared after 15 seconds, system shall

automatically activate notification devices. 3. Identify alarm at fire-alarm control unit. 4. Transmit an alarm signal to the remote alarm receiving station. 5. Unlock electric door locks in designated egress paths. 6. Release fire and smoke doors held open by magnetic door holders. 7. Activate voice/alarm communication system.


8. Activate smoke-control system (smoke management) at firefighter smoke-control system panel. Smoke management system will activate stairwell pressurization, elevator shaft pressurization, close smoke dampers, activate smoke evacuation fans and configure air handlers for smoke management functions.

9. Recall elevators to primary or alternate recall floors. 10. Record events in the system memory. 11. Record events by the system printer.

C. Supervisory signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and actions: 1. Valve supervisory switch. 2. Elevator shunt-trip supervision. 3. Distributed Antenna System Troubles

D. System trouble signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and actions: 1. Open circuits, shorts, and grounds in designated circuits. 2. Opening, tampering with, or removing alarm-initiating and supervisory signal-initiating devices. 3. Loss of primary power at fire-alarm control unit. 4. Ground or a single break in fire-alarm control unit internal circuits. 5. Abnormal ac voltage at fire-alarm control unit. 6. Break in standby battery circuitry. 7. Failure of battery charging. 8. Abnormal position of any switch at fire-alarm control unit or annunciator. 9. Fire-pump power failure, including a dead-phase or phase-reversal condition. 10. Trouble output from any fire suppression system.

E. System Trouble and Supervisory Signal Actions: Initiate notification appliance and annunciate at fire-alarm control unit. Record the event on system printer.

2.3 FIRE-ALARM CONTROL UNITS

A. General Requirements for Voice Command Center and Network Nodes: 1. Field-programmable, microprocessor-based, modular, power-limited design with electronic

modules, complying with UL 864 and listed and labeled by an NRTL. a. System software and programs shall be held in flash electrically erasable programmable

read-only memory (EEPROM), retaining the information through failure of primary and secondary power supplies.

b. Include a real-time clock for time annotation of events on the event recorder and printer. 2. Addressable initiation devices that communicate device identity and status.

a. Smoke sensors shall additionally communicate sensitivity setting and allow for adjustment of sensitivity at fire-alarm control unit.

b. Temperature sensors shall additionally test for and communicate the sensitivity range of the device.

3. Addressable control circuits for operation of mechanical equipment.

B. Alphanumeric Display and System Controls: Arranged for interface between human operator at fire-alarm control unit and addressable system components including annunciation and supervision. Display alarm, supervisory, and component status messages and the programming and control menu. 1. Annunciator and Display: Liquid-crystal type, 80 characters, minimum. 2. Keypad: Arranged to permit entry and execution of programming, display, and control

commands and to indicate control commands to be entered into the system for control of smoke-detector sensitivity and other parameters.

C. Circuits: 1. Initiating Device, Notification Appliance, and Signaling Line Circuits: NFPA 72, Class B.


a. Initiating Device Circuits: Style B. b. Notification Appliance Circuits: Style Y. c. Signaling Line Circuits: Style 4. d. Node to Node: Class A, Style 7

2. Serial Interfaces: Two RS-232 ports for printers.

D. Smoke-Alarm Verification: 1. Initiate audible and visible indication of an "alarm-verification" signal at fire-alarm control unit. 2. Activate an NRTL-listed and -approved "alarm-verification" sequence at fire-alarm control unit

and detector. 3. Record events by the system printer. 4. Sound general alarm if the alarm is verified. 5. Cancel fire-alarm control unit indication and system reset if the alarm is not verified.

E. Notification Appliance Circuit: Operation shall sound in a Temporal 3 Pattern.

F. Elevator Recall: 1. Smoke detectors at the following locations shall initiate automatic elevator recall.Elevator lobby

detectors except the lobby detector on the designated floor. a. Smoke detector in elevator machine room. b. Smoke detectors in elevator hoistway.

2. Elevator lobby detectors located on the designated recall floors shall be programmed to move the cars to the alternate recall floor.

3. Water-flow alarm connected to sprinkler in an elevator shaft and elevator machine room shall shut down elevators associated with the location without time delay.

G. Door Controls: Door hold-open devices that are controlled by smoke detectors at doors in smoke barrier walls shall be connected to fire-alarm system.

H. Remote Smoke-Detector Sensitivity Adjustment: Controls shall select specific addressable smoke detectors for adjustment, display their current status and sensitivity settings, and change those settings.

I. Security Door Controls: Card access system shall be notified of alarms on each floor. Card access system will unlock required egress doors.

J. Transmission to Remote Alarm Receiving Station: Automatically transmit alarm, supervisory, and trouble signals to a remote alarm station.

K. Voice/Alarm Signaling Service: Central emergency communication system with microphones, preamplifiers, amplifiers, and tone generators provided in a separate cabinet located in the fire command center . 1. Indicated number of alarm channels for automatic, simultaneous transmission of different

announcements to different zones or for manual transmission of announcements by use of the central-control microphone. Amplifiers shall comply with UL 1711 and be listed by an NRTL. a. Allow the application of and evacuation signal to indicated number of zones and, at same

time, allow voice paging to the other zones selectively or in any combination. b. Programmable tone and message sequence selection. c. Standard digitally recorded messages for "Evacuation" and "All Clear." d. Special messages shall included owner provided messages in written form for “Weather” (4

messages), security (4 messages). Total message length of all special messages shall be less than 8 minutes. Each message shall be individually manually activated by manual switches located in the control panel. Messages shall be professionally recorded.

e. Generate tones to be sequenced with audio messages of type recommended by NFPA 72 and that are compatible with tone patterns of notification appliance circuits of fire-alarm control unit.


2. Status Annunciator: Indicate the status of various voice/alarm speaker zones and the status of firefighters' two-way telephone communication zones.

3. Preamplifiers, amplifiers, and tone generators shall automatically transfer to backup units, on primary equipment failure.

L. Printout of Events: On receipt of signal, print alarm, supervisory, and trouble events. Identify zone, device, and function. Include type of signal (alarm, supervisory, or trouble) and date and time of occurrence. Differentiate alarm signals from all other printed indications. Also print system reset event, including same information for device, location, date, and time. Commands initiate the printing of a list of existing alarm, supervisory, and trouble conditions in the system and a historical log of events.

M. Primary Power: 24-V dc obtained from 120-V ac service and a power-supply module. Initiating devices, notification appliances, signaling lines, trouble signals, supervisory signals supervisory and digital alarm communicator transmitters and digital alarm radio transmitters shall be powered by 24-V dc source. 1. Alarm current draw of entire fire-alarm system shall not exceed 80 percent of the power-supply

module rating.

N. Secondary Power: 24-V dc supply system with batteries, automatic battery charger, and automatic transfer switch. 1. Batteries: Sealed lead calcium .

O. Instructions: Computer printout or typewritten instruction card mounted behind a plastic or glass cover in a stainless-steel or aluminum frame. Include interpretation and describe appropriate response for displays and signals. Briefly describe the functional operation of the system under normal, alarm, and trouble conditions.

O.P. Network nodes shall contain all network interfaces, amplifiers, power supplies and notification appliance circuits for a self contained system than can operate independently form the main unit, in the event of communications failure.

2.4 MANUAL FIRE-ALARM BOXES

A. General Requirements for Manual Fire-Alarm Boxes: Comply with UL 38. Boxes shall be finished in red with molded, raised-letter operating instructions in contrasting color; shall show visible indication of operation; and shall be mounted on recessed outlet box. If indicated as surface mounted, provide manufacturer's surface back box. 1. Single-action mechanism, pull-lever type; with integral addressable module arranged to

communicate manual-station status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit.

2.5 SYSTEM SMOKE DETECTORS

A. General Requirements for System Smoke Detectors: 1. Comply with UL 268; operating at 24-V dc, nominal. 2. Detectors shall be two-wire type. 3. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm, or

trouble) to fire-alarm control unit. 4. Base Mounting: Detector and associated electronic components shall be mounted in a twist-lock

module that connects to a fixed base. Provide terminals in the fixed base for connection to building wiring.

5. Self-Restoring: Detectors do not require resetting or readjustment after actuation to restore them to normal operation.

6. Integral Visual-Indicating Light: LED type indicating detector has operated.


7. Remote Control: Unless otherwise indicated, detectors shall be analog-addressable type, individually monitored at fire-alarm control unit for calibration, sensitivity, and alarm condition and individually adjustable for sensitivity by fire-alarm control unit. a. Rate-of-rise temperature characteristic shall be selectable at fire-alarm control unit for 15

or 20 deg F per minute. b. Fixed-temperature sensing shall be independent of rate-of-rise sensing and shall be settable

at fire-alarm control unit to operate at 135 or 155 deg F. c. Provide multiple levels of detection sensitivity for each sensor.

B. Photoelectric Smoke Detectors: 1. Detector address shall be accessible from fire-alarm control unit and shall be able to identify the

detector's location within the system and its sensitivity setting. 2. An operator at fire-alarm control unit, having the designated access level, shall be able to

manually access the following for each detector: a. Primary status. b. Device type. c. Present average value. d. Present sensitivity selected. e. Sensor range (normal, dirty, etc.).

C. Duct Smoke Detectors: Photoelectric type complying with UL 268A. 1. Detector address shall be accessible from fire-alarm control unit and shall be able to identify the



3. Weatherproof Duct Housing Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 4X; NRTL listed for use with the supplied detector.

4. Each sensor shall have multiple levels of detection sensitivity. 5. Sampling Tubes: Design and dimensions as recommended by manufacturer for specific duct size,

air velocity, and installation conditions where applied. 6. Relay Fan Shutdown: Rated to interrupt fan motor-control circuit.

D. Beam Smoke Detectors: 1. Range: 300’ 2. Voltage: 24VDC nominal, power from fire alarm system 3. Control: monitor, reset and power directly from fire alarm node. 4. Provide with remote mirror. 5. Provide remote test station in accessible location.

E. Aspirating Smoke Detectors 1. Sensitivity Range: 0.0015% to 6% obs. / ft. 2. Filter: two stage 3. Coverage: 5000sq. ft. per sector. 4. Display: Bargraph. 5. Interface: Alarm and trouble through relay outputs to fire alarm node. 6. Piping System: provide concealed piping system utilizing manufacture approved piping materials.

Conceal piping system behind finishes. Sampling points shall utilize sample points either embed into finishes or utilizing clear tubing behind architectural features.

7. Manufacture: Suggested manufacture is VESDA, VLC series.


2.6 HEAT DETECTORS

A. General Requirements for Heat Detectors: Comply with UL 521.

B. Heat Detector, Combination Type: Actuated by either a fixed temperature of 135 deg F or a rate of rise that exceeds 15 deg F per minute unless otherwise indicated. 1. Mounting: Twist-lock base interchangeable with smoke-detector bases. 2. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm, or

trouble) to fire-alarm control unit.

C. Heat Detector, Linear Type: Cable detects heat anywhere along length utilizing heat sensitive insulation between conductors. Fixed temperature 155deg F. 1. Provide with messenger for mounting vertically. 2. Support only with manufacture approved hardware and clamps. 3. Provide manufacture approved splicing connectors, etc. 4. Provide addressable interface device for each segment.

2.7 FLAME DETECTORS

A. Ultraviolet type with solid-state amplifier-switching circuit set for 10-second delay, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Mounting: Adapter plate for outlet box mounting. 2. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm, or

trouble) to the FACP.

2.8 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES

A. General Requirements for Notification Appliances: Individually addressed, connected to a signaling line circuit, equipped for mounting as indicated and with screw terminals for system connections.

B. General Requirements for Notification Appliances: Connected to notification appliance signal circuits, zoned as indicated, equipped for mounting as indicated and with screw terminals for system connections. 1. Combination Devices: Factory-integrated audible and visible devices in a single-mounting

assembly, equipped for mounting as indicated and with screw terminals for system connections.

C. Visible Notification Appliances: Xenon strobe lights comply with UL 1971, with clear or nominal white polycarbonate lens mounted on an aluminum faceplate. The word "FIRE" is engraved in minimum 1-inch- high letters on the lens for fire devices and clear for amber lens mass notification devices. 1. Rated Light Output:

a. 15/30/75/110 cd, selectable in the field, select 15cd unless otherwise noted on plans. Notification devices with clear covers or wire guards shall be adjusted to provide the equivalent out shown on the drawings.

2. Mounting: Wall mounted unless otherwise indicated. 3. For units with guards to prevent physical damage, light output ratings shall be determined with

guards in place. 4. Flashing shall be in a temporal pattern, synchronized with other units. 5. Strobe Leads: Factory connected to screw terminals. 6. Mounting Faceplate: Factory finished, white. 6.7. Fire Alarm and Mass notification devices may be separate units mounted side-by-side or

combination units.


D. Voice/Tone Notification Appliances (Speakers): 1. High-Range Units: Rated 0.5 to 15 W, Reentrant Horn Type. 94dB @ 1W @ 10-ft. 80 degree

dispersion @ 2000hz, weather sealed onstruction. Ceiling mounted and wall mounted versions as shown on drawings

2. Low-Range Units: Rated 1 to 2 W, cone type, 83dB @ 1W @ 10-ft. 3. Mounting: Flush in finished areas and surface mounted in exposed areas. 4. Grill: Provide grill in finished areas. 5. Matching Transformers: Tap range matched to acoustical environment of speaker location.

2.9 FIREFIGHTERS' TWO-WAY TELEPHONE COMMUNICATION SERVICE

A. Dedicated, two-way, supervised, telephone voice communication links between fire-alarm control unit, the fire command center, and remote firefighters' telephone stations. Supervised telephone lines shall be connected to talk circuits by controls in a control module. Provide the following: 1. Common-talk type for firefighter use only. 2. Selective-talk type for use by firefighters and fire wardens. 3. Controls to disconnect phones from talk circuits if too many phones are in use simultaneously. 4. Audible Pulse and Tone Generator, and High-Intensity Lamp: When a remote telephone is

activated, it causes audible signal to sound and high-intensity lamp to flash. 5. Selector panel controls shall provide for simultaneous operation of up to six telephones in selected

zones. Indicate ground faults and open or shorted telephone lines on the panel front by individual LEDs.

6. Display: Liquid-crystal digital to indicate location of caller. 7. Remote Telephone Cabinet: Flush- or surface-mounted cabinet as indicated, factory-standard red

finish, with handset. a. Install one-piece handset to cabinet with vandal-resistant armored cord. Silk-screened or

engraved label on cabinet door, designating "Fire Emergency Phone." b. With "break-glass" type door access lock.

8. Remote Telephone Jack Stations: Single-gang, stainless-steel-plate mounted plug, engraved "Fire Emergency Phone."

9. Handsets: 5 sets with noise-canceling microphone stored in a cabinet in the fire command center.

2.10 MAGNETIC DOOR HOLDERS

A. Description: Units are provided by door hardware trade and are complete with matching doorplate. 1. Rating: 24-V dc.

2.11 ADDRESSABLE INTERFACE DEVICE

A. Description: Microelectronic monitor module, NRTL listed for use in providing a system address for alarm-initiating devices for wired applications with normally open contacts.

B. Integral Relay: Capable of providing a direct signal to elevator controller to initiate elevator recall and to circuit-breaker shunt trip for power shutdown.

2.12 DIGITAL ALARM COMMUNICATOR TRANSMITTER

A. Digital alarm communicator transmitter shall be acceptable to the remote central station and shall comply with UL 632 and be listed and labeled by an NRTL.


B. Functional Performance: Unit shall receive an alarm, supervisory, or trouble signal from fire-alarm control unit and automatically capture two telephone line(s) and dial a preset number for a remote central station. When contact is made with central station(s), signals shall be transmitted. If service on either line is interrupted for longer than 45 seconds, transmitter shall initiate a local trouble signal and transmit the signal indicating loss of telephone line to the remote alarm receiving station over the remaining line. Transmitter shall automatically report telephone service restoration to the central station. If service is lost on both telephone lines, transmitter shall initiate the local trouble signal.

C. Local functions and display at the digital alarm communicator transmitter shall include the following: 1. Verification that both telephone lines are available. 2. Programming device. 3. LED display. 4. Manual test report function and manual transmission clear indication. 5. Communications failure with the central station or fire-alarm control unit.

D. Digital data transmission shall include the following: 1. Address of the alarm-initiating device. 2. Zone of the supervisory signal. 3. Zone of the trouble-initiating device. 4. Loss of ac supply or loss of power. 5. Low battery. 6. Abnormal test signal. 7. Communication bus failure.

E. Secondary Power: Integral rechargeable battery and automatic charger.

F. Self-Test: Conducted automatically every 24 hours with report transmitted to central station.

2.13 PRINTERS

A. System rinter shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL as an integral part of fire-alarm system.

B. Desk Printer shall be provide hard copy printout of all system events, on tractor feed fan-fold, 9” x 1”’ paper. Power printer from UPS specified herein.

2.14 UPS (Uninterruptable Power Supply)

A. UPS shall be dual conversion type, network/server type, for powering graphic workstation and printer, with the following features as a minimum: 1. Size: 2100Watts/3000VA 2. Standby Time: 4 hours 3. Input Voltage: 120V 4. Output voltage: 120V 5. Batteries: Sealed Lead acid, provide separate battery pack as required for specified run time.

Batteries shall be sized for 100% capacity after 3 years in service. 6. Mounting: Floor Mounted. 7. Dimensions: maximum height shall be 28” to allow locating below countertop.

2.15 Specialty Cables:

A. Fire Rated Cables: Riser cables between nodes shall be 2 hour rated cable, Type FPLR-CI.


2.16 DEVICE GUARDS

A. Description: Welded wire mesh of size and shape for the manual station, smoke detector, strobe, or other device requiring protection. 1. Factory fabricated and furnished by manufacturer of device. 2. Finish: Paint of color to match the protected device.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NFPA 72 for installation of fire-alarm equipment.

B. Cables shall be installed in conduit.

C. Equipment Mounting: Install fire-alarm control unit on finished floor with tops of cabinets not more than 72 inches above the finished floor.

D. Install wall-mounted equipment, with tops of cabinets not more than 72 inches above the finished floor.

E. Smoke- or Heat-Detector Spacing: 1. Comply with NFPA 72, "Smoke-Sensing Fire Detectors" Section in the "Initiating Devices"

Chapter, for smoke-detector spacing. 2. Comply with NFPA 72, "Heat-Sensing Fire Detectors" Section in the "Initiating Devices" Chapter,

for heat-detector spacing. 3. Smooth ceiling spacing shall not exceed 30 feet . 4. Spacing of detectors for irregular areas, for irregular ceiling construction, and for high ceiling

areas shall be determined according to Appendix A in NFPA 72. 5. HVAC: Locate detectors not closer than 3 feet from air-supply diffuser or return-air opening. 6. Lighting Fixtures: Locate detectors not closer than 12 inches from any part of a lighting fixture.

F. Duct Smoke Detectors: Comply with NFPA 72 and NFPA 90A. Install sampling tubes so they extend the full width of duct.

G. Heat Detectors in Elevator Shafts: Coordinate temperature rating and location with sprinkler rating and location.

H. Heat Detectors in Pipe Ways: mount linear heat detector within 6” of pipes.

I. Remote Status and Alarm Indicators: Install near each smoke detector and each sprinkler water-flow switch and valve-tamper switch that is not readily visible from normal viewing position.

J. Audible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install not less than 6 inches below the ceiling. Install bells and horns on flush-mounted back boxes with the device-operating mechanism concealed behind a grille.

K. Visible Alarm-Indicating Devices: At least 6 inches below the ceiling.

L. Device Location-Indicating Lights: Locate in public space near the device they monitor.

M. Fire-Alarm Nodes: Surface mounted, with tops of cabinets not more than 72 inches above the finished floor.


N. Fire-Alarm Voice Command Centers: Flush mounted, with tops of cabinets not more than 72 inches above the finished floor.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. For fire-protection systems related to doors in fire-rated walls and partitions and to doors in smoke partitions, comply with requirements in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware." Connect hardware and devices to fire-alarm system. 1. Verify that hardware and devices are NRTL listed for use with fire-alarm system in this Section

before making connections.

B. Make addressable connections with a supervised interface device to the following devices and systems. Install the interface device less than 3 feet from the device controlled. Make an addressable confirmation connection when such feedback is available at the device or system being controlled. 1. Alarm-initiating connection to smoke-control system (smoke management) at firefighter smoke-

control system panel. 2. Alarm-initiating connection to stairwell and elevator-shaft pressurization systems. 3. Smoke dampers in air ducts of designated air-conditioning duct systems. 4. Alarm-initiating connection to elevator recall system and components. 5. Alarm-initiating connection to activate emergency lighting control. 6. Alarm-initiating connection to activate emergency shutoffs for gas and fuel supplies. 7. Supervisory connections at valve supervisory switches. 8. Supervisory connections at low-air-pressure switch of each dry-pipe sprinkler system. 9. Supervisory connections at elevator shunt trip breaker. 10. Supervisory connections at fire-pump power failure including a dead-phase or phase-reversal

condition. 11. Supervisory connections at fire-pump engine control panel. 12. Supervisory connections to the Distributed Antenna System Bi-Directional Amplifier (BDA).

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Install framed instructions in a location visible from fire-alarm control unit.

3.4 GROUNDING

A. Ground fire-alarm control unit and associated circuits; comply with IEEE 1100. Install a ground wire from main service ground to fire-alarm control unit.


A. Field tests shall be witnessed by Building Construction Manager .

B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

C. Perform tests and inspections.


1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.

D. Tests and Inspections: 1. Visual Inspection: Conduct visual inspection prior to testing.

a. Inspection shall be based on completed Record Drawings and system documentation that is required by NFPA 72 in its "Completion Documents, Preparation" Table in the "Documentation" Section of the "Fundamentals of Fire Alarm Systems" Chapter.

b. Comply with "Visual Inspection Frequencies" Table in the "Inspection" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA 72; retain the "Initial/Reacceptance" column and list only the installed components.

2. System Testing: Comply with "Test Methods" Table in the "Testing" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA 72.

3. Test audible appliances for the public operating mode according to manufacturer's written instructions. Perform the test using a portable sound-level meter complying with Type 2 requirements in ANSI S1.4.

4. Test audible appliances for the private operating mode according to manufacturer's written instructions.

5. Test Audible notification system for speech ineligibility. Minimum intelligibility shall be 0.5 STI. 6. Test visible appliances for the public operating mode according to manufacturer's written

instructions. 7. Factory-authorized service representative shall prepare the "Fire Alarm System Record of

Completion" in the "Documentation" Section of the "Fundamentals of Fire Alarm Systems" Chapter in NFPA 72 and the "Inspection and Testing Form" in the "Records" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA 72.

8. Adjust speaker taps when lowest sound pressure level in space is above 80dBA or highest sound pressure level is below 73dBA.

E. Reacceptance Testing: Perform reacceptance testing to verify the proper operation of added or replaced devices and appliances.

F. Fire-alarm system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

G. Prepare test and inspection reports.

H. Maintenance Test and Inspection: Perform tests and inspections listed for weekly, monthly, quarterly, and semiannual periods. Use forms developed for initial tests and inspections.

I. Annual Test and Inspection: One year after date of Substantial Completion, test fire-alarm system complying with visual and testing inspection requirements in NFPA 72. Use forms developed for initial tests and inspections.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain fire-alarm system.

B. Record all training on DVD for future playback to new employees.




FIRE ALARM SYSTEM INPUT/OUTPUT MATRIX

INITIATING DEVICE(S) AUDI

BLE

NOTI

FICA

TION

(FIR

E FL

OOR,

FLO

OR

BELO

W &

FLO

OR A

BOVE

)

VISU

AL N

OTIF

ICAT

ION

(FIR

E FL

OOR,

FLO

OR

BELO

W &

FLO

OR A

BOVE

)

PRE-

SIGN

AL C

HIME

AHU

NOTI

FICA

TION

(BY

FLOO

R)

DOOR

HOL

DER

RELE

ASE

& E

LEVA

TOR

SHUT

TER

RELE

ASE

ELEV

ATOR

REC

AL

AUDI

O VI

SUAL

SYS

TEM

OVER

RIDE

(FIR

E FL

OOR,

FL

OOR

ABOV

E &

BELO

W)

SECU

RITY

SYS

TEM

ALER

T (F

IRE

FLOO

R ON

LY)

FIRE

ALA

RM M

ESSA

GE

MASS

NOT

IFIC

ATIO

N ME

SSAG

E (O

N MA

NUAL

LY

SELE

CTED

FLO

ORS

ONLY

)

NOTES

MANUAL PULL STATIONS AFTER

15 SEC.

DELAY

AFTER 15

SEC. DELAY

X X X X

AREA SMOKE DETECTORS X X X DET. AT

DOORS ONLY

DET. AT

ELEV. ONLY

X X X TOP OF ELEV SHAFT & EQUIP. RM. DETECTORS RECALL ELEVATORS

AREA SMOKE DETECTORS (ATRIUM) X X X X X X

PROVIDE ADDITIONAL ALARM OUTPUT TO HVAC CONTROLS BY FLOOR.

BEAM SMOKE DETECTORS (ATRIUM ONLY) X X X X X X

PROVIDE ADDITIONAL ALARM OUTPUT TO HVAC CONTROLS BY FLOOR.

ASPERATING SMOKE DETECTOR X X X X X X

PROVIDE ADDITIONAL ALARM OUTPUT TO HVAC CONTROLS BY DETECTOR.

DUCT SMOKE DETECTORS X X X X

FLAME DETECTORS X X X IN GENERATOR ENCLOSURES

HEAT DETECTORS X X X X X TOP OF ELEV SHAFT & EQUIP. RM. DETECTORS SHUTDOWN POWER TO ELEVATORS

WATER FLOW SWITCHES X X X X X X

FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS X X X X X X

SECURITY DOOR RELEASE X MANUAL RELEASE OF DOORS BY EACH FLOOR.

MASS NOTIFICATION MANUAL MESSAGE SWITCHES X 8 SPECIAL MESSAGES.

Broward County Courthouse ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM (W/C/E) October 215, 2011 – EAST WING & NORTH TOWER Addendum #63 28 31 11 - 1

SECTION 28 31 121 - ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM – W/C/E (WEST AND CENTRAL COURTHOUSE AND ENERGY CENTER) – EAST WING & NORTH TOWER

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Fire-alarm control unit. 2. Manual fire-alarm boxes. 3. System smoke detectors. 4. Heat detectors. 5. Notification appliances. 6. Magnetic door holders. 7. Voice Command Center. 8. Addressable interface device.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. LED: Light-emitting diode.

B. NICET: National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies.

1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Additions and alterations to the existing Johnson Controls fire alarm system. System is a noncoded addressable system, with multiplexed signal transmission, dedicated to fire-alarm service only.

1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: For fire-alarm system. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Comply with recommendations in the "Documentation" Section of the "Fundamentals of Fire

Alarm Systems" Chapter in NFPA 72. 2. Include voltage drop calculations for notification appliance circuits. 3. Include battery-size calculations. 4. Include performance parameters and installation details for each detector, verifying that each

detector is listed for complete range of air velocity, temperature, and humidity possible when air-handling system is operating.


5. Include plans, sections, and elevations of heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning ducts, drawn to scale and coordinating installation of duct smoke detectors and access to them. Show critical dimensions that relate to placement and support of sampling tubes, detector housing, and remote status and alarm indicators. Locate detectors according to manufacturer's written recommendations.

6. Include voice/alarm signaling-service equipment rack or console layout, grounding schematic, amplifier power calculation, and single-line connection diagram.

7. Include floor plans to indicate final outlet locations showing address of each addressable device. Show size and route of cable and conduits.

C. General Submittal Requirements: 1. Submittals shall be approved by authorities having jurisdiction prior to submitting them to

Architect. 2. Shop Drawings shall be prepared by persons with the following qualifications:

a. Trained and certified by manufacturer in fire-alarm system design. b. NICET-certified fire-alarm technician, Level III minimum. c. Licensed or certified by authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For smoke and heat detectors indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1. Drawings showing the location of each smoke and heat detector, ratings of each, and installation

details as needed to comply with listing conditions of the detector. 2. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting the spacing and sensitivity of detection,

complying with NFPA 72.

1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

B. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For fire-alarm control unit, accessories, and components, from manufacturer. 1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of

assembled components or on calculation. 2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and

describe mounting and anchorage provisions. 3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their

installation requirements.

C. Field quality-control reports.

1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire-alarm systems and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: 1. Comply with the "Records" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in

NFPA 72. 2. Provide "Record of Completion Documents" according to NFPA 72 article "Permanent Records"

in the "Records" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter. 3. Record copy of site-specific software.


4. Provide "Maintenance, Inspection and Testing Records" according to NFPA 72 article of the same name and include the following: a. Frequency of testing of installed components. b. Frequency of inspection of installed components. c. Requirements and recommendations related to results of maintenance. d. Manufacturer's user training manuals.

5. Manufacturer's required maintenance related to system warranty requirements. 6. Abbreviated operating instructions for mounting at fire-alarm control unit.

B. Software and Firmware Operational Documentation: 1. Software operating and upgrade manuals. 2. Program Software Backup: On magnetic media or compact disk, complete with data files. 3. Device address list. 4. Printout of software application and graphic screens.


A. Installer Qualifications: Personnel shall be trained and certified by manufacturer for installation of units required for this Project.

B. Installer Qualifications: Installation shall be by personnel certified by NICET as fire-alarm Level III technician.

C. Source Limitations for Fire-Alarm System and Components: Obtain fire-alarm system from single source from single manufacturer. Components shall be compatible with, and operate as, an extension of existing system.

D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

E. NFPA Certification: Obtain certification according to NFPA 72 by an NRTL.


A. Interruption of Existing Fire-Alarm Service: Do not interrupt fire-alarm service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary guard service according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Construction Manager no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of fire-

alarm service. 2. Do not proceed with interruption of fire-alarm service without Construction Manager's written

permission.

1.10 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Existing Fire-Alarm Equipment: Maintain existing equipment fully operational until new equipment has been tested and accepted. As new equipment is installed, label it "NOT IN SERVICE" until it is accepted. Remove labels from new equipment when put into service and label existing fire-alarm equipment "NOT IN SERVICE" until removed from the building.

B. Equipment Removal: After acceptance of the fire-alarm system, remove existing disconnected fire-alarm equipment and wiring.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEMS OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION

A. Fire-alarm signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices: 1. Manual stations. 2. Heat detectors. 3. Smoke detectors. 4. Duct smoke detectors. 5. Automatic sprinkler system water flow. 6. Heat detectors in elevator shaft and pit. 7. Fire standpipe system. 8.

B. Fire-alarm signal shall initiate the following actions: 1. Continuously operate alarm notification appliances. 2. Identify alarm at fire-alarm control unit and voice command center 3. Transmit an alarm signal to the remote alarm receiving station. 4. Unlock electric door locks in designated egress paths. 5. Release fire and smoke doors held open by magnetic door holders. 6. Activate voice/alarm communication system. 7. Switch heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning equipment controls to fire-alarm mode. 8. Activate smoke-control system (smoke management) at firefighter smoke-control system panel. 9. Activate stairwell and elevator-shaft pressurization systems. 10. Close smoke dampers in air ducts of designated air-conditioning duct systems. 11. Recall elevators to primary or alternate recall floors. 12. Activate emergency lighting control. 13. Activate emergency shutoffs for gas and fuel supplies. 14. Record events in the system memory. 15. Record events by the system printer.

C. Supervisory signal initiation shall remain as is, unless noted otherwise herein.

D. System trouble signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and actions: 1. Open circuits, shorts, and grounds in designated circuits. 2. Opening, tampering with, or removing alarm-initiating and supervisory signal-initiating devices. 3. Loss of primary power at fire-alarm control unit. 4. Ground or a single break in fire-alarm control unit internal circuits. 5. Abnormal ac voltage at fire-alarm control unit. 6. Break in standby battery circuitry. 7. Failure of battery charging. 8. Abnormal position of any switch at fire-alarm control unit or annunciator. 9. Fire-pump power failure, including a dead-phase or phase-reversal condition. 10. Low-air-pressure switch operation on a dry-pipe or preaction sprinkler system.

E. System Trouble and Supervisory Signal Actions: Initiate notification appliance and annunciate at fire-alarm control unit and voice command center.

2.2 FIRE-ALARM CONTROL UNIT

A. General Requirements for Fire-Alarm Control Unit :


1. Existing Johnson Controls JCPU 3030 series shall be retained and modified to comply with this specification and the drawings.

2. Addressable control circuits for operation of mechanical equipment.

B. Alphanumeric Display and System Controls: Modify existing device labels as required for renovations.

C. Circuits: a. Existing circuit types shall be retained. New devices shall be connected with the same style

circuit as existing circuits in the building.

D. Notification Appliance Circuit: Operation shall remain as- is.

E. Elevator Recall: 1. Smoke detectors at the following locations shall initiate automatic elevator recall.Elevator lobby

detectors except the lobby detector on the designated floor. a. Smoke detector in elevator machine room. b. Smoke detectors in elevator hoistway.

2. Elevator lobby detectors located on the designated recall floors shall be programmed to move the cars to the alternate recall floor.

3. Water-flow alarm connected to sprinkler in an elevator shaft and elevator machine room shall shut down elevators associated with the location without time delay.

F.

G. Transmission to Remote Alarm Receiving Station: Transmission of alarms to a remote station shall remain as-is.

H. Voice/Alarm Signaling Service: 1. North Tower: Existing Voice/Alarm Signaling service shall be retained. The existing remote voice

command center shall be relocated to the new building tower. 2. East Wing: Existing Voice/Alarm Signaling service shall be retained. The existing control panel

shall be relocated to the east wing electrical room and a new remote voice command center shall be provided. Voice command system shall have the following features: a. Central emergency communication system with microphones, preamplifiers, and tone

generators provided in a separate cabinet located in the fire command center . 3. Indicated number of alarm channels for automatic, for manual transmission of announcements by

use of the central-control microphone. a. Allow the application of and evacuation signal to indicated number of zones and, allow

voice paging to zones selectively or in any combination. b. Programmable tone and message sequence selection. c. Standard digitally recorded messages for "Evacuation" and "All Clear." d. Generate tones to be sequenced with audio messages of type recommended by NFPA 72

and that are compatible with tone patterns of notification appliance circuits of fire-alarm control unit.

4. Status Annunciator: Indicate the status of various voice/alarm speaker zones and the status of firefighters' two-way telephone communication zones.

5. Preamplifiers, amplifiers, and tone generators shall automatically transfer to backup units, on primary equipment failure.

I. Primary Power: 24-V dc obtained from 120-V ac service and a power-supply module. Initiating devices, notification appliances, signaling lines, trouble signals, supervisory signals shall be powered by 24-V dc source. 1. Alarm current draw of entire fire-alarm system shall not exceed 80 percent of the power-supply

module rating.


J. Secondary Power: 24-V dc supply system with batteries, automatic battery charger, and automatic transfer switch. 1. Batteries: Sealed lead calcium.

K. Instructions: Computer printout or typewritten instruction card mounted behind a plastic or glass cover in a stainless-steel or aluminum frame. Include interpretation and describe appropriate response for displays and signals. Briefly describe the functional operation of the system under normal, alarm, and trouble conditions.

2.3 MANUAL FIRE-ALARM BOXES

A. General Requirements for Manual Fire-Alarm Boxes: Comply with UL 38. Boxes shall be finished in red with molded, raised-letter operating instructions in contrasting color; shall show visible indication of operation; and shall be mounted on recessed outlet box. If indicated as surface mounted, provide manufacturer's surface back box. 1. Single-action mechanism, pull-lever type; with integral addressable module arranged to

communicate manual-station status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit.

2.4 SYSTEM SMOKE DETECTORS

A. General Requirements for System Smoke Detectors: 1. Comply with UL 268; operating at 24-V dc, nominal. 2. Detectors shall be two-wire type. 3. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm, or

trouble) to fire-alarm control unit. 4. Base Mounting: Detector and associated electronic components shall be mounted in a twist-lock

module that connects to a fixed base. Provide terminals in the fixed base for connection to building wiring.

5. Self-Restoring: Detectors do not require resetting or readjustment after actuation to restore them to normal operation.

6. Integral Visual-Indicating Light: LED type indicating detector has operated. 7. Remote Control: Unless otherwise indicated, detectors shall be analog-addressable type,

individually monitored at fire-alarm control unit for calibration, sensitivity, and alarm condition and individually adjustable for sensitivity by fire-alarm control unit. a. Rate-of-rise temperature characteristic shall be selectable at fire-alarm control unit for 15

or 20 deg F (8 or 11 deg C) per minute. b. Fixed-temperature sensing shall be independent of rate-of-rise sensing and shall be settable

at fire-alarm control unit to operate at 135 or 155 deg F (57 or 68 deg C). c. Provide multiple levels of detection sensitivity for each sensor.

B. Photoelectric Smoke Detectors: 1. Detector address shall be accessible from fire-alarm control unit and shall be able to identify the



C. Duct Smoke Detectors: Photoelectric type complying with UL 268A.


1. Detector address shall be accessible from fire-alarm control unit and shall be able to identify the detector's location within the system and its sensitivity setting.

2. An operator at fire-alarm control unit, having the designated access level, shall be able to manually access the following for each detector: a. Primary status. b. Device type. c. Present average value. d. Present sensitivity selected. e. Sensor range (normal, dirty, etc.).

3. Weatherproof Duct Housing Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 4X; NRTL listed for use with the supplied detector.

4. Each sensor shall have multiple levels of detection sensitivity. 5. Sampling Tubes: Design and dimensions as recommended by manufacturer for specific duct size,

air velocity, and installation conditions where applied. 6. Relay Fan Shutdown: Rated to interrupt fan motor-control circuit.

2.5 HEAT DETECTORS

A. General Requirements for Heat Detectors: Comply with UL 521.

B. Heat Detector, Combination Type: Actuated by either a fixed temperature of 135 deg F (57 deg C) or a rate of rise that exceeds 15 deg F (8 deg C) per minute unless otherwise indicated. 1. Mounting: Twist-lock base interchangeable with smoke-detector bases. 2. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm, or


C. Heat Detector, Fixed-Temperature Type: Actuated by temperature that exceeds a fixed temperature of 190 deg F (88 deg C). 1. Mounting: Twist-lock base interchangeable with smoke-detector bases. 2. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm, or


2.6 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES

A. General Requirements for Notification Appliances: Individually addressed, connected to a signaling line circuit, equipped for mounting as indicated and with screw terminals for system connections.

B. General Requirements for Notification Appliances: Connected to notification appliance signal circuits, zoned as indicated, equipped for mounting as indicated and with screw terminals for system connections. 1. Combination Devices: Factory-integrated audible and visible devices in a single-mounting

assembly, equipped for mounting as indicated and with screw terminals for system connections.

C. Visible Notification Appliances: Xenon strobe lights comply with UL 1971, with clear or nominal white polycarbonate lens mounted on an aluminum faceplate. The word "FIRE" is engraved in minimum 1-inch- (25-mm-) high letters on the lens. 1. Rated Light Output:

a. 15/30/75/110 cd, selectable in the field. Select 15cd unless otherwise noted. 2. Mounting: Wall mounted unless otherwise indicated. 3. For units with guards to prevent physical damage, light output ratings shall be determined with

guards in place. 4. Flashing shall be in a temporal pattern, synchronized with other units. 5. Strobe Leads: Factory connected to screw terminals.


6. Mounting Faceplate: Factory finished, to match existing devices.

D. Voice/Tone Notification Appliances (Speakers): 1. High-Range Units: Rated 2 to 15 W, Reentrant Horn Type. 2. Low-Range Units: Rated 1 to 2 W. 3. Mounting: Flush semirecessed or surface mounted. 4. Matching Transformers: Tap range matched to acoustical environment of speaker location.

2.7 FIREFIGHTERS' TWO-WAY TELEPHONE COMMUNICATION SERVICE 1. Extend existing circuits and connect new fire phone jacks. 2. Remote Telephone Jack Stations: Single-gang, stainless-steel-plate mounted plug, engraved "Fire

Emergency Phone."

2.8 MAGNETIC DOOR HOLDERS

A. Description: Units are equipped for wall or floor mounting as indicated and are complete with matching doorplate. 1. Rating: 24-V ac or dc.

2.9 ADDRESSABLE INTERFACE DEVICE

A. Description: Microelectronic monitor module, NRTL listed for use in providing a system address for alarm-initiating devices for wired applications with normally open contacts.

B. Integral Relay: Capable of providing a direct signal to elevator controller to initiate elevator recall and to circuit-breaker shunt trip for power shutdown. 1.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NFPA 72 for installation of fire-alarm equipment.

B. Cables shall be installed in conduit.

C. Equipment Mounting: Install fire-alarm control unit on finished floor with tops of cabinets not more than 72 inches (1830 mm) above the finished floor. 1. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices specified in Division 26 Section

"Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

D. Install wall-mounted equipment, with tops of cabinets not more than 72 inches (1830 mm) above the finished floor. 1. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices specified in Division 26 Section

"Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

E. Connecting to Existing Equipment: Verify that existing fire-alarm system is operational before making changes or connections. 1. Connect new equipment to existing control panel in existing part of the building.


2. Connect new equipment to existing monitoring equipment at the supervising station. 3. Expand, modify, and supplement existing control equipment as necessary to extend existing

control functions to the new points. New components shall be capable of merging with existing configuration without degrading the performance of either system.

F. Smoke- or Heat-Detector Spacing: 1. Comply with NFPA 72, "Smoke-Sensing Fire Detectors" Section in the "Initiating Devices"

Chapter, for smoke-detector spacing. 2. Comply with NFPA 72, "Heat-Sensing Fire Detectors" Section in the "Initiating Devices" Chapter,

for heat-detector spacing. 3. Smooth ceiling spacing shall not exceed 30 feet (9 m). 4. Spacing of detectors for irregular areas, for irregular ceiling construction, and for high ceiling

areas shall be determined according to Appendix Ain NFPA 72. 5. HVAC: Locate detectors not closer than 3 feet (1 m) from air-supply diffuser or return-air

opening. 6. Lighting Fixtures: Locate detectors not closer than 12 inches (300 mm) from any part of a lighting

fixture.

G. Duct Smoke Detectors: Comply with NFPA 72 and NFPA 90A. Install sampling tubes so they extend the full width of duct.

H. Heat Detectors in Elevator Shafts: Coordinate temperature rating and location with sprinkler rating and location.

I. Remote Status and Alarm Indicators: Install near each smoke detector and each sprinkler water-flow switch and valve-tamper switch that is not readily visible from normal viewing position.

J. Audible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install not less than 6 inches (150 mm) below the ceiling. Install bells and horns on flush-mounted back boxes with the device-operating mechanism concealed behind a grille.

K. Visible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install adjacent to each alarm bell or alarm horn and at least 6 inches (150 mm) below the ceiling.

L. Device Location-Indicating Lights: Locate in public space near the device they monitor.

M. Fire-Alarm Control Unit: Surface mounted, with tops of cabinets not more than 72 inches (1830 mm) above the finished floor.

N. Voice Command Center: Install with top of panel not more than 72 inches (1830 mm) above the finished floor.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. For fire-protection systems related to doors in fire-rated walls and partitions and to doors in smoke partitions, comply with requirements in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware." Connect hardware and devices to fire-alarm system. 1. Verify that hardware and devices are NRTL listed for use with fire-alarm system in this Section

before making connections.

B. Make addressable connections with a supervised interface device to the following devices and systems. Install the interface device less than 3 feet (1 m) from the device controlled. Make an addressable confirmation connection when such feedback is available at the device or system being controlled.


1. Alarm-initiating connection to smoke-control system (smoke management) at firefighter smoke-control system panel.

2. Alarm-initiating connection to stairwell and elevator-shaft pressurization systems. 3. Smoke dampers in air ducts of designated air-conditioning duct systems. 4. Alarm-initiating connection to elevator recall system and components. 5. Alarm-initiating connection to activate emergency lighting control. 6. Alarm-initiating connection to activate emergency shutoffs for gas and fuel supplies. 7. Supervisory connections at valve supervisory switches. 8. Supervisory connections at low-air-pressure switch of each dry-pipe sprinkler system. 9. Supervisory connections at elevator shunt trip breaker. 10. Supervisory connections at fire-pump engine control panel. 11. Supervisory connections to the Distributed Antenna System Bi-Directional Amplifier (BDA).

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Install framed instructions in a location visible from fire-alarm control unit.

3.4 GROUNDING

A. Ground fire-alarm control unit and associated circuits; comply with IEEE 1100. Install a ground wire from main service ground to fire-alarm control unit.


A. Field tests shall be witnessed by Architect authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

C. Perform tests and inspections. 1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect

components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.

2.

D. Tests and Inspections: 1. Visual Inspection: Conduct visual inspection prior to testing.

a. Inspection shall be based on completed Record Drawings and system documentation that is required by NFPA 72 in its "Completion Documents, Preparation" Table in the "Documentation" Section of the "Fundamentals of Fire Alarm Systems" Chapter.

b. Comply with "Visual Inspection Frequencies" Table in the "Inspection" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA 72; retain the "Initial/Reacceptance" column and list only the installed components.

2. System Testing: Comply with "Test Methods" Table in the "Testing" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA 72.

3. Test audible appliances for the public operating mode according to manufacturer's written instructions. Perform the test using a portable sound-level meter complying with Type 2 requirements in ANSI S1.4.


4. Test audible appliances for the private operating mode according to manufacturer's written instructions.

5. Test Audible notification system for speech ineligibility. Minimum intelligibility shall be 0.5 STI. 6. Test visible appliances for the public operating mode according to manufacturer's written

instructions. 7. Factory-authorized service representative shall prepare the "Fire Alarm System Record of

Completion" in the "Documentation" Section of the "Fundamentals of Fire Alarm Systems" Chapter in NFPA 72 and the "Inspection and Testing Form" in the "Records" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA 72.

E. Reacceptance Testing: Perform reacceptance testing to verify the proper operation of added or replaced devices and appliances.

F. Fire-alarm system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

G. Prepare test and inspection reports.

H. Maintenance Test and Inspection: Perform tests and inspections listed for weekly, monthly, quarterly, and semiannual periods. Use forms developed for initial tests and inspections.

I. Annual Test and Inspection: One year after date of Substantial Completion, test fire-alarm system complying with visual and testing inspection requirements in NFPA 72. Use forms developed for initial tests and inspections.


SECTION 32 18 26 - SYNTHETIC GRASS SURFACING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Installation of new synthetic grass surfacing.

B. Prepared base and infill.


A. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ASTM D 1596 - Test Method for Dynamic Shock Cushioning Characteristics of Packaging Material.

B. ASTM E 105 - Practice for Probability Sampling Materials.

C. ASTM F 355 - Standard Test Method for Shock-Absorbing Properties of Playing Surface and MAterials, 2001.

D. ASTM F 1292 - Specification for Impact Attenuation of Surface Systems Under and Around Playground Equipment.

E. SAE Recommended Practice J211-1 March 1995 Instrumentation for Impact Tests, Part 1-Electronic Instrumentation.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures, for submittal procedures.

B. Product Data: For all manufactured surfacing products, provide manufacturer's product data showing materials of construction, compliance with specified standards, installation procedures, and safety limitations.

C. Product Data: For synthetic grass surfacing materials, provide supplier's certification or certificate showing compliance with specified requirements.

D. Shop Drawings: Detailed scale drawings showing locations for installation of proposed synthetic grass surfacing including the following: 1. Clearly identify seam details and layout. 2. Show locations of edging and details.

E. Samples: For each product for which color must be selected provide color chart showing full range of colors.

F. Maintenance Data: 1. For manufactured surfacing products, provide manufacturer's recommended maintenance

instructions and list of repair products, with address and phone number of source of supply.

G. Manufacturer's Field Report.


A. The manufacturer shall be experienced in the manufacturing of tufted, polyolefin grass-like fabric with resilient infill.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company regularly engaged in manufacturing products specified in this section, with not less than eight years of experience. 1. Surfacing installed in minimum 10 sites and been in successful service minimum 8 years.

Broward County Courthouse SYNTHETIC GRASS SURFACING October 21, 2011 32 18 26 - 1 Addendum #6

C. Installer Qualifications: Company certified by manufacturer for training and experience installing the

synthetic grass surfacing; provide installer's company name and address, and training and experience certificate.


A. Convene a meeting one week before starting installation to discuss coordination between trades affected by the installation. 1. Require attendance by personnel responsible for installation of synthetic grass surfacing and

adjacent work. 2. Include representatives of Contractor. 3. Notify Architect at least 2 weeks prior to meeting.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION

A. Deliver, handle, and store surfacing to project site in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Store materials in a dry, covered area, elevated above grade.

1.8 WARRANTY


B. Provide minimum 8 year warranty for synthetic grass surfacing covering products and installation from the date of substantial completion of the installation of the artificial turf system.

C. The warranty shall state coverage of workmanship, material defects, excessive color change, non-uniform color changes, excessive loss of porosity, excessive wear, ability to meet the ASTM F355 procedure A requirements over the warranty period, and any other feature that is deemed to not be ordinary wear and tear on artificial turf playing field surfaces as specified in these specifications and the current standard product information literature and specifications.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Synthetic Grass Surfacing 1. Basis of Design Manufacturer:

a. FieldTurf; Product Nutmeg LUSH (GF-LIT-ON): www.fieldturf.com 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Synthetic Grass Surface: 1. Composition: Polyethylene. 2. Structure: Monofilament, arched profile with support structure spine. 3. Yarn Count: 90000 denier main blades/5600 denier thatch layer. 4. Tufting: In line. 5. Gauge: 3/8". 6. Pile Height: 1.625 inches. 7. Total Weight: 94 oz./sq.yd. 8. Roll Width: 15 feet.

B. Safety Drainage Pad: 1. Composition: 100% recyclable and reusable post industrial closed cell polyethylene. 2. Structure: Cross-link with grooved base for superior drainage. 3. Thickness: 2 1/8 inches.


4. Standard Dimensions: 2 inches x 46 inches x 92 inch sheets. 5. Density: Approx. 2 lb to 4 lbs. per cubic foot.Fiber Density: 2484. 6. Product Weight: 101 oz/sq.yd. 7. Weight: Approx. >0.57 lbs./sq.ft. 8. Coefficient of Permeability: K20 @ 20C: 4.5 x 10(-2) cm/sec. 9. Tensile Strength: >9 k/Nm. 10. Static Puncture Test: 1400 N.

C. Ballast: 1. Ballasting sand shall be siliceous (95% min) washed and dried. Rubber granules (SBR) must be

clean with 1% of small elements under 0.5mm. The grains shall be as round as possible. 2. Sand Type d/D - granule size 0.5 / 1.2mm. 3. Quantity: Minimum of 2 lbs/sf.

D. Drainage Characteristics: 1. Turf shall be independently tested to verify a minimum drainage rate of 100 inches per square foot

per hour. 2. Turf with drainage holes shall not be allowed.Idependent drainage reports provided should display

drainage rate in square feet and not square yards.

E. Turf Color: As selected.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Installation is to commence only if the base where artificial turf material must be installed up to or on top, is completed and accepted.

B. Installation shall not commence and continue if adjacent or concurrent construction operations generate dust, airborne abrasives or any other by-product that, in the opinion of the ATC, would be harmful to the artificial turf material.

C. Installation is to commence and continue only if adequate procedures have been enforced to prevent contamination of the area to be surfaced by work of other craftsmen and trades, site trespassing, maintenance activities around the site, by dirty rain water, etc.

D. Installation is to commence and continue only if adequate procedures have been enforced to secure the area to be surfaced from unwanted pedestrian and vehicular access.

E. Installation is to commence and continue only if weather is dry. The minimum temperature at any point in a 24-hour cycle shall be of 50°F. The temperature during actual installation shall be at a minimum of 65°F. If in the opinion of the ATC weather and climatic conditions are having or will have an adverse effect on the installation, work shall be delayed until the adverse conditions have passed.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Installation is to commence and continue only if the environmental and site conditions are in accordance with these specifications and with the Manufacturer's current recommendations for installation of the selected product.

B. The installation of the artificial turf system is to comply with the shop drawing reviewed and accepted by the Contractor, with the specifications herein and with the Manufacturer's specifications and instructions.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions. The Turf Contractor shall strictly adhere to the installation procedures outlined under this section. Any variance from these requirements must be accepted in writing, by the Manufacturer’s onsite representative, and submitted to the Architect/Owner,


verifying that the changes do not in any way affect the warranty. Infill materials shall be approved by the Manufacturer and installed in accordance with the Manufacturer’s standard procedures.

B. The aggregate sub-base should be compacted in 2 inch layer increments until the final depth of compacted aggregate sub-base is a minimum of 4 inches.

C. The carpet rolls are to be installed directly over the properly prepared aggregate base (and shock pad if applicable). Extreme care should be taken to avoid disturbing the aggregate base, both in regard to compaction and planarity.

D. Infill materials shall be applied in numerous thin lifts. The turf shall be brushed as the mixture is applied. The infill material shall be installed to a depth determined by the Manufacturer.

E. The Infill materials shall be installed to fill the voids between the fibers and allow the fibers to remain vertical and non-directional. The Infill installation consists of a base layer of sand followed by a homogenous mixture of the sand and the crumb rubber. The Infill shall be installed to a minimum depth of ¾ of an inch. Infill density shall consist of no less than 1.5 pounds of sand and at least ½ pound of rubber per square foot. The Infill shall be placed so that there is a void of at least ¾” to the top of the fibers upon settling.

F. Synthetic turf shall be attached to perimeter edge nailer board using only stainless steel staples every inch along the edge of the installation. Nailer board to be constructed of high density polyethylene (HDPE) or similar. Pressure treated wood products are NOT acceptable. Nailer board separating sub-base materials from adjacent soft materials (such as dirt, mulch or other) MUST be the height of the installed sub-base for the synthetic turf.

3.4 CLEAN-UP

A. Protect installed FieldTurf from subsequent construction operations.

B. Do not permit traffic over unprotected surface.

C. Contractor shall provide the labor, supplies, and equipment as necessary for final cleaning of surfaces and installed items upon completion of installation.

D. All usable remnants of new material shall be the property of the Contractor.

E. The Contractor shall keep the area clean throughout the project and clear of debris.

3.5 TESTING AND INSPECTIONS

A. Prior to the production of the artificial turf and infill material, the Installer shall submit three (3) samples of the artificial turf system in its final constructed form in an easily transportable case with a removable cover, 10” x 10” in size. The Owner's independent laboratory shall perform laboratory tests. These tests to be performed at the Owner's expense. The test results of these samples shall meet or exceed these specifications and the specifications that the Manufacturer has supplied for the proposed product within the Installer's tender submission. The Owner shall approve these samples prior to the production of the artificial turf and infill material. The cost for the initial testing will be at the Owner's expense. The cost of any subsequent testing done, as a result of the initial samples tested failing to meet these specifications and the specifications that the Manufacturer as supplied for the proposed product within the Manufacturer's tender submission, will be at the Manufacturer's expense.

B. Prior to installation or during installation or at completion of installation of the artificial turf if the Owner has any questions or doubts about the quality of the material or installation, the Owner's independent laboratory shall perform field or laboratory tests. Any material failing to meet or exceed these specifications or the specifications that the Manufacturer has supplied for the proposed product within the Manufacturer's tender submission will be repaired or replaced as necessary, at the Manufacturer's expense. The cost for the initial testing shall be at the Owner's expense. The cost of any subsequent testing done as a result of the initial samples tested failing to meet these specifications and the



specifications that the Manufacturer has supplied for the proposed product within the Manufacturer's tender submission will be at the Manufacturer's expense.

END OF SECTION